Sbi Clerical Rect Advertisement 2019 PDF

Line Thermal Printer
ESC/POS® Mode
Command Specifications
Revision 2.40
Star Micronics Co., Ltd.

Special Products Division
ESC/POS Command Specifications

Contents
1. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION 1-1
1-1 RS-232 Serial Interface 1-1
1-1-1 Specifications (Conforming to RS-232) 1-1
1-1-2 Switching Between Online and Offline 1-1
1-1-3 Signal Array and Explanations According to Interface Connector Pin 1-2
1-1-4 Timing for Transmitting XON/XOFF 1-3
1-1-5 Serial Interface Connection Example 1-3
1-1-6 Precautions When Switching the BUSY Conditions 1-4
1-1-7 Notes on resetting the printer using the interface 1-5
1-2 Bi-directional Parallel Interface (IEEE1284) 1-6
1-2-1 Compatibility Mode (Host – Printer Communications: Conforms to Centronix) 1-6
1-2-2 Reverse Mode (Printer to Host Communications) 1-6
1-2-3 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement for Each Mode 1-7
1-2-4 Data Reception Timing (Compatibility Mode) 1-8
1-2-5 Precautions When Resetting the Printer Using the Interface 1-9
1-2-6 Receiving Status from the Printer Using a Bidirectional Parallel Interface 1-9
1-3 USB Interface 1-10
1-4 Ethernet Interface 1-10
1-5 Wireless LAN Interface 1-10
1-6 Powered USB 1-10
1-7 Bluetooth Interface 1-10
2 EXPLANATION OF THE PAGE MODE 2-1
2-1 General Description 2-1
2-2 Settings Using Commands in Standard Mode and Page Mode 2-1
2-3 Expanding Print Data to the Print Region 2-2
3. COMMAND FUNCTION LIST 3-1
4. COMMAND DETAILS 4-1
4-1 Explanation of Terms 4-1
4-2 Exception Processing 4-3
4-3 Command Details 4-4
4-3-1 Standard Commands 4-4
HT 4-4
LF 4-5
FF 4-6
CR 4-7
CAN 4-8
DLE EOT n 4-9
DLE ENQ n 4-10
DLE DC4 n m t 4-11
ESC FF 4-12
ESC SP n 4-13
ESC ! n 4-14
ESC $ nL nH 4-15
ESC % n 4-16
ESC& yc1c2 [x1d1...d (y x x1) ] ... [axd1...d (yxax)] 4-17
ESC * m nL nH d1…dk 4-20
ESC - n 4-22
ESC 2 4-23
ESC 3 n 4-24
ESC = n 4-25
ESC ? n 4-26
ESC @ 4-27
ESC D n1 … nk NUL 4-28
ESC E n 4-29

ESC G n 4-30
ESC J n 4-31
ESC L 4-32
ESC M n 4-33
ESC R n 4-34
ESC S 4-35
ESC T n 4-36
ESC V n 4-37
ESC W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH 4-38
ESC \ nL nH 4-40
ESC a n 4-41
ESC c 3 n 4-42
ESC c 4 n 4-43
ESC c 5 n 4-44
ESC d n 4-45
ESC p m t1 t2 4-46
ESC t n 4-47
ESC { n 4-48
FS g 1 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH d1 ... dk 4-49
FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH 4-51
FS p n m 4-53
FS q n [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] 1... [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] n 4-54
GS ! n 4-57
GS $ nL nH 4-59
GS * xy d1 … d (xX yX 8) 4-60
<Function 49> GS ( K pL pH fn m (Fn=49) 4-63
<Function 50> GS ( K pL pH fn m (Fn=50) 4-65
GS ( L pL pH m fn [parameter] 4-66
GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn [parameter] 4-66
<Function 48> GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=48) 4-67
<Function 48> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn (fn=48) 4-67
<Function 51> GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=51) 4-68
<Function 51> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn (fn=51) 4-68
<Function 64> GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 (fn=64) 4-69
<Function 64> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 (fn=64) 4-69
<Function 65> GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 d3 (fn=65) 4-70
<Function 65> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3 (fn=65) 4-70
<Function 66> GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 (fn=66) 4-71
<Function 66> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 (fn=66) 4-71
<Function 67> GS ( L pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b (fn=67)4-72
<Function 67> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b
(fn=67) 4-72
<Function 69> GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 x y (fn=69) 4-74
<Function 66> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y (fn=69) 4-74
<Function 112> GS ( L pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1...dk (fn=112) 4-76
<Function 112> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1…dk (fn=112) 4-76
GS ( N pL pH n m 4-77
GS ( k pL pH cn fn [parameter] 4-78
<Function 065> GS ( k pL pH m cn n (cn=48, fn=65) 4-79
<Function 066> GS ( k pL pH m cn n (cn=48, fn=66) 4-80
<Function 067> GS ( k pL pH cn fn n (cn=48, fn=67) 4-81
<Function 069> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n (cn=48, fn=69) 4-82
<Function 70> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m (cn=48, fn=70) 4-83
<Function 080> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m d1...dk (cn=48, fn=80) 4-83
<Function 165> GS ( k pL pH cn fn n1 n2 (cn=49, fn=65) 4-86
<Function 371> GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH (cn=51, fn=71) 4-89
<Function 380> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n d1...dk (cn=51, fn=80) 4-90
<Function 471> GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH (cn=52, fn=71) 4-92
<Function 480> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m a b d1...dk (cn=52, fn=80) 4-94
GS / m 4-97
GS: 4-98
GS B n 4-99
GS C 0 n m 4-100
GS C 1 aL aH bL bH n r 4-101
GS C 2 nL nH 4-102
GS C ; sa; sb; sn; sr; sc; 4-103
GS E n 4-104
GS H n 4-105
GS I n 4-106
GS L nL nH 4-108
GS P x y 4-109
GS T n 4-111
GS V m 4-112
GS V m n 4-113
GS W nL nH 4-114
GS \ nL nH 4-115
GS ^ r t m 4-116
GS b n 4-117
GS c 4-118
GS f n 4-119
GS h n 4-120
1. GS k m d1 … dk NUL, 4-121
2.3. GS k m n d1 … dk 4-121
GS r n 4-128
GS v 0 m xL xH yL yH d1 … dk 4-129
GS w n 4-131
4-3-2 Chinese Character Control Commands 4-132
FS ! n 4-132
FS & 4-133
FS – n 4-135
FS . 4-136
FS 2 c1 c2 d1 … dk 4-137
FS C n 4-139
FS S n1 n2 4-140
FS W n 4-141
4-3-3 ESC/POS Black Mark Commands 4-142
FF 4-143
DLE ENQ n 4-144
GS FF 4-145
GS ( F pL pH a m nL nH 4-146
GS ( M pL pH n m (Function Code: n = 1, 49) 4-147
GS < 4-150
GS V m n 4-151
4-3-4 STAR Original Commands 4-152
ESC GS = nL nH da1 … dak db1 …dbk 4-152
ESC GS t n 4-153
ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL 4-155
ESC RS F n 4-157
ESC RS C n 4-158
ESC RS L m 4-159
ESC GS ETX s n1 n2 4-160
4-3-5 STAR Original Presenter Control Commands 4-164
ESC SYN 0 n 4-164
ESC SYN 1 n 4-165
ESC SYN 3 n 4-166
ESC SYN 4 n 4-167
ESC GS SUB DC1 m t1 t2 4-168
4-3-6 STAR Original Mark Commands 4-171
ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3 … mk 4-172
ESC GS * 1 h v 4-173
ESC GS * 2 m c w 4-174
ESC GS * W 4-175
ESC GS * C 4-175
4-3-7 STAR Original Auto Logo Commands 4-176
ESC GS / W 4-179
ESC GS / C 4-180
ESC GS / 1 n 4-181
ESC GS / 2 n 4-182
ESC GS / 3 nL nH d1 d2 … dk 4-183
ESC GS / 4 nL nH d1 d2 ... dk 4-184
ESC GS / 5 n 4-185
ESC GS / 6 n 4-186
4-3-8 STAR Original Buzzer Commands 4-187
ESC GS BEL m t1 t2 4-187
ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2 4-188
ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2 4-189
4-3-9 Two-dimensional Bar Code 2D Code PDF417 Command Details 4-190
ESC GS x S 0 n p1 p2 4-193
ESC GS x S 1 n 4-193
ESC GS x D nL nH d1 d2 … dk 4-195
ESC GS x P 4-196
ESC GS x I 4-197
4-3-10 STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands 4-198
ESC GS g 0 m n 4-198
ESC GS g 1 m n 4-198
4-3-11 STAR Original 2-Dimensional Bar Code QR Code Command Details 4-199
ESC GS y S 0 n 4-201
ESC GS y D 1 m nL nH d1 d2 … dk 4-202
ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1L n1H d11 d12 • • • d1k m2 n2L n2H d21 d22 • • • d2k ml • • • dlk 4-203
ESC GS y P 4-205
ESC GS y I 4-205
4-3-12 STAR Original Page Function Commands 4-206
ESC GS h 0 k m n 4-206
ESC GS h 1 k m n 4-207
4-3-13 Star Original Reduced Printing Function Command 4-209
ESC GS c h v 4-209
4-3-14 STAR Original Text Search Commands 4-210
ESC GS ) B pL pH fn [parameter] 4-210
<Function 48> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m (fn = 48) 4-212
<Function 64> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m k d1…dk (fn = 64) 4-215
<Function 65> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m k1 k2 d1…dk (fn = 65) 4-216
<Function 66> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn n t (fn = 66) 4-217
4-3-15 Star Original Printer Information Transmission Commands 4-221
ESC GS ) I pL pH fn [parameter] 4-221
<Function 48> ESC GS ) I pL pH fn d1 d2 4-222
4-3-16 Star Original Individual Logo Commands 4-223
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn [parameter] 4-223
<Function 48> ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 4-224
<Function 49> ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 4-226
<Function 50> E S C G S ) L p L p H f n d 1 d 2 4-227
ESC GS s O z a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2 4-228
ESC GS s P 4-229
ESC GS s R z n1 n2 n3 d1 … dn 4-229
ESC GS s U z n [k1 k2 k3 d1 … dk]1 … [k1 k2 k3 d1 … dk]n 4-232
ESC GS s T a t1 t2 4-234
5. CHARACTER CODE TABLE 5-1
6. APPENDIX 6-1
6-1 Appendix 1 Cautions 6-1
6-2 Appendix 2 Status Specifications 6-2
6-2-1 Identifying Transmission Status 6-2
6-2-2 Error Details Per Model 6-2
6-2-3 DLE EOT Status 6-3
6-2-4 ASB Status Specifications 6-6
6-2-5 Printer Status Transmission Specification When Using Ethernet and Wireless I/F 6-9
6-3 Appendix-3 Blank Page Configuration 6-12
6-4 Appendix 4 Standard Mode 6-14
6-4-1 Printing Region 6-14
6-4-2 Left Margin 6-17
6-5 Appendix 5 Page Mode 6-20
6-5-1 Page Mode Print Region 6-20
6-5-2 Usage Example of Page Mode 6-26
6-6 Appendix 6 CODE 128 Bar Codes, GS-1 Bar Codes 6-28
6-6-1 General Description of CODE 128 Bar Codes 6-28
6-6-2 General Description of GS-1 Bar Codes 6-32
6-6-3 GS1 Databar Omnidirectional 6-35
6-6-4 GS1 Databar Truncated 6-35
6-6-5 GS1 Databar Limited 6-35
6-6-6 GS1 Databar Expanded 6-35
6-7 Appendix 9 Maximum Number of Input Characters for Each Version of QR Code 6-36
6-8 Appendix 10 6-40
Explanation of Print Startup Control Starting Printing When Set to Page Units 6-40
6-9 Appendix 11 6-41
Explanation of Printing NV bit image data defined by 6-41
“GS ( L <fn=67>” or “GS ( 8 <fn=67>”, by “FS p” commmand 6-41
6-10 Appendix 12 Special Specifications when the Bluetooth Interface (IFBD-HB03) is used

6-42
7. APPENDIX COMMAND LIST BY MODEL 7-1
7-1 RS-232C Interface 7-1
7-2 Parallel Interface 7-9
7-3 USB I/F (Ver 1.0) • Ethernet I/F (Silex 1.0) 7-17
7-4 USB I/F (Ver 2.0) 7-24
7-5 Powered USB I/F 7-32
7-6 Ethernet I/F 7-39
7-7 Wireless LAN I/F 7-47
7-8 Bluetooth I/F 7-54

This document is the ESC/POS® mode command specification manual .
Information contained herein applies to models with the following conditions.
• Line Thermal Printers

• Printer head: 203DPI
• Interface: Parallel, RS-232C, USB, Ethernet, Wireless LAN, Powered USB
Bluetooth
• Printing Width: 3 inch and 4 inch
< Applicable Models>

• 3 inch printers: TSP700 TSP600 TSP1000 TSP700II, TSP650, TUP500, FVP10
BSC-10, TSP043,TSP650II
• 4 inch printers: TSP800, TUP900, TSP800II
ESC/POS is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

1. INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
1-1 RS-232 Serial Interface
1-1-1 Specifications (Conforming to RS-232)
Data transmission method Serial

Synch method Start-Stop synchronization method
Handshake DTR/DSR/XON/XOFF
Signal level MARK = -3v to -15v Logic ’1’/OFF
SPACEK = +3v to +15v Logic ’0’/ON
Baud rates 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
Bit length 7, 8 bits
Parity None, odd, even
Stop bit: 1 bit (Fixed)
Connector D-SUB 25 (Male)/D-SUB 9 (Male)
Note: Handshake, bit length, baud rates and parity settings are set by the DIP switches or the memory
switches.
1-1-2 Switching Between Online and Offline
This printer does not have a switch to go between online and offline. The following conditions are required to go
offline.
• The time after initializing the mechanism when turning on the power or causing a reset by the
interface until communication is possible
• When executing a self-test • When the cover is open
• When printing has stopped because there is no paper
(When the roll paper end sensor detects that paper is out, or the roll paper near end sensor de-
tects that paper is out using ESCc4, or paper is out when the print stop is enabled.)
• When waiting to switch at macro execution
• While there is a temporary error in the power voltage
• When there is an error
ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-1

1-1-3 Signal Array and Explanations According to Interface Connector Pin
<Signal Array and Functions>
Pin Signal Signal

Function
No. Name Dir.
1 FG - Frame ground
2 TXD Output Transmission Data
3 RXD Input Reception Data
4 RTS Output Same as DTR signal
Signal indicating whether host can receive data.
The SPACE status indicates the host can receive data; the MARK status indicates that the host
cannot receive data. When DTR/DSR control is selected, the status of this signal is checked to
6 DSR Input
transmit data. (Excludes data transmissions using DLEEOT .)
When XON/XOFF control is selected, the status of this signal is not checked. This signal can
be used to reset the printer according by switching the DIP switches or the memory switches.
7 SG - Signal ground
20 DTR Output (1) When DTR/DSR control is selected:
Indicates whether the printer is BUSY.
The SPACE status indicates the printer is READY; the MARK status indicates that the printer
is BUSY.
The DIP switch or the memory switch settings change the conditions for the printer to be BUSY.
(*1)
The following conditions are required to enter a BUSY (MARK) state.
Busy condition (*1)

Printer Status
OFF ON
• During the period from when the power is turned BUSY BUSY
on (including resetting using the interface) to
when the printer is ready to receive data.
• When executing a self-test BUSY BUSY
OFFLINE
• When the cover is open - BUSY

• When printing stopped because of paper out - BUSY
• When waiting to switch at macro execution - BUSY
• While there is a temporary error in the power - BUSY
• When there is an error - BUSY
• When reception buffer is full (*2) BUSY BUSY BUSY
(2) XON/XOFF control is selected:

Indicates whether the printer is connected normally and is ready to receive data from the host.
A SPACE status indicate that the printer is connected normally and that data can be received.
The SPACE status is always entered except for the following cases.
• The time after initializing the mechanism when turning on the power until communication is
possible.
• While executing a self-test
25 INIT Input This signal can be used to reset the printer according by switching the DIP switches or the
memory switches.
(*1) DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

ON = Reception buffer full or printer is offline (Default)
OFF = Reception buffer full
(*2) When the reception buffer empty region is 0 bytes, received data is ignored.


1-1-4 Timing for Transmitting XON/XOFF
When XON/XOFF control is selected, XON and XOFF are transmitted with the following timings.
The transmission timing varies according to the DIP switch settings or the memory switch settings.
XON code: <11> H
XOFF code: <13> H
For (3) below, XON is not transmitted when the reception buffer is full.
For (6) below, XOFF is not transmitted when the reception buffer is full.

<XON/XOFF Transmission Timing>
Busy condition (*1)
Printer Status
OFF ON
(1) When online for the first time after turning the power
Transmission Transmission
on or a reset using the interface
(2) When the buffer full status was cancelled for recep-
XON Transmission Transmission
tion buffer
Transmission
(3) When shifting from offline to online - Transmission
(4) When recovered from a recoverable error using a
- Transmission
command
XOFF (5) When the reception buffer entered buffer full status Transmission Transmission
Transmission
(6) When shifting from online to offline - Transmission
(*1) DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

1-1-5 Serial Interface Connection Example
• If the other connected party is DCE, be careful so that there is no status without a handshake (where data is
flows) (DTE: Data Terminal Equipment; DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment)
• When transmitting data to the printer, turn on the power to the printer and initialize first.
Host Printer
TXD RXD
DSR DTR

CTS RTS
RXD TXD
DTR DSR
F.G F.G
S.G S.G

1-1-6 Precautions When Switching the BUSY Conditions
DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

To set the busy conditions to reception buffer full (OFF), operators should be aware of the following points.
• Printing will stop but the printer will not enter a BUSY state when printing stops because of an error, the cover
is open, paper is out when printing stops are enabled, or when paper feeds are executed using the paper feed
switch.
• When using DLE EOT, DLE ENQ and DLE DC4, the reception buffer does not enter a buffer full status.
• Precautions on the host which cannot receive data transmissions when the printer is BUSY DLEEOT, DLEENQ
and DLEDC4 cannot be used when an error occurs when the printer has entered a BUSY state because the
reception buffer is full.
• Precautions on the host which can receive data transmissions when the printer is BUSY DLEEOT, DLEENQ
and DLEDC4 are handled as bit image data when using the DLEEOT, DLEENQ and DLEDC4 partway through
the bit image data when the reception buffer is full when transmitting bit image data. Also, it is possible to lose
data when received while the reception buffer is full.

1-1-7 Notes on resetting the printer using the interface
The printer can be reset using interface pins 6 and 25 by changing the DIP switch or the memory switch setting.
But when a signal that does not satisfy the requirements above is input, printer operation is not guaranteed.
Minimum reset pulse width: TRS 1 ms (minimum)
When using pin 6 (DSR)
TRS
SPACE
MARK
When using pin 25 (INIT)
SPACE (H)
TRS
MARK (L)

1-2 Bi-directional Parallel Interface (IEEE1284)
1-2-1 Compatibility Mode (Host – Printer Communications: Conforms to Centronix)
1. General Description
The Compatibility Mode is a mode that uses the Centronix interface as standard, which is widely in use.
2. Specifications
Data transmission method: 8 Bit Parallel
Synch method: According to externally supplied nStrobe signal
Handshake: According nAck signals and Busy signals
Signal level: All signals are TTL compatible
3. Switching Between Online and Offline

This printer does not have a switch to go between online and offline. The following conditions are required to go
offline.
• The time after initializing the mechanism when turning on the power or causing a reset by the interface until
communication is possible
• When executing a self-test
• When the cover is open
• When the paper is out and printing has stopped (paper out selected by ESCc4)
• When waiting to switch at macro execution
• When errors occur
1-2-2 Reverse Mode (Printer to Host Communications)
Status data transfer from the printer to the host is performed in either Nibble or Byte Mode.
General Description
Data transmissions from asynch printers controlled by the host are regulated. Nibble Mode data transmissions
use an existing control line to transmit data 4 bits (Nibble) at a time. The Byte Mode uses bidirectional communi-
cations to transfer 8 bits of data lines. In either case, communications are in half-duplex because it is not possible
to execute both simultaneously with the Compatibility Mode.

1-2-3 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement for Each Mode
Pin Source Compatibility Mode Nibble Mode Byte Mode
1 Host nStrobe HostClk HostClk
2 Host/Ptr Data0 (LSB) Data0 (LSB) Data0 (LSB)
3 Host/Ptr Data1 Data1 Data1
9 Host/Ptr Data7 (MSB) Data7 (MSB) Data7 (MSB)
10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk
11 Printer Busy PtrBusy/Data3,7 PtrBusy
12 Printer PError AckDataReq/Data2,6 AckDataReq
13 Printer Select Xflag/Data1,5 Xflag
14 Host NC HostBusy HostBusy
15 NC ND ND
16 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND
17 Frame GND Frame GND Frame GND
18 Printer +5 V +5 V +5 V
19 to 30 Twisted Pair Return Twisted Pair Return Twisted Pair Return
31 Host nInit nInit nInit
32 Printer nFault nDataAvail/Data0,4 nDataAvail
33 EXTGND ND ND
34 Printer NC ND ND
35 Printer NC ND ND
36 Host nSelectIn 1284-Active 1284-Active
NC: Not Connected ND: Not Defined
<Note>
• Initial ‘n’ of signal name indicates an ‘L’ active signal
Bidirectional communications are not possible on hosts with even oneof theabovesignal lines.
• Always use twisted pair lines for each signal line when using the interface and connect the return side to the
signal ground level.
• All interface conditions use TTL levels as standard and must satisfy the following characteristics. Each signal
rise and fall times must be a maximum of 0.5 μs.
• Data transmissions for which nAck signals or Busy signals are ignored are prohibited. When ignored, data can
be lost.
• Use the shortest distance necessary for the interface cable.

1-2-4 Data Reception Timing (Compatibility Mode)
Data Data n Data n+1
tHold-1
nStrobe
tSetup tSTB tHold-2
Busy
Peripheral Busy
tReady tBusy
nACK
tReply tACK tnBUSY
tNext
Standards
Minimum [ns] Maximum [ns]
Data Hold Time (host) tHold-1 - 500
Data Hold Time (printer) tHold-2 - -
Data Setup Time tSetup - 500
STROBE Pulse Width tSTB - 500
READY Cycle Idle Time tReady - -
BUSY Output Delay Time tBUSY 0 500
Data Processing Time tReply 0 ∞
ACKNLG Pulse Width tACK 1usec/9usec (*1) -
BUSY Cancel Time tnBUSY 0 ∞
ACK Cycle Idle Time tNext - 0
(*1) Memory Switch Setting: ACK Pulse Width
ON = 9usec
OFF = 1usec (Default)

1-2-5 Precautions When Resetting the Printer Using the Interface
When applying a printer reset using the interface (#31 pin nInit signal) in the Compatibility Mode, the following
characteristics must be met. However, the printer reset is ignored when the signal nSelectln (pin #36, 1284-Active
HIGH) is active in reverse mode.
Reset Minimum Pulse Width TRS 50μsec (min)
Rise Time tf 500nsec (max)
Fall Time tr 500nsec (max)
nSelectIn
(1284-Active)
min. 0 max. 1
nInit
tf TRS tf
1-2-6 Receiving Status from the Printer Using a Bidirectional Parallel Interface
It is possible to transmit the status from the printer using bidirectional communications functions according to the
Nibble and Byte Mode which conform to IEEE1284 standards, when using a bidirectional parallel interface. When
doing so, compared to RS-232 serial interface specifications, you must pay attention to the following points be-
cause the printer cannot insert real-time interrupts to the host.
• The transmission buffer size in the printer is 128 bytes. (Excluding ASB status) Because statuses that exceed
this are discarded, create a receive status (Reverse Mode) on the host side so that status are not lost.
• When using ASB, it is preferred that the host side be in a receive waiting status (a reverse idle status). If that is
not possible, put the host side into a Reverse Mode to constantly monitor the presence of data.
• When using ASB, ASB status is transmitted with priority over other statuses in the Reverse Mode. Also, ASB
status that are accumulated without being sent from the last sent ASB status to the latest ASB status ate bundled
into one ASB status and transmitted, and the latest ASB status is then transmitted after that.
Example: The following shows an ASB status in a normal (idled) state.

First Status Second Status Third Status Fourth Status
0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
The following data is accumulated when a near end detection occurs, the cover is open and cover close is per-
formed.
First Status Second Status Third Status Fourth Status Near End
1
0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 Detection
Cover
2
0010 1000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 Open
Cover
3
0000 1000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 Closed
Then, when the ASB status is received, the combination of actually transferred ASB is a total of 8 bytes: ASB (1 +
2 + 3) + the latest ASB (3).
ASB (1 + 2 + 3)
0010 1000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000
+
Latest ASB (3)
0001 1000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000

1-3 USB Interface
Specifications Conforms to USB 2.0 Full Speed

Supports printer class and header class (Refer to each printer specifications manual to select.)
Connector Type B
1-4 Ethernet Interface
Specifications Conforms to IEEE 802.3

Cable 10BASE-T/10BASE-TX
Connector RJ45
1-5 Wireless LAN Interface
Specifications Conforms to IEEE 802.11b
1-6 Powered USB
Specifications See the Product Specifications Manual IFBD-BPU03

Cable See the Product Specifications Manual IFBD-BPU03
Connector See the Product Specifications Manual IFBD-BPU03
1-7 Bluetooth Interface
Specifications: See the section “Bluetooth Interface model” in the separate “Product Specifications TSP650II”.

2 EXPLANATION OF THE PAGE MODE
2-1 General Description
This printer has two print modes:

The Standard Mode and the Page Mode.
In the standard mode, the printer prints or performs a paper feed whenever it receives printing or paper feed
instructions. With the Page mode, received printing or paper feed instructions are all performed on the print re-
gion in the specified memory, but the printer does not act. Then, when the ESCFF or FF command is executed,
the data is expanded to that print region to print it in batch. Specifically, when printing or line feeding data of
“ABCDEF” <LF>, the status mode prints “ABCDEF” and executes one line feed. However, with the page mode,
“ABCDEF” is written to the specified print region on the memory and one line is moved in the memory position to
write the next print data. The printer enters the page mode using ESCL. Subsequently received commands are
all processed using the page mode. By executing ESCFF, data that is received is printed in batch. By execut-
ing FF, data that is received is printed in batch, then the printer recovers to the standard mode. It is possible to
return to the standard mode without printing print data in the page mode using ESCS. However, that print data
is cleared.
<Transition of Stand Mode Page Mode>
ESC FF
ESC L
Standard Mode Page Mode Print
ESC S
FF
Print
2-2 Settings Using Commands in Standard Mode and Page Mode
• The values set using each command are common settings for both the standard mode and the page mode, but
the settings of the following commands are set independently for each. → ESCSP,ESC2,ESC3,FSS
• In the standard mode, the maximum number of dots are set for the X direction, but in the page mode, the Y
direction (the X direction when not rotated) when rotated in either the 90 degree direction or the 270 degree di
rection becomes larger. For details see the print region setting command (ESCW) for the page mode.

2-3 Expanding Print Data to the Print Region
The following are performed when expanding print data to the print region.
(1) The print region is set by ESCW, ESCW sets the left side as the print region origin (X0, y0) at the point all
operations for previous printings and paper feeds are completed received by the printer. The square shape
formed by the two sides of the dx pitch in the X direction (horizontal direction) including the origin and the dy
pitch in the Y direction (vertical direction) from the origin (x0, y0) is the print region (When ESCW is not set,
the initial value is the print region).
(2) If the print region is set by ESCW and print direction is set by ESCT, the point A in the figure 2.3.1 is the ini
tial value and print data expands to the print region when the printer receives the print data. In the case of
characters, this starting point is the base line. Download bit images and bar codes are expanded for the top
of the base line using the lower left point of the image data as the base line (Fig. 2.3.2 Point B) However, the
HRI characters that come below the bar codes are printed below the base line. When trying to expand char
acters that are taller than standard characters (double-tall characters) or download bit images, the portion that
is beyond the height of standard characters is not printed.
(3) If print data is outside of the print region (including the space right of the character) before receiving the com
mands (LF, ESCJ, etc.) accompanying a line feed, a line feed is automatically performed in the print region
and the expanding position of the print data is moved one line and the next expansion position becomes the
head of the line. The line feed amount is the line feed amount set by ESC2 and ESC3.
(4) The initial value of the line feed amount when using basic calculated pitch correction of 180 DPI is 4.23 mm
(1/6 inch). This is equivalent to 33 dots. Therefore, when using expanded characters that are beyond the
double-tall size in the vertical direction in the next line of print data, download bit images that are larger than
two lines or bar codes that are taller than characters, the line amount will be insufficient and the upper dots of
the characters in the next print data will overlap, so the amount of line feed must be increased. The line feed
amount of the first line in the example below must be more than 28 dots (Fig. 3.12.4).
<Ex.> When printing a download bit image for 6 bytes in the vertical direction:
(Vertical dot count (8 x 6) – Starting line feed amount (20)) x Basic calculated pitch conversion in the vertical
direction (360/180) = 56
Therefore, the line feed must be 56 pitches (28 dots) in excess.
ESCW, xL, xH, yL, yH, dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH
ESCTn
ESC354 ← Additional line feed amount
LF
GS/1
ESC2 ← Returns to a line feed amount of 4.23 mm (1/6 inch)
Note: The basic calculated pitch is 1/180 horizontally and 1/360 vertically with default, so a differences is
generated with the position specification according to the print direction. By setting the basic calculated
pitch in the vertical direction to 1/180 using a command (GSP), a difference will not be generated by print
direction.
STAR The page print region setting, print data expansion position, line feed, position movement amount in the page
mode are affected by the basic calculated pitch correction.
For details, see the command details for GSP (basic calculated pitch specification) and ESCW (print region
setting command).

Fig. 2.3.1 Character Data Expansion Position
A
(x0, y 0) Expansion
20 dot
Base Line
4 dot
Point A
Printing
(dx, dy)
Fig. 2.3.2 Character Data Expansion Position
Bar Code
Height h dot
(y x8) dots
40dot
A
Bar code
(GS k m)
Double 24 dot Download
20 dot high Bit image
Expanded
(GS * x y)
Base Line
A
Bit image
4dot 8dot
B Point B Point B Point B Point HRI Characters

24 DOTS

Fig. 2.3.3 Download Bit Image Expansion Position
Expansion Direction
A
(x0, y0)
20 dot
Base Line
4 dot Download Bit Image

(GS * x y)
AAA
(GS * x y)
20 dot
Base Line
4 dot
Print Region
(dx, dy)
Point B Point B Point B Point B

3. COMMAND FUNCTION LIST
○: Valid
(L): Effective only at the top of the line
(S): Only setting effective
(D): Effective only when there is no data in print buffer
Standard Commands
Command
Class Page GS P
Commands Name Std Mode
Mode Effect
Exe. Set
HT Horizontal tab ○ ○ ○
LF Line feed ○ ○ ○
FF Print and recover to page mode ○ Ignored ○
CR Print and carriage return ○ ○ ○
CAN Cancel print data in page mode ○ Ignored ○
DLE EOT Real-time status transmission ○ ○ ○
DLE ENQ Real-time request to printer ○ ○ ○
DLE DC4 Real-time output of specified pulse ○ ○ ○
ESC FF Print data in page mode ○ Ignored ○
ESC SP Set character right space amount ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ! Batch specify print mode ○ ○ ○
ESC $ Specify absolute position ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC % Specify/cancel download character set ○ ○ ○
ESC & Define download characters ○ ○ ○
ESC * Specify bit image mode ○ ○ ○
ESC - Specify/cancels underline mode ○ ○ ○
ESC 2 Set default line spacing ○ ○ ○
ESC 3 Set line feed amount ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC = Select peripheral device ○ ○ ○
ESC ? Delete download characters ○ ○ ○
ESC @ Initialize printer ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC D Set horizontal tab position ○ ○ ○
ESC E Specify/cancel emphasized printing ○ ○ ○
ESC G Specify/cancel double printing ○ ○ ○
ESC J Print and Paper Feed ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC L Select page mode ○ (L) Ignored
ESC M Select character font ○ ○
ESC R Select international characters ○ ○ ○
ESC S Select standard mode ○ Ignored ○
ESC T Select character print direction in page mode ○ (S) ○
ESC V Specify/cancel char. 90 deg. clockwise rotation ○ ○ (S)
ESC W Set print region in page mode ○ (S) ○ ○

ESC \ Specify relative position ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC a Position alignment ○ (L) (S)
Select paper out sensor to enable at paper out signal
ESC c 3 ○ ○ ○
output
ESC c 4 Select paper out sensor to enable at printing stop ○ ○ ○
ESC c 5 Enable/disable panel switches ○ ○ ○

ESC d Print and feed paper n lines ○ ○ ○
ESC p Specify pulse ○ ○ ○
ESC t Select character code table ○ ○ ○
ESC { Specify/cancel upside-down characters ○ (L) (S)
FS g 1 Write data to user NV memory ○ ○ Invalid
FS g 2 Read user NV memory data ○ ○ ○

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
FS p Print NV bit image ○ ○ Invalid
FS q Define NV bit image ○ (L) Invalid
GS ! Select character size ○ ○ ○
Specify absolute position for character vertical
GS $ ○ Ignored ○ ○
direction in page mode
GS * Define download bit images ○ ○ ○
GS ( A Test print ○ ○ Ignored
GS ( K (fn=48) Set print density ○ ○ ○
GS ( K (fn=49) Set print speed ○ ○ ○
GS ( L Specify raster graphics data ○ ○ Ignored
GS 8 L Specify raster graphics daa ○ ○ Ignored
GS ( N Select 2 color printing ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=65) PDF417: Set number of positions ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=66) PDF417: Set number of levels ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=67) PDF417: Set module width ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=68) PDF417: Set level height ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=69) PDF417: Set error correction level ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=70) PDF417: Set options ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=80) PDF417: Store data in symbol saving region ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=81) PDF417: Print symbol data of symbol saving region ○ ○ ○
PDF417: Send size information of symbol data in
GS ( k (cn=48, fn=82) ○ ○ ○
symbol saving region
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=65) QR Code: Set model ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=67) QR Code: Set module size ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=69) QR Code: Set error correction level ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=80) QR Code: Store data in symbol saving region ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=81) QR Code: Print symbol data of symbol saving region ○ ○ ○
QR Code: Send size information of symbol data in
GS ( k (cn=49, fn=82) ○ ○ ○
GS / Print download bit images ○ (D) ○
GS : Start/end macro definition ○ ○ ○ ○
GS B Specify/cancel white/black inverted printing ○ ○ ○
GS C 0 Set counter print mode ○ ○ ○
GS C 1 Set Counter Mode (A) ○ ○ ○
GS C 2 Set counter value ○ ○ ○
GS C ; Set Counter Mode (B) ○ ○ ○
GS E Set print speed ○ ○ ○
GS H Select HRI character print position ○ ○ ○
GS I Send Printer ID ○ ○ ○
GS L Set left margin ○ (L) (S) ○
GS P Set basic calculation pitch ○ ○ ○
GS T Move to top of line ○ ○ Ignored
GS V Cut paper ○ (L) ○ ○
GS W Set print region width ○ (L) (S) ○
Specify relative position for character vertical
GS \ ○ Ignored ○ ○
direction in page mode
GS ^ Execute macro ○ ○ ○
GS b Specify/cancel smoothing ○ ○ ○
GS c Print counter ○ ○ ○
GS f Select HRI character font ○ ○ ○
GS h Set bar code height ○ ○ ○
GS k Print bar code ○ (D) ○
GS r Transmission of status ○ ○ ○
GS v 0 Print raster bit images ○ (D) Invalid
GS w Set bar code horizontal size ○ ○ ○

Kanji Control Commands (For Japanese, Chinese and Taiwanese language specifications only)
Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
FS ! Batch specify Chinese character print mode ○ ○ ○
FS & Specify Chinese character mode ○ ○ ○
FS - Specify/cancel Chinese character underline ○ ○ ○
FS . Cancel Chinese character mode ○ ○ ○
FS 2 Define external character ○ ○ ○
FS C Select Chinese character code type ○ ○ ○
FS S Set Chinese character space amount ○ ○ ○ ○
Specify/cancel double-tall, double wide Chinese
FS W ○ ○ ○
characters
ESC/POS Black Mark Related Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
FF Print and recover to page mode + TOF and Cut ○ ○ ○
DLE ENQ Real-time request to printer ○ ○ ○
GS FF Move to BM detection position ○ ○ ○
GS ( F Adjust BM detection position ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( M n=1 Save black mark adjustment amount ○ ○ ○
GS ( M n=2 Load black mark adjustment amount ○ ○ ○
GS ( M n=3 Set auto-load of black mark adjustment amount ○ ○ ○
GS < Mechanically initialize printer ○ ○ ○
GS V Cut paper ○ (L) ○ ○

STAR Original Commands
Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS = Write data to a blank code page ○ ○ ○
ESC GS t Select character code table ○ ○ ○
ESC GS + Macro registration ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS #m Memory switch settings ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC RS F Select font ○ ○ ○
ESC RS C Print mode selection ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC RS L Batch control logos ○ ○
Send print-end counter, initialize ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ETX Cancel print data feature ○ ○
Set data time out ○ ○
STAR Original Presenter Control Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC SYN 0 Execute presenter paper recovery ○ ○ ○
ESC SYN 1 Set presenter paper recovery time ○ ○ ○
ESC SYN 3 Get presenter counter ○ ○ ○
ESC SYN 4 Initialize presenter counter ○ ○ ○
ESC GS SUB DC1 Specify snout opeation mode ○ ○ ○
ESC GS SUB DC2 Set snout LED ON/OFF time ○ ○ ○
ESC GS SUB DC3 Ouptut snout LED ○ ○ ○
STAR Original Mark Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS * 0 Print mark ○ (D) Ignored
ESC GS *1 Set mark height and line feed ○ ○ ○
ESC GS *2 Set mark color and horizontal width ○ ○ ○
ESC GS *W Register mark format to non-volatile memory ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS *C Initialize mark format in the non-volatile memory ○ ○ ○ ○

STAR Original Auto Logo Commands
Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS /W Register Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /C Initialize Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /1 Auto Logo function on/off setting ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /2 Set command character ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /3 Set user macro 1 ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /4 Set user macro 2 ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /5 Set command character switching method ○ ○ ○
ESC GS /6 Set partial cut before Auto Logo printing ○ ○ ○
STAR Original Buzzer Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS BEL Ring buzzer ○ ○ ○
ESC GS EM DC1 External buzzer drive pulse condition settings ○ ○ ○
ESC GS EM DC2 External buzzer drive execution ○ ○ ○
STAR Original PDF417 Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS x S 0 Set PDF417 bar code size ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x S 1 Set PDF417 ECC (security level) ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x S 2 Set PDF417 module X direction size ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x S 3 Set PDF417 module aspect ratio ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x D Set PDF417 bar code data ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x P Print PDF417 bar code ○ ○ ○
ESC GS x I Get PDF417 bar code expansion information ○ ○ ○

STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands
Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS g 0 Print starting trigger ○ ○
ESC GS g 1 Set print starting timer ○ ○
STAR Original QR Code Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS y S 0 Set QR code model ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y S 1 Set QR code mistake correction level ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y S 2 Set QR code cell size ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y D1 Set QR code data (auto) ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y D2 Set QR code data (manual) ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y P Print QR code ○ ○ ○
ESC GS y I Get QR code expansion information ○ ○ ○
STAR Original Page Function Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS h 0 Invert 180˚ ○ ○
ESC GS h 1 Water Mark ○ ○ ○
Star Original Reduced Printing Function Command

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS c Reduced printing ○ ○

Star Original Text Search Commands
Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS ) B (fn = 48) Enable and disables text search ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 49) Set the number of times to run the text search macro ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 50) Set to print the string that matches in the text search ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 64) Define the text search string ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 65) Define the text search macro ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 66) Define the timing of the text search macro execution ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 80) Register text search settings and definitions in the non-volatile memory ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 81) Initialize text search settings and definitions ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 96) Print the text search settings and definitions ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 97) Run the text search macro ○ ○ ○
Star Original Printer information transmission Command

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS ) I (fn=48) Send the all kind of multibyte fonts ○ ○ ○
Star Original Individual Logo Command

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS ) L (fn = 48) Send the registered individual logo CRC ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) L (fn = 49) Send the registered individual NV graphics memory capacity ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) L (fn = 50) Send all key code of the registered NV graphics ○ ○ ○
Star Original Audio Commands

Command
Std Page GS P
Commands Name Class
Mode Mode Effect
Exe. Set.
ESC GS s O Playback NV Audio ○ ○ ○
ESC GS s P Stop NV Audio ○ ○ ○
ESC GS s R Playback received audio ○ ○ ○
ESC GS s I Register automatic audio setting information ○ ○ ○
ESC GS s U Register user area NV audio data ○ ○ ○
ESC GS s T Batch Playback NV Audio ○ ○ ○

4. COMMAND DETAILS
4-1 Explanation of Terms
• Reception buffer
The buffer for storing data (reception data) received from the host, as it is called the reception buffer.
Reception data is temporarily stored in the reception buffer, then processed sequentially.
• Print buffer
The buffer for storing image data for printing is called the print buffer.
• Print buffer full
The state in which the buffer has no more space available is called print buffer full. When the print buffer is full in
standard mode, data in the print buffer is printed and a line feed is performed when new print data is processed.
This is the same as a LF. When the print buffer is full in the page mode, the printer move the print position to the
head of the next line then starts with the new print data.
• Top of line
The top of line is a state that satisfies the following conditions.
1. There is currently no print data in the print buffer.
2. There is no skipped portion using HT
3. A print position has not been specified using ESC$, and ESC \
• Printable region
This is the maximum printable area with the printer’s specifications.
• Print region
This is the printing area specified by a command. (Print region ≤ printable region)
• ANK character base line
1. Normal direction characters FONT-A/FONT-B (Standard Mode/Page Mode)
24 Dots
Ay㩷 20 Dots㩷
㪓㪄㪄㩷㪙㪸㫊㪼㩷㪣㫀㫅㪼㩷
2. Rotated characters FONT-A (Standard Mode)
10 Dots (11 dots when using

A㩷
y㩷
enhanced printing)
< Base Line㩷
3. Rotated characters FONT-B (Standard Mod

A㩷
7 Dots (8 dots when using

y㩷
enhanced printing)
----㩷 Base Line㩷
<

• Chinese character base line
1. Normal direction character (Standard Mode/Page Mode)
24 Dots 20 Dots
Base Line
2. Rotated characters (Standard Mode)
24Dots
Base Line
• ASB Function
Sends the automatic status to the host each time the printer’s status changes.

4-2 Exception Processing
1. Undefined codes
Codes from <00>H to <1F>H are targeted. When codes not defined as commands in this region are re
ceived, they are discarded.

(Ex.) If processing the data string of <30>H<31>H<03>H<32>H<0A>H<33>H, the printer will discard
<03>H as an undefined code.
2. Undefined commands
When data continuing the codes of ESC, FS, GS, DLE are codes not defined as commands, ESC,
FS,GS, DLE and subsequent codes are discarded.

(Ex.) If processing the data string of <30>H<1B>H<22>H<31>H<32>H, the printer will read and dis
card <1B>H<22>H as an undefined command.
3. Settings outside of the defined area

Processing values outside of the defined area in commands accompanying arguments, those commands
are ignored and the preset values are unchanged. The processing of commands is terminated at the
point values outside of the defined region are processed in arguments having a plurality of commands.

(Ex.) If processing the data string of <1B>H<52>H<15>H, the printer will discard the data string of
<1B>H<52>H<15>H because although <1B>H<52>H is defined as a commands (ESC R), the
argument <15>H is outside of the definition. Therefore, the international character set that is al
ready set experiences no change.
4. Real-time Commands
Real-time commands are stored in the reception buffer.

4-3 Command Details
4-3-1 Standard Commands
HT
Name Horizontal tab

Code ASCII HT
Hex. 09
Decimal 9
Function Moves print position to next horizontal tab position.
Details • This command is ignored if the next tab is not set.
• If the next tab position exceeds the print region, the print position is moved to [print region +
1].
• The horizontal tab position is set by ESC D (Set/cancel horizontal tab position).
• When the print position is at the [print region + 1] position and this command is received, the
current line buffer full is printed and a horizontal tab is executed from the top of the next line.
• The initial value of the horizontal tab position is every 8 characters of Font A (the 9th, 17th, 25th
positions, etc.)
Reference ESC D

LF
Name Line feed

Code ASCII LF
Hex. 0A
Decimal 10
Function Prints the data in the print buffer and performs a line feed based on the set line feed amount.
Details After execution, makes the top of the line the next print starting position.
STAR When the setting for the line feed amount is smaller than the print data height:
a. If there is no print data, a line feed operation is executed according to the line feed amount.
b. If there is print data, a line feed operation is executed for the height of the print data.
Reference See ESC 2, ESC 3, Appendix-1

FF
Name Print and recover to page mode

Code ASCII FF
Hex. 0C
Decimal 12
Function Prints all buffered data to the print region collectively, then recovers to the standard mode.
Details • All buffer data is deleted after printing.
• The print area set by ESC W (Set print region in page mode) is reset to the default setting.
• No paper cut is executed.
• Sets the print position to the beginning of the next line after execution.
• This command is enabled only in page mode.
Reference ESC FF, ESC L, ESC S

CR
Name Print and carriage return

Code ASCII CR
Hex. 0D
Decimal 13
Function • When an automatic line feed is enabled, this command functions in the same way as LF
(print and line feed). When the automatic line feed is disabled, this command is ignored.
Details • This command is ignored with serial interface models.
• The operations of this command are selected by the memory switch <CR> code: Ignore/
same as <LF> for parallel interface models.
Reference LF

CAN
Name Cancel print data in page mode

Code ASCII CAN
Hex. 18
Decimal 24
Function Deletes all print data in the currently set print region in page mode.
Details • This command is enabled only in page mode.
• Portions included in the currently set print region are also deleted, even if previously set print
region data.
Reference ESC L, ESC W

DLE EOT n
Name Real-time status transmission

Code ASCII DLE EOT n
Hex. 10 04 n
Decimal 16 4 n
Defined Region Spec. A: 1
≤n≤4
Spec. B: 1
≤n≤5
Function Transmits the status specified by n in real-time.
n = 1: Transmit printer status
n = 2: Transmit offline cause status
n = 3: Transmit error cause status
n = 4: Transmit continuous paper detector status
n = 5: Transmit presenter paper detector status
Details • The printer transmits the present status.
• Each status is represented by one-byte of data.
• The printer transmits statuses without confirming whether the host computer can receive
data.
• This command is executed even when the printer is offline, the reception buffer is full, or
there is an error status.
• The printer executes this command upon reception.
there is an error status on serial interface models.
• This command cannot be executed when the printer is busy on parallel interface models.
The printer will not enter a BUSY status when offline or when there is an error when BUSY
condition of reception buffer full, offline/reception buffer full is handled as a reception buffer
full in the DIP switch settings.
• When ASB is enabled , the status transmitted by this command and the ASB status must be
differentiated. See Appendix-2 for details on how to identify.
• This command is enabled even when the printer specification is disabled by ESC = (select
peripheral devices).
• See Appendix-2 for details on statuses.
Spec. B-1: Transmit printer status within 2msec.
Spec. B-2: Transmit printer status within 10msec.
Notes: • Operators must use caution for other commands when the data string of <10>H<04>H<n>
(Spec. A: 1
≤ n ≤ 4, Spec. B: 1
≤ n ≤ 5) is received because it operates in the same manner
as this command. Example: In ESC * m nL nH [d1...dk], d1=<10>H, d2=<04>H, d3=<01>H
• Do not use this command to interrupt code strings of other commands that consist of 2 or
more codes.
Example: If you attempt to transmit DLE EOT 3 up to transmitting ESC3 by trying to transmit
ESC 3 n from the host, it is processed as ESC 3 <10>H. Operators must use caution.
Reference DLE ENQ, GS r, Appendix-2

DLE ENQ n
Name Real-time request to printer

Code ASCII DLE ENQ n
Hex. 10 05 n
Decimal 16 5 n
Defined Region 1 ≤ n ≤ 2
Function Responds to requests n specifications from the host in real-time. n specifications are below.
n = 1: Recover from the error and start printing from the line where the error occurred.
n = 2: Recover from error after clearing the reception buffer and print buffer.
Details • This command is enabled even when the printer specification is disabled by ESC = (select
• This command is enabled only when an auto-cutter error occurs.
• This command is processed upon reception.
full.
• The printer retains the settings by ESC !, ESC 3, that were in effect when an error occurred
even when DLE ENQ 2 is executed. The printer is initialized completely using this command
and ESC @.
Notes: • Operators must use caution for other commands when the data string of <10>H<05>H<n> (1
≤ n ≤ 2) is received because it operates in the same manner as this command.
Example: In ESC * m nL nH [d]k; d1 = <10>H; d2 = <05>H; d3 = <01>H
more codes.
Example: If you attempt to transmit DLE EBQ 2 up to transmitting ESC3 by trying to transmit
ESC 3 n from the host, it is processed as ESC 3 10H. Operators must use caution.
STAR • Auto-cutter error specifications vary according to model, so for models for which there are
non-recoverable auto-cutter errors, three byes of this command are ignored.
See Appendix-2 for details on auto-cutter error specifications for model types.
• Models connected to a presenter ignore this command.
• When this command is set to n = 2, the printer is reset.
Reference DLE EOT, Appendix-2

DLE DC4 n m t
Name Real-time output of specified pulse

Code ASCII DLE DC4 n m t
Hex. 10 14 n m t
Decimal 16 20 n m t
Defined Region n = 1
m = 0,1
1≤t≤8
Function This outputs a signal specified by t to the connector pin specified by m.
m = 0: #2 Pin of the drawer kick connector
m = 1: #5 Pin of the drawer kick connector
On time is set to t x 100 msec; Off time is set to t x 100 msec.
Details • This command is ignored if the printer experiences an error while processing this command.
• This command is ignored while outputting the pulse (while executing either ESC p or DEL
DC4) to the connector pin while processing this command.
full in the DIP switch settings.
• This command is enabled even when the printer specification is disabled by ESC = (select
Notes: • Operators must use caution for other commands when a data string that is the same as this
command is received because it operates in the same manner as this command.
more codes.
STAR Printing and drawer drive cannot be performed simultaneously. Therefore, this command is
processed when data has been read out from the reception buffer. If the printer is printing,
this waits for the printing to end to drive the drawer, so real-time operation is not possible
using the reception buffer status.
Reference ESC p

ESC FF
Name Print data in page mode

Code ASCII ESC FF
Hex. 1B 0C
Decimal 27 12
Function Prints all buffered data in the print area collectively in page mode.
Details • This command is enabled only in page mode.
• Holds the following information after printing.
a. Expanded data
b. Character print direction selection in page mode (ESC T)
c. Set print region (ESC W) in the page mode.
d. Character expansion position
Reference FF, ESC L, ESC S

ESC SP n
Name Set character right space amount

Code ASCII ESC SP n
Hex. 1B 20 n
Decimal 27 32 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Sets the right space amount for the character to [n x basic calculated pitch].
Details • If the character horizontal direction magnification ratio is more than 2, the right space amount
is also enlarged accordingly.
• This command does not affect Chinese characters.
• Right space amounts can be set independently for both the standard and page modes.
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (Set basic calculated pitch). Also, after setting the
right space amount, it is not affected even if the basic calculated pitch is changed.
• If the calculation results in fractions, the pitch is corrected to a minimal mechanical pitch and
the rest is discarded.
• In standard mode, the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction is used.
• The ANK character width is (“left space amount” + “ANK font dot count” + “right space
amount”) x (basic calculated pitch). (See the information on character specifications in the
appropriate printer specifications manual for details on the ANK font dot count.)
• In page mode, the basic calculated pitch that is used according to the starting point varies.
a. When the starting point is specified to be upper left or lower right by the ESC T command
(Character print direction selection in page mode), the basic calculated pitch (x) for the
horizontal direction is used.
b. When the starting point is specified to be upper right or lower left by the ESC T command
(Character print direction selection in page mode), the basic calculated pitch (y) for the
• The maximum value that can be set for the right space amount is approximately 35.983 mm
(or 255/180 inch). Specifications that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to that
value.
Reference GS P

ESC ! n
Name Batch specify print mode

Code ASCII ESC ! n
Hex. 1B 21 n
Decimal 27 33 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies batch print mode
Bit Function “0” “1”

7 Underline OFF ON
6 Undefined -- --
5 Double wide expanded OFF ON
4 Double tall expanded OFF ON
3 Emphasized printing . OFF ON
2 Undefined --
1 Undefined -- --
0 Character Fonts Font-A Font-B
Details • Quadruple-size characters are printed by specifying both double-tall (bit 4 = 1) and double-
wide (bit 5 = 1) modes.
• An underline is applied to the entire character width, including the ESC SP (character right
space amount). However, underlines are not applied to portions that have been skipped
using HT (horizontal tab) or ESC V (character 90 degree rotation).
• The thickness of the underline is set by ESC - (specify/cancel underlines) regardless of the
character.
• The base line for characters is the same when there are characters having different vertical
direction ratios in the same line.
• The setting of the last received command is effective even when emphasized printing is
executed by the ESC E (specify/cancel emphasized printing) command.
• The setting of the last received command is effective even when underlines are executed by
the (ESC -) Specify/cancel underline command.
• The setting of the last received command is effective even when character size is executed
by the GS! command.
• Emphasized printing (bit 3) is effective for ANK and Chinese characters. Other printing
modes are effective only on ANK characters. • Specifications using this command are
ignored in HRI characters.
STAR The following are the font configurations on STAR printers.
Character Fonts Horizontal Dots x Vertical Dots

Font A 12 x 24 Dots
Font B 9 x 24 Dots
Chinese Character Fonts 24 x 24 Dots
Reference ESC -, ESC E, GS !

ESC $ nL nH
Name Specify absolute position

Code ASCII ESC $ nL nH
Hex. 1B 24 nL nH
Decimal 27 36 nL nH
Defined Region 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Function Specifies the next printing starting position using an absolute position based on the left
margin position. The next printing starting position is the position specified by [(nL+nH×256)
× basic calculated pitch] from the left margin position.
Details • Specifications exceeding the print range are ignored.
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (Set basic calculated pitch).
• In standard mode, the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction is used.
STAR Top of line does not exist when this command is used to specify anything other than the left
margin position. The top of the line is maintained only when the same position as the left
margin position is specified.
Reference ESC \ , GS $, GS \ , GS P

ESC % n
Name Specify/cancel download character set

Code ASCII ESC % n
Hex. 1B 25 n
Decimal 27 37 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels the download character set.
• When n = <*******0>B, the download character set is cancelled.
• When n = <*******1>B, the download character set is specified.
Details • n is effective only when it is the least significant bit.
• When the download character set is cancelled, the internal character set is automatically
specified.
STAR Because ESC& (define download characters) and GS* (define download bit images) are
used in the same region, they cannot both be defined simultaneously.
a. When download characters are defined, previously defined download bit images are
cleared.
b. Conversely, when download bit images are defined, previously defined download
characters are cleared and the definition returns to same the internal character set.
Reference ESC &, ESC ?

ESC& yc1c2 [x1d1...d (y x x1) ] ... [axd1...d (yxax)]
Name Define download characters

Code ASCII ESC & y c1 c2 [x1 d1 ... d (yX x1)] ... [a xd1 ... d (y× ax)]
Hex. 1B 26 y c1 c2 [x1 d1 ... d (yX x1)] ... [a xd 1 ... d (y×ax)]
Decimal 27 38 y c1 c2 [x1 d1 ... d (yX x1)] ... [a xd 1 ... d (y×ax)]
Defined Region y = 3
32 ≤ c1 ≤ c2 ≤ 126
0 ≤ x ≤ 12 (Font A), 0 ≤ x ≤ 9 (Font B)
0 ≤ d1....d (y×ax) ≤ 255
Initial Value Same pattern as internal character set
Function Defines the download characters to the specified character code.
• y specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction.
• c1 specifies the starting character code for the definition; c2 specifies the final character
code.
• x specifies the number of dots in the horizontal direction for the definition.
Details • The definable character code range is from ASCII code <20>H to <7E>H.
• It is possible to define multiple characters for consecutive character codes with one
definition. If only one character is desired, use c1 = c2.
• If x=0, a space is registered.
• d is the dot data for the characters. It indicates the horizontal direction x dot pattern from the
left side. If x does not meet the number of dots configuring the character, any remaining dots
on the right side are blank.
• The data to define download characters is (y x x) bytes.
• Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that
are not printed are 0 in the definition data.
• This command can define different download characters for each font. To select a font, use ESC M or ESC !.
• ESC & (define download characters) and GS * (define download bit images) cannot both be
defined simultaneously.
a. When download characters are defined, previously defined download bit images are
cleared.
b. Conversely, when download bit images are defined, previously defined download characters
are cleared and the definition returns to same the internal character set.
• Defined download characters are cleared under the following executions.
a. When the printer is initialized (ESC@)
b. When download bit images are defined (GS*)
c. When download characters are deleted (ESC?)
d. When NV bit images are defined (FSq)
e. When the printer power is turned off
STAR Font configurations and regions for effective parameters on STAR printers
Character Fonts Horizontal Dots x Vertical Dots y x Data Count

Font A 12 x 24 Dots 3 12 36 bytes
Font B 9 x 24 Dots 3 9 27 bytes
For the STAR printer, the font select commands, <ESC> <RS> F, can also be used.
Reference ESC %, ESC ?

[Ex.:] When Font A (12 x 24) is selected
12Dots
MSB
d1 d4 d34
24Dots
d2 d5 d35
LSB
d3 d6 d36
d1=<00>H d4<0F>H d7=<30>H㨯㨯㨯㨯

d2=<00>H d5<03>H d8=<80>H㨯㨯㨯㨯
d3=<00>H d6<00>H d9=<C0>H㨯㨯㨯㨯

[Ex.:] When Font B (9 x 24) is selected
9 Dots
MSB
d1 d4 d25
24 Dots
d2 d5 d26
LSB
d3 d6 d27
d1=<00>H d4=<FF>H d7=<40>H㨯㨯㨯㨯

d2=<00>H d5=<F3>H d8=<20>H㨯㨯㨯㨯
d3=<00>H d6=<F0>H d9=<00>H㨯㨯㨯㨯

ESC * m nL nH d1…dk
Name Specify bit image mode

Code ASCII ESC * m nL nH d1...dk
Hex. 1B 2A m nL nH d1...dk
Decimal 27 42 m nL nH d1...dk
Defined Region m = 0,1,32,33
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255
Spec.A 0 ≤ nH ≤ 3
Spec.B 0 ≤ nH ≤ 7
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Function Selects a bit-image mode in mode m for the number of dots specified by nL and nH.
Number of Vert. Number of Density of Hor.
m Mode Data Count (k)
Dir. Dots Hor. Dir. Dots Dir. Dots
0 8-dot single density 8 60 DPI 90 DPI nL+nH×256
1 8-dot double density 8 60 DPI 180 DPI nL+nH×256
32 24-dot single density 24 180 DPI 90 DPI (nL+nH×256) ×3
33 24-dot double density 24 180 DPI 180 DPI (nL+nH×256) ×3
Details • If the value of m is out of the specified range, nL and subsequent data are processed as
normal data.
• nL and nH indicate the number of dots in the bit image in the horizontal direction to print. The
number of dots is calculated by (nL + nH x256).
• If the bit-image data input exceeds the number of dots that can be printed on one line, the
excess data is discarded.
• d indicates the bit-image data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that
correspond to the dots that are not printed are 0.
• After processing bit images, the printer returns to normal data processing.
• Excluding upside-down printing, print modes (emphasized printing, double printing,
underlines, character sizes and black/white inverted printing) are unaffected.
• For details on the bit image expansion position in the page mode, see section 2.
Explanations of the Page Mode.
STAR • Dot density (when the STAR printer head = 203 DPI) on STAR printers.
m Mode Density of Vert. Direction Dots Density of Hor. Direction Dots

0 8-dot single density 67 DPI 101 DPI
1 8-dot double density 67 DPI 203DPI
32 24-dot single density 203DPI 101 DPI
33 24-dot double density 203DPI 203DPI
• Fonts A and B and Chinese characters can be used together.

<8Dots Single Density>
MSB d1 d2 d3
24Dots
LSB
<8Dots Double Density>
MSB d1 d2 d3
24Dots
LSB
<24Dots Single Density>
MSB
d1 d4 d7
LSB
d2 d5 d8
24Dots
d3 d6 d9
<24Dots Double Density>

MSB
d1 d4 d7
LSB
d2 d5 d8 24Dots
d3 d6 d9

ESC - n
Name Specify/cancels underline mode

Code ASCII ESC _ n
Hex. 1B 2D n
Decimal 27 45 n
Defined Region 0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels underlines.
n Function
0, 48 Cancels underline
1, 49 Sets to one-dot width underline and specifies underlines.
2, 50 Sets to two-dot width underline and specifies underlines.
Details • An underline is applied to the entire character width, including the ESC SP (character right
space amount). However, underlines are not applied to portions that have been skipped
using HT (horizontal tab) or ESC V (character 90 degree rotation).
• Underlines are not applied to ESCV (characters rotated 90 degrees clockwise) or GSB
(black/white inverted characters).
• When underline mode is cancelled by setting the value of n = 0 or n = 48, subsequent data is
not underlined, and the underline thickness set before the mode is turned off is maintained.
The default underline thickness is 1 dot.
• Character size does not affect the set underline thickness.
• Underline mode can also be turned on or off by using ESC ! (batch specify print mode).
Note, however, that the last received command is effective. Therefore, if the underline
mode is canceled using the ESC – command after specifying underlines using the ESC !
command, the ESC ! command is cancelled.
• This command does not affect Chinese characters.
STAR • Underlines are applied to the following positions for both Font A and Font B.
• 1-dot thickness underline → 24th dot
• 2-dot thickness underline → 23rd and 24th dot
Reference ESC !

ESC 2
Name Set default line spacing

Code ASCII ESC 2
Hex. 1B 32
Decimal 27 50
Function Sets line feed amount per one line to approximately 4.23 mm (1/6 inch).
Details Line spacing can be set independently for both the standard and page modes.
STAR EPSON has models that have 180 DPI and 203 DPI print heads. STAR’s print head is 203
DPI. Therefore, when targeting models with the EPSON 180 DPI print head, it is necessary
to correct the line spacing that will generate from the difference in the head’s print density.
In this case, the default line spacing on STAR printers is corrected to the following according
to the basic calculated pitch correction. This does not apply for target models that have 203
DPI print heads, or models that do not require correction.
Basic Calculate Pitch Correction Default Line Spacing

203 DPI Approximately 4.23 mm (1/6 inch)
180 DPI Approximately 3.75 mm
Reference ESC 3

ESC 3 n
Name Set line feed amount

Code ASCII ESC 3 n
Hex. 1B 33 n
Decimal 27 51 n
Initial Value Line feed amount equivalent to approximately 4.23 mm (1/6 inch).
Function Sets the line space for one line to [n x basic calculated pitch].
Details • Line spacing can be set independently for both the standard and page modes.
line space, it is not affected even if the basic calculated pitch is changed.
• In standard mode, the basic calculated pitch (y) for the vertical direction is used.
• The maximum value that can be set for the line space is approximately 1,016mm (or 40
inches). Specifications that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to that value.
Reference ESC 2, GS P

ESC = n
Name Select peripheral device

Code ASCII ESC = n
Hex. 1B 3D n
Decimal 27 61 n
Initial Value n=1
Function Selects the peripheral device for which the data is effective from the host computer.
7 Undefined
6 Undefined
5 Undefined
4 Undefined
3 Undefined
2 Undefined
1 Undefined
0 Printer Invalid Valid
Details • If the printer is selected to be invalid, the printer discards all data from the next data until the
printer is made valid again by this command. (This excludes DLEEOT, DLEENQ, DLEDC4.)
STAR • Even when the printer is not invalid, the printer specification of this command (n = 1) is
processed.

ESC ? n
Name Delete download characters

Code ASCII ESC ? n
Hex. 1B 3F n
Decimal 27 63 n
Function Deletes the download characters to the specified character code.
Details • n specifies the character code to delete the defined pattern. After deleting, the printer prints
the same pattern as the internal characters.
• Deletes the specified code definition pattern of the character code selected by ESCM and
ESC !.
• This command is ignored when the specified character code is undefined.
Reference ESC &, ESC %

ESC @
Name Initialize printer

Code ASCII ESC @
Hex. 1B 40
Decimal 27 64
Function Clears data from the print buffer and sets the printer to its default settings.
Details • DIP switch settings are not reload.
• Data in the reception buffer is maintained.
• Macro definition information is maintained.
• NV bit image definition information is maintained.
• User NV memory data is maintained.
• When page mode is selected, this recovers to standard mode.
STAR The printer is initialized by this command under the following conditions.
• Selection of an effective paper out detector for paper out signal output (ESC c 3n)
• Select an effective paper out detector for printing stop (ESC c 4n)

ESC D n1 … nk NUL
Name Set horizontal tab position

Code ASCII ESC D n1...nk NUL
Hex. 1B 44 n1...nk NUL
Decimal 27 68 n1...nk NUL
0 ≤ k ≤ 32
Initial Value • Every 8 characters when using Font A (12 x 24) and the setting for the right spacing of
characters is 0. (9th column, 17th column, 25th column …)
Function Sets horizontal tab position
• n specifies the column number for setting a horizontal tab position from the left margin or the
beginning of the line.
• k indicates the number of horizontal tab positions to be set.
Details • The horizontal tab position is a value of from the left margin or the beginning of the line [n x
character width].
Character width is the horizontal width including ESC SP (character right space). If the
character horizontal direction magnification ratio is more than 2, the character width is also
enlarged accordingly.
• This command cancels the previous set horizontal tab settings.
• When horizontal tab position setting n = 8, the next print position is moved to column 9 by
executing HT (horizontal tab).
• Up to 32 tab positions (k = 32) can be set. Subsequent data exceeding that is processed as
normal data.
• <n> for specifying horizontal position settings is input in ascending order. It is quit using
<00>H. If <n> is less than or equal to the preceding value <n>, horizontal tab setting is
completed and subsequent data is processed as normal data.
• ESC D NULL cancels all horizontal tab positions.
• Previously specified horizontal tab positions do not change, even if the character width
changes after setting the horizontal tab position.
The character width is stored for standard and page modes.
STAR • When using Chinese character mode, set for the pitch of the ANK fonts (Font-A and Font-B).
• If <n> exceeds the printable region, set the horizontal tab position to the position +1 of the
maximum print column count.
Reference HT

ESC E n
Name Specify/cancel emphasized characters

Code ASCII ESC E n
Hex. 1B 45 n
Decimal 27 69 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels emphasized characters.
• Cancels emphasized characters when n = <*******0>B.
• Specifies emphasized characters when n = <*******1>B.
Details • n is effective only when it is the lowest bit.
• The setting of the last received command is effective even when emphasized printing is
executed by the ESC! (Batch specify print mode) command.
• This command is enabled for ANK characters and Chinese characters.
Reference ESC !

ESC G n
Name Specify/cancel double printing

Code ASCII ESC G n
Hex. 1B 47 n
Decimal 27 71 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels double printing.
• Cancels double printing when n = <*******0>B.
• Specifies double printing when n = <*******1>B.
• This printer is not capable of double printing, so the print is the same as when using
emphasized printing.
• This command is enabled for ANK characters and Chinese characters.
Reference ESC E

ESC J n
Name Print and Paper Feed

Code ASCII ESC J n
Hex. 1B 4A n
Decimal 27 74 n
Function Prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper [n x basic calculated pitch].
Details • Sets the print position to the beginning of the next line after execution.
• The line spacing amount set by the following commands is not affected.
a. ESC 2 (Default line feed amount)
b. ESC 3 (Set line feed amount)
• In standard mode, the basic calculated pitch (y) for the vertical direction is used.
• Paper is fed approximately 1016 mm if the [n x basic calculated pitch] exceeds approximately
1016 mm (40 inches).
STAR • When the setting for the line feed amount is smaller than the print data height in standard
mode:
Reference GS P

ESC L
Name Select page mode

Code ASCII ESC L
Hex. 1B 4C
Decimal 27 76
Function Switches from standard mode to page mode.
Details • Enabled only when input with the top of line.
• Invalid when input by page mode.
• Returns to standard mode after the following commands are issued.
a. FF (Print and recover to page mode)
b. ESC S (Select standard mode)
• Character expansion position has the starting point specified by ESC T (Character print
direction selection in page mode) in the printing region designated by the ESC W (Set print
region in the page mode) command.
• This command switches the settings for the following commands the values of which can be
set independently in standard mode and page mode to those for page mode
a. Set space amount: ESC SP, FS S
b. Set line feed amount: ESC 2, ESC 3
• The following commands are enabled only when in page mode.
a. ESC V: Specify/cancel character 90 degree clockwise rotation
b. ESC a: Position alignment
c. ESC {: Specify/cancel upside-down printing
d. GS L: Set left margin
e. GS W: Set print region width
• The following command is ignored in page mode.
a. GS (A: Test print
• The following commands are invalid in page mode.
a. FS p: Print NV bit image
b. FS q: Define NV bit image
c. FS g1: Write data to user NV memory
d. GS v0: Print raster bit images
e. GS ( L m fn (fn = 69): Print NV graphics
f. GS ( 8 m fn (fn = 69): Print NV graphics
• Recover to standard mode using ESC@ (initialize printer).

Reference FF, CAN, ESC FF, ESC S, ESC T, ESC W, GS $, GS \
See section 2. Explanations of the Page Mode for details.

ESC M n
Name Select character font

Code ASCII ESC M n
Hex. 1B 4D n
Decimal 27 77 n
Defined Region n = 0, 1, 48, 49
Function Selects character font.
n Function
0,48 Selects Font A (12 x 24).
1,49 Selects Font B (9 x 17).
Details • It is possible to select the character font using ESC! (Batch specify Chinese character print
mode), but the last command received is effective.
STAR • The following are the font configurations on STAR printers.

Font A 12 x 24 Dots
Font B 9 x 24 Dots
Reference ESC !

ESC R n
Name Select international characters

Code ASCII ESC R n
Hex. 1B 52 n
Decimal 27 82 n
Defined Region Spec. A: 0 ≤ n ≤ 13
Spec. B: 0 ≤ n ≤ 17
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the character set for the country listed below.
Spec. A:
n Country
0 America
1 France
2 Germany
3 UK
4 Denmark I
5 Sweden
6 Italy
7 Spain I
8 Japan
9 Norway
10 Denmark II
11 Spain II
12 Latin America
13 Korea
Spec. B:
n International character set
0 America
1 France
2 Germany
3 UK
4 Denmark I
5 Sweden
6 Italy
7 Spain I
8 Japan
9 Norway
10 Denmark II
11 Spain II
12 Latin America
13 Korea
14 Slovenia / Croatia
15 China
16 Vietnam
17 Arabia

ESC S
Name Select standard mode

Code ASCII ESC S
Hex. 1B 53
Decimal 27 83
Function Switches from page mode to standard mode.
Details • Valid only when input by page mode.
• All buffer data in page mode is deleted.
• The print area set by ESCW (Set print region in page mode) is reset to the default setting.
• This command switches the settings for the following commands the values of which can be
set independently in standard mode and page mode to those for standard mode
a. ESC SP: Set character right space amount
b. FS S: Set Chinese character space amount
c. ESC 2: Set default line spacing
d. ESC 3: Set line feed amount
• The following commands are effective only when in standard mode.
a. ESC W :Set print region in page mode
b. ESC T: Select character print direction in page mode
• The following commands are ignored in standard mode.
a. GS S: S
pecify absolute position for character vertical direction in page mode
b. GS \: Specify relative position for character vertical direction in page mode
• Standard mode is selected when the power is turned on, the printer is reset or initialized
(ESC @).
Reference FF, ESC FF, ESC L

ESC T n
Name Select character print direction in page mode

Code ASCII ESC T n
Hex. 1B 54 n
Decimal 27 84 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the character printing direction and starting point in page mode.
Paper Feed Direction

n Print Direction Starting Point
0,48 Left to Right Upper Left (A in the figure below)
Print Region
1,49 Bottom to Top Lower Left (B in the figure below)
2,50 Right to Left Lower Right (C in the Figure below)
3,51 Top to Bottom Upper Right (D in the figure below)
Details • Executes only a printer internal flag operation when this command is input in standard mode.
The command does not affect printing in standard mode.
• The character expansion starting point is in the print region specified by ESC W (Set print
region in page mode).
• The basic calculated pitch (x or y) used with the following commands differs according to the
starting point.
a. If the starting point is upper left or lower right (feeds paper and expands characters in the
vertical direction)
Commands using x : ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S
Commands using y : SC 3, ESC J, GS $, GS \
b. If the starting point is upper right or lower left
Commands using x : ESC 3, ESC J, GS $, GS \
Commands using y : ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S
Reference ESC $, ESC L, ESC W, ESC \, GS $, GS P, GS\

ESC V n
Name Specify/cancel character 90 degree clockwise rotation

Code ASCII ESC V n
Hex. 1B 56 n
Decimal 27 86 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels character 90 degree clockwise rotation.
n Function
0, 48 Cancels 90 degree clockwise rotation
1, 49 Specifies 90 degree clockwise rotation
Details • Underlines are not applied to characters rotated 90 degrees clockwise even when ESC !,
ESC – or FS – commands are given.
• If 90 degree clockwise rotation is specified, double-wide and double-tall commands in the 90
rotation mode enlarges characters in the opposite directions to double-wide and double-tall
commands.
• This command only affects printing in standard mode.
• In page mode, this command is only effective for the setting.
• This command is effective for ANK and Chinese characters.
STAR • Characters are rotated as shown below when printing 90 degree clockwise rotation
characters.
Vertical 1 Horizontal 2 Mags Right Space Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 Mag
90 Degree Clockwise Rotation
Vertical 1 Horizontal 2 Mags Right Space Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 Mag

M
Reference ESC !, ESC -

ESC W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
Name Set print region in page mode

Code ASCII ESC W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
Hex. 1B 57 xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
Decimal 27 87 xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH
Defined Region 0 ≤ xL, xH, yL, yH, dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH ≤ 255
However, this excludes dxL = dxH = 0 or dyL = dyH = 0
Initial Value xL = xH = yL = yH = 0
See Appendix-5 for details relating to dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH.
Function Sets the print region position and size.
• Horizontal direction starting point [(xL + xH x 256) x basic calculated pitch]
• Vertical direction starting point [(yL + yH x 256) x basic calculated pitch]
• Horizontal direction length [(dxL + dxH x 256) basic calculated pitch]
• Vertical direction length = [(dyL + dyH x 256) basic calculated pitch]
Details • In standard mode, the printer executes only internal flag operations with this command is
input.
• If the horizontal direction starting point or vertical direction starting point is outside of the
printable region, the command is stopped and normal printing commences from subsequent
data.
• If the horizontal direction length or vertical direction length is 0, the command is stopped and
normal printing commences from subsequent data.
• The character expansion starting point is the point specified by selecting the character
printing direction (ESC T) in page mode in the print region.
• If (horizontal direction starting position + horizontal direction length) exceeds the printable
region in the horizontal direction, the horizontal direction length is set to (horizontal direction
printable region - horizontal direction starting point).
• If (vertical direction starting position + vertical direction length) exceeds the printable region
in the vertical direction, the vertical direction length is set to (vertical direction printable region
- vertical direction starting point).
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (Set basic calculated pitch). Also, the set printing
region is not changed even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after setting the print
region.
• The basic calculated pitch (x) is used in the calculated pitch for the horizontal direction
starting point and the length in the horizontal direction; and the basic calculated pitch (y)
is used in the calculated pitch for the vertical direction starting point and the length in the
vertical direction.
• The print region shown in the figure below when the horizontal direction starting is X; the
vertical direction starting point is Y; the horizontal direction length is Dx; and the vertical
direction length is Dy.
• See Appendix-5 for details on print regions.

(X ,Y) Paper
Dx
Paper Feed Direction

Dy Print Region
(X+Dx-1, Y+Dy-1)
Reference CAN, ESC L, ESC T, GSP, Appendix-5

ESC \ nL nH
Name Specify relative position

Code ASCII ESC \ nL nH
Hex. 1B 5C nL nH
Decimal 27 92 nL nH
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Function • Specifies the next print starting position with a relative position based on the current position.
This sets the position from the current position to [(nL + nH x 256) x basic calculated pitch]
for the next print starting position.
Details • Specifications exceeding the print range are ignored.
• If the right direction of the current position is specified for the character direction, specify a
positive number; if the left direction is specified, a negative number is used.
• Negative numbers is represented by the complement of 65536. For example, when moving
in the left direction n pitches, use:
nL + nH × 256 = 65536-N
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (basic calculated pitch setting).
• If there are fractions in the result, correct to the minimum mechanical pitch and discard.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction in standard mode.
• The following operations occur according to the starting point in page mode.
a. If the starting point is set to upper left or lower right by the ESC T (Select character print
direction in page mode) command, specify the relative position of the vertical direction in
the paper feed. Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction at this time.
b. If the starting point is set to upper right or lower left by the ESC T (Select character print
direction in page mode) command, move the print position in the paper feed direction.
Use the basic calculated pitch (y) for the horizontal direction at this time.
Reference ESC $, GS P

ESC a n
Name Position alignment

Code ASCII ESC a n
Hex. 1B 61 n
Decimal 27 97 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Aligns all print data in one line to a specified position.
n Position
0, 48 Left alignment
1, 49 Center
2, 50 Right alignment
Details • This command is effective only when input at the top of the line when standard mode is being
used.
• This command does has no affect in page mode. In page mode, this command is only
effective for the setting.
• Specifies the alignment position in the printing region that has been set.
• Portions skipped using the following commands are also targeted for position alignment.
a. HT : Horizontal tab
b. ESC $ : Specify absolute position
c. ESC \ : Specify relative position
[Ex.]
Left alignment Center Right alignment

ABC ABC ABC
ABCD ABCD ABCD
ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

ESC c 3 n
Name Select paper out sensor to enable at paper out signal output
Code ASCII ESC c 3 n
Hex. 1B 63 33 n
Decimal 27 99 51 n
Initial Value Spec. A: n = 15
Spec. B: n = 0
Function Selects paper out detector that outputs a paper out signal when paper has run out.
Spec. B:
7 Undefined -- --
6 Undefined -- --
5 Undefined -- --
4 Undefined -- --
3 Undefined -- --
2 Undefined -- --
1 Paper roll near end detector Invalid Valid
Details • It is possible to select a multiple of detectors for signal output at the same time. If any of the
detectors detects the end of the paper, the paper end signal is output.
• This command is only effective when using a parallel interface. It is ignored when using a
serial interface.
• The detector switches when this command is executed so there may be some delay from
reception of this command until switching to the paper out signal, depending on the status of
the reception buffer.
• If either bit 0 or bit 1 is set to 1, select the paper roll near end detector as the paper out
detector for paper out signal output.
• If either bit 2 or bit 3 is set to 1, select the paper roll end detector as the paper out detector
for paper out signal output.
• If all detectors are invalid, the paper out signal is constantly output as having paper.

ESC c 4 n
Name Select paper out sensor to enable at printing stop

Hex. 1B 63 34 n
Decimal 27 99 52 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the paper out detector to stop printing when paper has run out.
7 Undefined -- --
6 Undefined -- --
5 Undefined -- --
4 Undefined -- --
3 Undefined -- --
2 Undefined -- --
Details • To stop printing, the printer stops after printing the current line and feeding paper.
• The printer goes offline when printing is stopped.
• If either bit 0 or bit 1 is set to 1, select the paper roll near end detector as the paper out
detector effective to stop printing.

ESC c 5 n
Name Enable/disable panel switches

Hex. 1B 63 35 n
Decimal 27 99 53 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Toggles the panel switches between enabled and disabled.
• Enables panel switches when n = <*******0>B.
• Disables panel switches when n = <*******1>B.
• When disabled, all panel switches are disabled.
• The paper feed switch is enabled regardless of this command if waiting for the switch while
executing a macro. However, there is no paper feed.
STAR • Switches are disabled even if the panel switches are enabled using this command for the
following cases.
a. When paper out errors occur
b. When cover open errors occur
• Use the ESC @ command to reset the panel switches disabled using this command.

ESC d n
Name Print and feed paper n lines

Code ASCII ESC d n
Hex. 1B 64 n
Decimal 27 100 n
Function Prints the data in the print buffer and performs a paper feed of n lines.
Details • Sets the print position to the beginning of the next line after printing.
• Line feeds set by the following commands are not affected.
a. ESC 2: Set default line spacing
b. ESC 3: Set line feed amount
• Paper is fed approximately 1016 mm (40 inches) if the [n x line feed amount] exceeds
approximately 1016 mm (40 inches) .
STAR • When the setting for the line feed amount is smaller than the print data height in standard
mode:
Reference ESC 2, ESC 3

ESC p m t1 t2
Name Specify pulse

Code ASCII ESC p m t1 t2
Hex. 1B 70 m t1 t2
Decimal 27 112 m t1 t2
Defined Region 0 ≤ m ≤ 1, 48 ≤ m ≤ 49
0 ≤ t1 ≤ 255
0 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Function This outputs a signal specified by t1 and t2 to the connector pin specified by m.
m Connector Pin
0, 48 Drawer kick connector pin #2
1, 49 Drawer kick connector pin #5
Details Drawer kick on time is set to t1 x 2 ms; off time is set to t2 x 2 ms.
ON
OFF
t1 t2
When t1 > t2, the value of t2 is processed as t2 = t1.
Reference DLE DC4

ESC t n
Name Select character code table

Code ASCII ESC t n
Hex. 1B 74 n
Decimal 27 116 n
Defined Region Spec. A: 0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 16 ≤ n ≤ 19, n = 255
Spec. B: 0 ≤ n ≤ 5, 16 ≤ n ≤ 26, n = 255
Initial Value n=0
Function Select page n of the character code table.
Spec. A:
n Character Type
0 PC437 (USA: Standard Europe)
1 Katakana
2 PC850(Multilingual)
3 PC860(Portuguese)
4 PC863(Canadian-French)
5 PC865(Nordic)
16 WPC1252
17 PC866 (Cyrillic #2)
18 PC852 (Latin2)
19 PC858
255 Blank page
Spec. B:
n Character Type
0 PC437 (USA: Standard Europe)
1 Katakana
2 PC850(Multilingual)
3 PC860(Portuguese)
4 PC863(Canadian-French)
5 PC865(Nordic)
16 WPC1252
17 PC866 (Cyrillic #2)
18 PC852 (Latin2)
19 PC858
20 Thai Character Code 42 [Thai]
255 Blank page
Reference ESC GS t

ESC { n
Name Specify/cancel upside-down printing

Code ASCII ESC { n
Hex. 1B 7B n
Decimal 27 123 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels upside-down printing.
• Cancels upside-down printing when n = <*******0>H.
• Specifies upside-down printing when n = <*******1>H.
• This command is effective only when input at the top of the line when standard mode is being
used.
• This command has no affect in page mode. In page mode, this command is only effective for
the setting.
• Upside-down printing rotates line data 180 degrees.
STAR • The characters that are printed in upside-down printing are reversed, but the order of the
lines that are printed are not in reverse.

When upside-down printing is canceled When upside-down printing is specified

ABCDEF 012345
012345 ABCDEF
Paper Feed Cirection
•Upside-down printing is enabled for the following images.

a. ESC * : Specify bit image mode
b. GS /: Print download bit images
c. FS P: Print NV bit image mode

FS g 1 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH d1 ... dk
Name Write data to user NV memory

Code ASCII FS g 1 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH d
1...dk
Hex. 1C 67 31 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH d
1...dk
Decimal 28 103 49 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH d1...dk
Defined Region m = 0
0 ≤ {a1+ (a2×256) + (a3 × 65536) + (a4×16777216) } ≤ 1023
1 ≤ {nL+ (nH×256) } ≤ 1024
32 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = {nL+ (nH×256) }
Function Stores data in the user NV memory.
• m is fixed at 0.
• a1, a2, a3 and a4 specify the data storage addresses {a1 + (a2 x 256) + (a3 x 65536) + (a4 x
16777216)}.
• nL and nH specify the storage data count in byes of {nL+ (nH x 256)}.
• d specifies the stored data.
Details • The user NV memory is a storage region dedicated for character data that is ensured on a
non-volatile memory.
• This command is effective only when input at the top of the line when standard mode is being
used.
• When in page mode, this command is invalid.
• When processing this command while defining a macro, the macro definition is terminated
and the command commences with processing.
• This command is ignored and subsequent data is processed as normal data if the argument
(m), storage starting address (a1, a2, a3, a4), and the storage data count (nL, nH) are out of
the definition, or if [{the storage starting address (a1, a2, a3, a4) + storage data count (nL,
nH)} ≥ 1024.
• This command is completed when the storage data (d) out of the definition is processed,
and subsequent data is processed as normal data. At this time, data that has already been
processed is stored in memory.
• The data storage process executes an overwrite.
Therefore, data that is already stored in the region is erased.
• A memory or gate array R/W error occurs when a writing error occurs.
• Data in the user NV memory can be read using FS g 2 (Read user NV memory data).
• User NV memory data is not initialized with the following.
a. ESC@ : Initialize printer
b. FS q: Define NV bit image
c. When the printer is reset or the power is turned off

Notes: • There is the potential of damaging the non-volatile memory by overusing the command to
write to that memory (FS g 1), so only use this command once a day to write to the non-
volatile memory.
• The printer may enter a busy state while writing data to the non-volatile memory when using
this command. While the printer is busy, the printer will stop receptions so data will not be
received from the host (including real-time commands).
STAR • STAR printers ignore this command. (It receives and discards the writing data of nL + nH x
256.)
Reference FS g 2

FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH
Name Read user NV memory data

Code ASCII FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH
Hex. 1C 67 32 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH
Decimal 28 103 50 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL nH
Defined Region m = 0
0 ≤ {a1+ (a2×256) + (a3×65536) + (a4×16777216) } ≤ 1023
1 ≤ {nL+ (nH×256) } ≤ 80
Function Sends the data in the user NV memory.
• m is fixed at 0.
• a1, a2, a3 and a4 specify the data sending starting addresses {a1 + (a2 x 256) + (a3 ×
65536) + (a4×16777216)}.
• nL and nH specify the transmissino data count in byes of {nL+ (nH x 256)}.
Details • The user NV memory is a storage region dedicated for character data that is ensured on a
non-volatile memory.
• This command is ignored and subsequent data is processed as normal data if the argument
(m), storage starting address (a1, a2, a3, a4), and the storage data count (nL, nH) are out of
the definition, or if [{the storage starting address (a1, a2, a3, a4) + storage data count (nL,
nH)} ≥ 1024.
• The following process occur when preparations for transmitting data have been completed.
1. Executes a READY to BUSY process If the printer is already in a BUSY state, it does
nothing.
2. Executes the [Header + Data + NUL] transmission
3. Executes a BUSY to READY process If the printer is already in a BUSY state for some other
reason, it does nothing.
• The configuration for the [Header + Data + NUL] is below.
Header: Hex. = 5FH/Decimal = 95 (1 byte)
Data: User NV memory data (nL + (nH x 256) bytes)
NUL: Hex. = 00H/Decimal = 0 (1 byte)
• When DTR/DSR control is selected, after verifying that the host can receive data when
transmitting the Header, all code are transmitted consecutively. If the host is not able to
receive data, the printer will wait until it is ready.
• When XON/XOFF control is selected, all code are transmitted consecutively without verifying
whether the host can receive data. Always send data consecutively, except for the XOFF
code.
• With parallel interfaces, the transmission data buffer (excluding ASB status and the buffer
that store all transmission data) is 99 bytes. Data that exceeds 99 bytes is discarded.
• It is possible to write to the user NV memory using FS g 1.
• There is the possibility of delays between the reception of this command and the storage of
data depending on the reception buffer status.

Notes: • The printer transmits all data after starting transmission of the header without confirming
whether the host computer can receive data. Therefore, when using this command, the host
reception buffer size should be set to (transmission data + 2) to ensure that reception is not
lost.
• Real-time command (DLE expansion command) is ignored while transmitting data. Also,
ASB status is not transmitted while transmitting data even when the ASB function is enabled.
Therefore, status changes in the printer while transmitting data are not known. The operator
should be aware of this.
STAR • STAR printers ignore this command. (They receive and discard FS g 2 m a1 a2 a3 a4 nL
nH.)
Reference FS g 1

FS p n m
Name Print NV bit image

Code ASCII FS p n m
Hex. 1C 70 n m
Decimal 28 112 n m
0 ≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51
Function Prints NV bit image n using mode m.
m Mode Density of Vertical Direction Dots Density of Horizontal Direction Dots
0, 48 Normal Mode 180 DPI 180 DPI
1, 49 Double-wide Mode 180 DPI 90 DPI
2, 50 Double-tall Mode 90 DPI 180 DPI
3, 51 Quadruple Mode 90 DPI 90 DPI
• n specifies the NV bit image number.

• m specifies the bit-image mode.
Details • NV bit image is a bit image defined in non-volatile memory by FS q and printed by this
command.
• This command is ignored when the specified NV bit image n is undefined.
• This command is effective only when no data exists in the print buffer in standard mode.
If data exists, 2 bytes are ignored.
• When in page mode, this command is disabled.
• Excluding upside-down printing, print modes (emphasized printing, double printing,
underlines, character sizes, black/white inverted printing and 90 degree clockwise rotation)
are unaffected.
• If bit image specification is of a size that exceeds the print region, the data in the print region
is targeted for printing, but the excessive data is not printed.
• This command feeds dots (for the height n of the NV bit image) in normal and double-width
modes, and (for the height of the NV bit image n x 2) in double-height and quadruple modes,
regardless of the line spacing specified by ESC 2 (Set default line spacing) or ESC 3 (Set
line feed amount).
• After printing the bit image, this command sets the print position to the top of the line and
processes the subsequent data as normal data.
The NV bit image data defined by “GS ( L <fn=67>, GS ( 8 <fn=67>” is printable by this
command.
• See Appendix-11 for setting details.
Related Commands ESC *, FS q, GS \, GS v 0
Reference Appendix -11

FS q n [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] 1... [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] n
Name Define NV bit image

Code ASCII FS q n [xL xH yL yH d1...dk]1 ... [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] n
Hex. 1C 71 n [xL xH yL yH d1...dk]1 ... [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] n
Decimal 28 113 n [xL xH yL yH d1...dk]1 ... [xL xH yL yH d1...dk] n
0 ≤ xL ≤ 255
0 ≤ xH ≤ 3 However, 1 ≤ (xL+xH×256) ≤ 1023
0 ≤ yL ≤ 255
0 ≤ yH ≤ 1 However, 1 ≤ (yL+yH×256) ≤ 288
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = (xL+xH×256) × (yL+yH×256) ×8
Total defined data area = 2 M bytes (256 K bytes)
Function Defines the specified NV bit image.
• n specifies the number of NV bit images to define.
• xL and xH specify the horizontal direction for one NV bit image (xL + xH x 256) x 8 dots.
• yL and yH specify the vertical direction for one NV bit image (yL + yH x 256) x 8 dots.
Details • This command erases all previously defined NV bit images. The printer cannot redefine only
one of several data definitions that had been defined before. Therefore, all data must be
resent.
• Mechanical operations (such as initializing the position of the print head when the cover
is open, feeding paper using a switch) cannot be executed from the time this command
commences its process until a hardware reset is completed.
• NV bit image is a bit image defined by this command in non-volatile memory and is printed
by the FS p (Print NV bit image) command.
• This command is effective only when processed at the top of the line when standard mode is
being used.
• When in page mode, this command is disabled.
• This command is effective when 7 bytes of FS to yH of the command are processed
normally.
• When the amount of data exceeds the capacity left in the range defined by xL, xH, yL, yH, the
printer processes an argument that is out of the defined range.
• This command is invalid when processing an argument that is out of the defined range with
the initial NV bit image data.
• The printer terminates processing of this command and starts writing data to the non-volatile
memory if an argument out of the defined range is processed on the second and subsequent
NV bit image data. This invalidates the NV bit image being defined (making it undefined), but
the NV bit images prior to that are valid.
• d specifies defined data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that
• An n number of NV bit images are defined in ascending order from 01H. Therefore, The
first data of [xLxHyLyHd1…dk] is an NV bit image of the number 01H. The final data of
[xLxHyLyHd1…dk] is the NV bit image of the number n.
This matches with the NV bit image number that is specified for NV bit image printing (by FS
p).

• See the printer’s product specifications manual for details on NV memory capacity.
• One NV bit image definition data is configured by [xL xH yL yH d1…dk]. Therefore, if
defining only one NV bit image data, n = 1. The data of [xL xH yL yH d1…dk] is processed
only once. This uses ([data: (xL + xH x 256) x (yL + yH x 256) x 8] + [Data: 4]) of non-volatile
memory.
• The maximum region for NV bit image definition varies according to the printer model.
Several NV bit images can be defined, but NV bit image data that exceeds the maximum
definition region with a total capacity of (data bit image data + header) cannot be defined.
• The printer is in a BUSY state just prior to writing to the non-volatile memory. The printer will
be in a BUSY state prior to writing data regardless of the conditions for a BUSY state.
• The sending of ASB status and detection of status are not possible while processing this
command even when the ASB function is specified.
• NV bit images that have been defined are not initialized by the ESC @ (Initialize printer), a
reset or by turning off the printer’s power.
• This command only defines the NV bit image, but it does not print it. To print an NV bit
image, use FS p (Print NV bit image).
Notes: • There is the potential of damaging the non-volatile memory by overusing the command, so
only use this command once a day to write to the non-volatile memory.
• The printer executes a hardware reset just after writing to the non-volatile memory.
Therefore, download characters and download bit images and macros are handled as
being undefined and the reception buffer and print buffer are cleared. The printer returns all
settings to their default status.
• The printer may enter a BUSY state while writing data to the non-volatile memory when
using this command. While the printer is BUSY, the printer will stop receptions so data will
not be received from the host (including real-time commands).
Related Commands FS p

When xL = 64, xH = 0, yL = 96, yH = 0
(xL + xH x 256) x 8 dots = 512 dots
d1 d97 d49057
MSB
d2 d98 d49058
(yL + yH x 256) x 8 dots = 786 dots

: :
LSB :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
: : :
d96 d949152

GS ! n
Name Select character size

Code ASCII GS ! n
Hex. 1D 21 n
Decimal 29 33 n
However, 1 ≤ vertical direction magnification ratio ≤ 8, 1 ≤ horizontal direction magnification
ratio ≤ 8
Initial Value n = 0
Function Specifies the character size (magnification ratio in the vertical and horizontal directions).
7 Specifies horizontal direction (See table below)
magnification ratio
6
5
4
3 Specifies vertical direction (See table below)
magnification ratio
2
1
0
<Horizontal Direction Magnification Ratio Specification> <Vertical Direction Magnification Ratio Specification>
Bit-7 Bit-6 Bit-5 Bit-4 Hor. Dir. Bit-3 Bit-2 Bit-1 Bit-0 Hor. Dir.
Mag. Ratio Mag. Ratio
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 1 0 3 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 1 1 4 0 0 1 1 4
0 1 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 5
0 1 0 1 6 0 1 0 1 6
0 1 1 0 7 0 1 1 0 7
0 1 1 1 8 0 1 1 1 8
1 0 0 0 Undefined 1 0 0 0 Undefined

Details • This command is effective for all characters (ANK and Chinese characters), excluding HRI
characters.
• If the vertical and horizontal magnification ratios are outside the defined range, this command
is ignored.
• In standard mode, the vertical direction is the paper feed direction; the horizontal direction
traverses the paper feed direction. Therefore, when character orientation changes in 90
degree clockwise rotation mode, the relationship between vertical and horizontal directions is
reversed.
• In page mode, vertical and horizontal directions are based on the character orientation.
• The ESC ! (Batch specify print mode) command can also turn double-width and double-
height modes on or off, but the setting of the last received command is effective.
Reference ESC !

GS $ nL nH
Name Specify absolute position for character vertical direction in page mode
Code ASCII GS $ nL nH
Hex. 1D 24 nL nH
Decimal 29 36 nL nH
Defined Region 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Function Specifies the character vertical direction position for the data expansion starting position
using the absolute position based on the starting point in page mode. The position of the
character vertical direction for the next data expansion starting position is the position
specified by [(nL + nH x 256) x basic calculated pitch] from the starting point.
Details • When not in page mode, this command is ignored.
• Specifications for absolute positions that exceed the specified print range are ignored.
• The position of the character horizontal direction of the data expansion starting position does
not move.
• The starting point that is used as a reference is specified by ESC T.
• The following operations occur depending on the starting point of (Selecting the character
printing direction in page mode) ESC T.
a. If the starting point is upper left or lower right, specify the absolution position for the
paper feed direction (character vertical direction). Use the basic calculated pitch (y) for the
horizontal direction at this time.
b. If the starting point is upper right or lower left, specify the absolution position for the paper
feed in the vertical direction (character vertical direction). Use the basic calculated pitch (x)
for the horizontal direction at this time.
Reference ESC $, ESC T, ESC W, ESC \, GS P, GS \
See section 2. Explanations of the Page Mode.

GS * xy d1 … d (xX yX 8)
Name Define download bit images

Code ASCII GS * x y d1...d (x×y×8)
Hex. 1D 2A x y d1...d (x×y×8)
Decimal 29 42 x y d1...d (x×y×8)
Defined Region 1 ≤ x ≤ 255
1 ≤ y ≤ 48 However, x × y ≤ 1536
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Function Defines the download bit image of the number of dots specified by x and y.
• x specifies the number of dots in the horizontal direction.
• y specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction.
Details • Horizontal direction dot count is x X 8 dots; Vertical direction dot count is y X 8 dots
• d indicates the bit-image data.
Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that
are not printed are 0.
• GS * (define download bit images) and ESC& (define download characters) cannot both
be defined simultaneously. Download character definitions are cleared by executing this
command.
• Defined download bit images are cleared under the following executions.
a. ESC @: Initialize printer
b. ESC &: Define download characters
c. FS q: Define NV bit image
d. When the printer is reset or the power is turned off
•The following illustration shows the relationship between download bit images and the print
data.

x x 8 dots
d1 dy+1 dyx2+1
MSB
d2 dy+2 dyx2+2
: : :
LSB :
: : : : y x 8 dots
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
: : : :
dx x y x 8
dy dy x 2 dy x 3
Reference GS /

GS ( A pL pH n m
Name Test print

Code ASCII GS ( A pL pH n m
Hex. 1D 28 41 pL pH n m
Decimal 29 40 65 pL pH n m
Defined Region {pL+ (pH×256) } = 2 (pL = 2, pH = 0)
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50
1 ≤ m ≤ 3, 49 ≤ m ≤ 51
Function Executes the specified test print.
• Specifies the parameter count following pL and pH in (pL + (pH x 256)) bytes.
• n specifies the paper to use in the test print shown in the tables below.
n Paper Type
0, 48 Basic sheet (paper roll)
1, 49
Paper Roll
2, 50
• m specifies the type of test print shown in the tables below.

m Type of Test Print
1, 49 Hex. Dump
2, 50 Printer Status (Self Print)
3, 51 Rolling Pattern Print
Details • This command is effective only when processed at the top of the line when standard mode is
being used.
• When in page mode, this command is ignored.
• After the test print is completed, the printer executes a hardware reset. Therefore, download
characters and download bit images and macros are handled as being undefined and the
reception buffer and print buffer are cleared. The printer returns all settings to their default
status.
• After the final test print, this executes a paper cut.
• After the command is processed, the printer enters a BUSY state.

<Function 49> GS ( K pL pH fn m (Fn=49)
Name Set print density

Code ASCII GS ( K pL pH fn m
Hex. 1D 28 4B pL pH fn m
Decimal 29 40 75 pL pH fn m
Defined Region {pL + (pH × 256) } = 2 (pL = 2, pH = 0)
fn = 49
250 ≤ m ≤ 255, 0 ≤ m ≤ 6
Initial Value m=0
Function Sets print density.
Spec. A
m Print Density
250 0.7
251 0.7
252 0.8
253 0.8
254 0.9
255 0.9
0 1.0
1 1.1
2 1.1
3 1.2
4 1.2
5 1.3
6 1.3

Spec. B
Print Density
m Single Color Printing Mode 2-color Printing Mode Red Print Density
Double Resolution Mode
*1
250 Print density -3 Print density -1
254 Print density -1 Standard print density (Standard)
255 Print density -1 Standard print density (Standard)
0 Standard print density (Standard) Standard print density (Standard)
1 Print density + 1 Standard print density (Standard)
3 Print density + 2 Print density + 1
*1) See the appropriate printer specifications manual for details on the print modes that are available.

Spec. C
Print Density
m Single Color Printing Mode 2-color Printing Mode Red Print Density
Double Resolution Mode
*2
0 Standard print density (Standard) Standard print density (Standard)
*2) See the appropriate printer specifications manual for details on the print modes that are
available.
STAR This command changes the print density after the test print is stopped.
When in two-color print mode, you can only set print density for red print using this command.
The print density setting using this command is invalid when in low peak current mode.

<Function 50> GS ( K pL pH fn m (Fn=50)
Name Set printing speed

Code ASCII GS ( K pL pH fn m
Hex. 1D 28 4B pL pH fn m
Decimal 29 40 75 pL pH fn m
Defined Region {pL + (pH × 256) } = 2 (pL = 2, pH = 0)
fn = 50
0 ≤ m ≤ 9, 48 ≤ m ≤ 57
Initial Value m=9
Function Sets printing speed.
m Printing Speed
0, 48 MSW Load Settings (default)
1, 49 Slow speed
2, 50 Slow speed
3, 51 Slow speed
4, 52 Mid-speed
5, 53 Mid-speed
6, 54 Mid-speed
7, 55 High speed
8, 56 High speed
9, 57 High speed
STAR The speed setting is disabled during reduced printing in the vertical direction. However, this
command setting is enabled when reduced printing in the vertical direction is released.

GS ( L pL pH m fn [parameter]
GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn [parameter]
Name Specify graphics data

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn [parameter]
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m fn parameter]
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn [parameter]
Code ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn [parameter]

Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn [parameter]
Decimal 1D 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn [parameter]

(*) Use the GS ( L code to explain each function.
• GS ( L and GS 8 L are the same function.
• If [parameter] in each function exceeds 65533 bytes, use GS 8 L.

Function Runs the process related to the graphics data specified by the function code (fn).
fn Code Function Function For STAR
No.
0, 48 GS ( L pL pH m fn 48 Send NV graphics memory Supported
capacity
2, 50 GS ( L pL pH m fn 50 Print raster graphics data Receive and discard
3, 51 GS ( L pL pH m fn 51 Send remaining NV graph- Supported

ics memory capacity
64 GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 64 Send NV graphics key Supported
code
65 GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 d3 65 Batch all delete NV graph- Supported
ics data
66 GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 66 Delete the specified NV Supported
graphics data
67 GS ( L pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL 67 Define NV graphics data Supported
xH yL yH [c d1...dk]1 [c d1...dk]b
69 GS ( L pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 x y 68 Print the specified NV Supported
graphics data
112 GS ( L pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH 112 Store raster graphics data Supported
yL yH d1...dk

<Function 48> GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=48)
<Function 48> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn (fn=48)
Name Send NV graphics memory capacity

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m fn
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn
Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn
Defined Region • Parameter for GS ( L

(pL+pH×256)=2 (pL=2, pH=0)
• Parameter for GS 8 L
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=2 (p1=2, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
• Parameter are shared by for GS ( L and GS 8 L.
m = 48,
fn = 0, 48
Function Sends the entire capacity of NV graphics area in bytes.
Details • The byte count is sent in the following format:
Transmission data Hex Decimal Data length
Header 37H 55 1 Byte
Identifier 30H 48 1 Byte
Total capacity *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 8 Byte
NUL 00H 0 1 Byte
*1 The total capacity is the total number of bytes in this region.
The decimal value indicating the total capacity is converted to text data and sent in order from the MSB.
Ex.: When the total capacity is 1200 bytes:
“1200” (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48, 48) is converted to 4-bytes of data.
• This command is used when sending total capacity, and the total byte capacity of the region is sent regard-
less of the current setting for the NV graphics data. This total capacity includes the information region.
• When the value that indicates the entire capacity is “0” (Hex:30H, Decimal:48), it is not possible to use the
NV graphics function.
Note • Data transmission process: Function 48, 51, 52, 64
Observe the following rules when using these functions.

• When the host PC sends this command, the printer sends response data or the status to the PC.
The PC does not send any more data until it receives response data or status from the printer.
• When using a serial interface, configure operations for the host PC to use the printer only while the
printer is in the READY state.
• When using a parallel interface, data sent by this function ([header to NUL] block) is temporarily
stored in the transmission buffer of the printer in the same way as other data. When the host PC
enters reverse mode, data is sent from the top of the transmission buffer in order.
• When the amount of data exceeds the capacity of the transmission buffer, data is erased.
When using this command, it is important to set operations so that the host PC
immediately enters a reverse mode and quickly processes the status transmission.
• When using the Xon/Xoff mode communications of the serial interface, it is possible to
use Xoff in a data string of [header to NUL].
• Transmission information of each function can be identified as other transmission data by specific data
(identifier) of the transmission data string.
When the header sent by the printer is [Hex = 37H/Decimal = 55], data up to NUL
[Hex = 00H/Decimal = 0] is handled as one group, and identified by corresponding to the combination of
the header and identifier.

<Function 51> GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=51)
<Function 51> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn (fn=51)
Name Send NV graphics memory capacity

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m fn
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn
Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn

(pL+pH×256)=2 (pL=2, pH=0)
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=2 (p1=2, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
m = 48,
fn = 3, 51
Function Sends the remaining capacity (or unused area) of NV graphics area in bytes.
Details • Sends the number of bytes in the following format.:
Unused capacity *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 8 Byte
NUL 00H 0 1 Byte
*1 The unused capacity is the total number of bytes of the unused region.
The decimal value indicating the unused capacity is converted to text data and sent in order from the MSB.
Ex.: When the unused capacity is 120 bytes:
“120” (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48) is converted to 3-bytes of data.
• Information region is also included in the use capacity.
• Do not use this function at the same time as the NV bit image (FS q) command.
• See the Note for <Function 48> for a detailed explanation of the sending process.
Reference FS q, GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 48>

<Function 64> GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 (fn=64)
<Function 64> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 (fn=64)
Name Send a key code list of predefined NV graphics

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m f n d1 d2
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn d1 d2
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2
Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2

(pL+pH×256)=4 (pL=4, pH=0)
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=4 (p1=4, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
m = 48,
fn = 64
d1 = 75, d2 = 67
Function Sends the defined NV graphics key code list.
Details • Sends the key code in the following format:
Identifier information 40H/41H 64/65 1 Byte
*1, 2
Data 20H to 7EH 32 to 126 2 to 80 Byte
NUL 00H 0 1 Byte
*1 Send one block with identification information (3rd byte) as 40Hex, when the defined NV graphcis data
count is less than 40.
*2 Send one block with identification information (3rd byte) as 41Hex, when the defined NV graphcis data
count is over 41.
• If there is no defined NV graphics key code list, it sends the following format.

Identifier information 40H 64 1 Byte
NUL 00H 0 1 Byte
• Do not use this function at the same time as the NV bit image (FS q) command. NV bit images defined by
<FS q> are determined to have no data.
• See the Note for <Function 48> for a detailed explanation of the sending process.

<Function 65> GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 d3 (fn=65)
<Function 65> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3 (fn=65)
Name Erase entire NV graphics data

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn d1 d2 d3
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m f n d1 d2 d3
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn d1 d2 d3
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3
Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn d1 d2 d3

(pL+pH×256)=5 (pL=5, pH=0)
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=5 (p1=5, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
m = 48,
fn = 65
d1 = 67, d2 = 76, d3 = 82
Function Erases all NV graphics data defined by Function 67.
• The erased area is set to be an “unused area.”
• All key codes become undefined.
Details • Effective only at the top of the line in standard mode.
• Data for this parameter is discarded in page mode.
• Do not use this function for macro definition because this function is not compatible with the macros.
• If you use this function, all NV graphics data is erased. Take special care if NV graphics data is used in
multiple applications.
• This function also erases the NV graphics data defined by the “FS q” command.

<Function 66> GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 (fn=66)
<Function 66> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 (fn=66)
Name Erase the specified NV graphics data

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m f n kc1 kc2
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn kc1 kc2
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2

Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2

(pL+pH×256)=4 (pL=4, pH=0)
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=4 (p1=4, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
m = 48,
fn = 66
32 ≤ kc1 ≤ 126
32 ≤ kc2 ≤ 126
Function Erases the NV graphics data defined by key codes kc1 and kc2.
• The erased area is set to be an “unused area.”
• The erased key code becomes undefined.
Details • Effective only at the top of the line in standard mode.

• Data for this counter is discarded in page mode.
• Do not use this function for macro definition because this function is not compatible with the macros.
Reference GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 67>

<Function 67> GS ( L pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b (fn=67)
<Function 67> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b (fn=67)
Name Define NV graphics data (in raster format)

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m f n a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b

Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a kc1 kc2 b xL xH y L yH [c d1 ... dk] 1 ... [c d1 ... dk] b

12 ≤ (pL+pH×256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 255)
12 ≤ (p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216) ≤ 4294967295
(0 ≤ p1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p2 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p3 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p4 ≤ 255)
m = 48, fn = 67, a = 48
32 ≤ kc1 ≤ 126
32 ≤ kc2 ≤ 126
b = 1, 2
1 ≤ (xL+xH×256) ≤ 8192, (0 ≤ xL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ xH ≤ 32)
1 ≤ (yL+yH×256) ≤ 2304, (0 ≤ yL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yH ≤ 9)
c = 49 (Single-color), c = 49,50 (2-color)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = int (((xL + xH×256) + 7)÷8)×(yL + yH×256)
Function Defines the NV graphics data (in raster format) as the record specified by key codes kc1 and kc2.
• “b” specifies a number of colors of the definition data.
• “xL” and “xH” specify the horizontal size of definition data to “xL + xH x 256” dots.
• “yL” and “yH” specify the vertical size of definition data to “yL + yH x 256” dots.
• “c” specifies the definition data color as follows.

c=49: Black
c=50: Red
• “d” specifies the definition data (in raster format).

• If the specified key code already exists in memory, it is overwritten by the specified one.

Details • NV graphics are image data defined in the non-volatile memory of the printer.
Data definitions for NV graphics data generated by using this command are valid until redefined by this
command.
• This command is used to define NV graphics data.
• This function is defined by the raster format.
• Valid only at the top of the line in standard mode.
• When page mode is selected, counter data is received and discarded.
• Do not use this function when defining a macro because it is not compatible with macros.
• If there is not an adequate amount of space to store the NV graphics data, this function cannot be use.
Use Function 51 to check the available space that can be used.
• k byte data d1 … dk are processed as one item of the defined NV graphics data.
Bits that correspond to the dots to print are “1,” and the bits that correspond to the dots that are not printed
are “0.”
• When single-color (b=1) is selected, this is defined as one data group [c d1 … dk].
• When 2-color (b=2) is selected, this is defined as two data groups [c d1 … dk].
When a color (c) is specified, it is important to specify a color different from the data group.
At that time, the vertical and horizontal sizes of the data are the same.
• NV graphics data is printed using Function 69.
• Be aware that this command and NV bit image data (FS q) cannot both be defined at the same time.
The NV bit image data definition (FS q) is erased by using this command.
• The relationship of NV graphics data (raster format) and printing results are shown below.

When xL + xH × 256 = 512
int ((xL+xHx256)+7) ÷ 8 dot = 64 bytes

1 2 3 •••••••• 63 64
65 66 67 127 128
(yL + yH x 256) dot
k-1 k
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB LSB
Notes
• When the specification of (xL + xH×256), and (yL + yH×256) exceed the remaining
capacity of the NV graphics region, this function does not operate.
• When processing this function when the NV bit image is defined using FS q, after all
NV bit images are deleted, define data using this function.
• This function uses the NV graphics area of “Number of data sets (k) + Management data (14 bytes)”.
• The NV bit image data defined by this command is printable by “FS p”. See Appendix-11 for setting
details.
Reference GS ( L/GS 8 L <Function 51>, <Function 69>, FS q, Appendix-11

<Function 69> GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 x y (fn=69)
<Function 66> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y (fn=69)
Name Print the specified NV graphics data

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 x y
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m f n kc1 kc2 x y
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn kc1 kc2 x y
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y

Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn kc1 kc2 x y

(pL+pH×256)=6 (pL=6, pH=0)
(p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216)=6 (p1=6, p2=0, p3=0, p4=0)
m = 48
fn = 69
32 ≤ kc1 ≤ 126
32 ≤ kc2 ≤ 126
x = 1, 2
y = 1, 2
Function Prints the NV graphics data defined by key codes kc1 and kc2.
• Selected data can be printed in the “horizontal x-times” by “vertical y-times” scale.
Details • This function is used to print the NV graphics data defined by Function 67.
• The printer prints data only when the NV graphics data that matches the specified key code is defined.
• If data with the specified key code is not found, the data of this counter is discarded.
• If any data exists in the print buffer, the data for this counter is discarded.
• Data for this counter is discarded in page mode.
• If graphics that exceeds the print area size is specified, the data within the print area is printed out but the
excess data is not printed out.
• The horizontal and vertical size of NV graphics can be specified by “x” and “y”.
• Excluding upside-down printing, print modes (emphasized printing, overlap printing, underlines, character
sizes, black/white inverted printing, and 90 degree rotation) are unaffected.
• When normal mode or double-width mode is specified, the paper is fed for the number of dots (the height of
NV graphics) and when double-height mode or 4x mode is specified, the paper is fed for the number of dots
(NV graphics height multiplied by 2) regardless of the settings of default line spacing (ESC 2) and line feed
amount (ESC 3).
• After these graphics are printed, the next printing starts at the beginning of a line (the printer is at the
“beginning of the line” and has “no print data”), and subsequent data is processed as normal data.

• This command is affected by the following command settings:
Alignment (ESC a n)
Move to absolute position (ESC $ n1 n2)
Move to relative position (ESC \ n1 n2)
Set print area (ESC RS A n)
Horizontal tab (HT)
Upside-down printing (ESC { n)
Notes • The following explains the DPI and the maximum print area.
• “Vertical” refers to the paper feeding direction, and “horizontal” refers to a direction perpendicular to the
paper feed direction.
Star • Dot density of STAR printers (STAR printer head: 203 DPI)
XxY Mode Horizontal Direction Dot Density Vertical Direction Dot Density
1x1 Normal mode 203 DPI 203 DPI
1x2 Double-high Mode 203 DPI 101 DPI
2x1 Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 203 DPI
2x2 Double-high, Double-wide Mode 101 DPI 101 DPI
Reference GS ( L/GS 8 L , ESC 2 , ESC 3 , ESC a , ESC $ , ESC \ , ESC RS A , HT , ESC {

<Function 112> GS ( L pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1...dk (fn=112)
<Function 112> GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1…dk (fn=112)
Name Stores raster-format graphics data in print buffer.

Code ASCII GS ( L pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 ... dk
Hex. 1D 28 4C pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 … dk
Decimal 29 40 76 pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 … dk
ASCII GS 8 L p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 ... dk
Hex. 1D 38 4C p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 ... dk
Decimal 29 56 76 p1 p2 p3 p4 m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 ... dk

11 ≤ (pL+pH×256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 255)
11 ≤ (p1+p2×256+p3x65536+p4x16777216) ≤ 4294967295 (0 ≤ p1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p2 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p3 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ p4
≤ 255)
m = 48, fn = 112, a = 48,
1 ≤ bx ≤ 2, 1 ≤ by ≤ 2
49 ≤ c ≤ 50 (c=49: Single color, c=50: Two-color)
1 U (xL+xHx256) ≤ 2047
• When single color is specified
1 ≤ (yL+yHx256) ≤ 1662 (When by=1)
1 ≤ (yL+yHx256) ≤ 831 (When by=2)
• When two-color is specified
1 ≤ (yL+yHx256) ≤ 831 (When by=1)
1 ≤ (yL+yHx256) ≤ 415 (When by=2)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k=(int((xL+yHx256)+7)/8) x (yL+yHx256)
Function Stores raster-format graphics data in the print buffer using horizontal bx/vertical by.
• xL and xH specify the horizontal direction of the raster graphic in (xL + xH×256) dots.
• yL and yH specify the vertical direction of the raster graphic in (yL + yH×256) dots.
• c specifies the color of the print data.
c Print Data Color

49 First Color (Black: High Energy)
50 Second Color (Red: Low Energy)
STAR • Prints using this command.

With EPSON specifications, 1) after the data is stored in the print buffer, 2) that data stored in the print
buffer is printed, but with STAR specifications, 1) the command prints the graphics data, then 2) the printer
receives the print command for the data stored in the printer buffer, and discards it.
1) GS ( L pL pH m fn a bx by c xL xH yL yH d1 … dk (fn=112)
2) GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=2, 50)
• When c=50 (Two color) is specified, the command is ignored.
• The command is processed as normal data in Page mode.
Reference GS ( L pL pH m fn (fn=2, 50)
GS ( N pL pH n m
Name Specify print color

Code ASCII GS ( N pL pH n m
Hex. 1D 28 4E pL pH n m
Defined Region {pL+ (pH×256) } = 2 (pL = 2,pH = 0)
n = 48
m = 49,50
Initial Value m = 49
Function Specifies print color in 2 color print mode.
• This command is effective only when in 2 color printing in mode. This command is ignored
with in single color printing mode.
• Use ESC @ to initial the print color (print color = black).
m Print color
49 Black (High Energy)
50 Red (Low Energy)

GS ( k pL pH cn fn [parameter]
Name Set and print symbol

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn [ p a r ame t e r ]
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn [ p a r ame t e r ]
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn [ p a r ame t e r ]
Function Runs processes related to symbol.
• pL and pH specify the parameter count (pL + pH x 256) in bytes after cn.
• Specifies the type of symbol with cn.
• Specifies the function with fn.
• See the function specifications for details on [parameter].
cn Type of Symbol
48 PDF417 (2-dimensional code)
49 QR Code (2-dimensional code)
2D GS1 DataBar
51 (GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional,
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked)
52 GS1 compound symbol
cn fn Function No. Function Name

65 Function 065 PDF417: Set number of positions
66 Function 066 PDF417: Set number of levels
67 Function 067 PDF417: Set module width
68 Function 068 PDF417: Set level height
69 Function 069 PDF417: Set error correction level
48
70 Function 070 PDF417: Select options
80 Function 080 PDF417: Store data in symbol saving region
81 Function 081 PDF417: Print symbol data of symbol saving region
PDF417: Send size information of symbol data in
82 Function 082
65 Function 165 QR Code: Set model
67 Function 167 QR Code: Set module siz
69 Function 169 QR Code: Select error correction level
49 80 Function 180 QR Code: Store data in symbol saving region
81 Function 181 QR Code: Print symbol data of symbol saving region
QR Code: Send size information of symbol data in
82 Function 182
67 Function 367 2D GS1 DataBar: Set module siz
2D GS1 DataBar: Set The maximum width of the 2D
71 Function 371
GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked
51
80 Function 380 2D GS1 DataBar: Store data in symbol saving region
2D GS1 DataBar:
81 Function 381
Print symbol data of symbol saving region
67 Function 467 Compound symbol: Set module siz
Compound symbol:Set The maximum width of the 2D
71 Function 471
GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked
52 72 Function 472 Compound symbol: Set HRI Font
80 Function 480 Compound symbol: Store data in symbol saving region
Compound symbol: Print symbol data of symbol saving
81 Function 481
region

<Function 065> GS ( k pL pH m cn n (cn=48, fn=65)
Name Set PDF417 position count (level length)

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH m cn fn n
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH m cn fn n
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH m cn fn n
Defined Region pL = 3, pH = 0
cn = 48, fn = 65
0 ≤ n ≤ 30
Initial Value n=0
Function Sets PDF417 symbol position count (level length).

• When n = 0, sets the automatic process.
• When n≠0, sets the number of positions of the symbol data region to n code words.
Details The setting of this function affects processes of Functions 081 and 082.
When automatic processing is specified (n = 0), the maximum row number in the data region is 30.
The following data is not included in the number of positions.
• Start patterns and stop patterns
• Indicator code words of the right and left levels.
The number of positions when automatic processing is specified (n = 0), calculates the number of
code words based on the current print region, when processing Functions 081, and 082, module
width (Function 067), and the option settings (Function 070).
This setting is valid until ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is turned off.
Reference GS ( k Function 081, 082, 067, 070, ESC @

<Function 066> GS ( k pL pH m cn n (cn=48, fn=66)
Name Set PDF417 number of symbol levels

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH m cn fn n
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH m cn fn n
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH m cn fn n
cn = 48, fn = 66
n = 0, 3 ≤ n ≤ 90
Initial Value n=0
Function Sets the number of levels of the PDF417 symbols.

• When n = 0, sets the automatic process.
• When n≠0, specifies the number of positions of symbols to n levels.
When automatic processing is specified (n = 0), the maximum row number in the data region is 90.
The number of positions when automatic processing is specified (n = 0), calculates based on the
current print region, when processing Functions 081, and 082, and module width (Function 068).
Reference GS ( k Function 081, 082, 068, ESC @

<Function 067> GS ( k pL pH cn fn n (cn=48, fn=67)
Name Set PDF417 module width

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn n
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn n
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn n
cn = 48, fn = 67
2≤n≤8
Initial Value n=3
Function Sets one PDF417 module width to n dots.
Set in units of 1 dot.
The width is set in 0.125 mm (1/203 inches) units.

Reference GS ( k Function 081, 082, ESC @
Name Set the PDF417 symbol level height

cn = 48, fn = 68
2≤n≤8
Initial Value n=3
Function Sets one PDF417 symbol module height to [module width x n].
The height of one level affects the reading rate of symbols.
The height of one level is recommended to be set to 3 to 5 times the module width.
When the symbol vertical size is less than 5 mm (0.2 inches), there is the possibility that the
reading rate will drop.
It is possible to check the vertical size of the symbol using the size information status of Function
082.

<Function 069> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n (cn=48, fn=69)
Name Set the PDF417 error correction level

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m n
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m n
cn = 48, fn = 69
48 ≤ n ≤ 56 (When m = 48)
1 ≤ n ≤ 40 (When m = 49)
Initial Value m = 49, n = 1
Function Sets the PDF417 error correction level.
• When m = 48, the error correction level is set by level.
The error correction level set by ratio is discarded.
The number of error correction code words is fixed regardless of the number of code words of the
data region.
n Function Error Correction Code Word Count

48 Selects error correction level 0. 2

• When m = 49, the error correction level is set by ratio. The ratio is set to n × 10%.
The error correction level set by ratio is discarded.
The error level is determined as shown in the following table on the basis of the result (A) of
calculating [(data code words × n × 0.1) to the first decimal place rounded to the nearest integer].
The number of error correction code words varies proportionally to the number of code words
of the data region.
Calculated Result (A) Function Error Correction Code Word Count

0 to 3 Selects error correction level 1. 4
More than 401 Selects error correction level 8. 512

<Function 70> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m (cn=48, fn=70)
Name Set PDF417 options

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m
cn = 48, fn = 70
m = 0, 1
Initial Value m=0
Function Set PDF417 options
m Function
0 Selects the standard PDF417 options.
1 Selects the simple PDF417 options.
.
<Function 080> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m d1...dk (cn=48, fn=80)
Name Set the PDF417 symbol level height

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m d
1...dk
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m d
1...dk
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m d
1...dk
Defined Region 4 ≤ (pL + pH×256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 255)
cn = 48, fn = 80, m = 48
2 ≤ d ≤ 255, k = (pL + pH×256) - 3
Function Stores the symbol data (d1 … dk) of PDF417 in the symbol saving region.
Details Data stored in the symbol saving region using this function is processed using Function 081 and
082.
After processing Functions 081 and 082, data of the saving region is maintained.
k bytes of d1 … dk are processed as symbol data.
This function specifies only the data word count of the symbol.
The printer automatically applies this so the following data is not included in the d1 … dk data.
• Start patterns and stop patterns
• Indicator code words of the right and left levels.
• Descriptor related to symbol length (initial code word of the data region)
This setting is valid until this function is reset, ESC @ is executed, the printer is reset or the power is
off.

Name Encodes and prints PDF417 symbol data stored in the symbol saving region
cn = 48, fn = 81, m = 48
Function Executes encoding and printing the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region, by GS ( k Function
command.
Note The user must ensure the quiet zone.
Reference GS ( k Function 080

Name Send size information of the symbol data of the PDF417 symbol saving region
cn = 48, fn = 82, m = 48
Function Sends the size information of the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region by GS ( k Function 080.
Details The size information of the symbol is not printed with the processing of this function.
Size information indicates the size of the symbol printed by Function 081.
The quiet zone does not include size information.
Data of the size information is shown below.
Header 37H 55 1Byte
Identifier 2FH 47 1Byte
Horizontal Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes
Delimiter 1FH 31 1Byte
Vertical Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes
Fixed Value 31H 49 1Byte
Other Information *2 30H/31H 48/49 1Byte
NUL 00H 0 1Byte
* 1 The horizontal and vertical sizes are shown as the number symbol dots.
The decimal value of the horizontal and vertical sizes are converted to character data
and sent in order from the MSB.
Ex.: When the horizontal size is 120 dots, “120” is converted to 3 bytes of data (Hex:31H,
32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48).
* 2 “Other information” indicates whether it is possible to print symbol data stored in the sav-
ing region.
Hex Decimal Data length
30H 48 Printable
31H 49 Not printable

<Function 165> GS ( k pL pH cn fn n1 n2 (cn=49, fn=65)
Name Selects QR Code model

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn n1 n2
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn n1 n2
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn n1 n2
cn = 49, fn = 65
n1 = 49, 50
n2 = 0
Initial Value n1 = 50, n2 = 0
Function Selects QR Code model.
n1 Function
49 Selects the mode 1 conversion processing.
50 Selects the mode 2 conversion processing.
Name Sets the module size of QR Code

cn = 49, fn = 67
1 ≤ n ≤ 16
Initial Value n=3
Function Sets the size of the QR Code module 1 to n dot.

Name Selects the error correction level for QR Code

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m n
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m n
cn = 49, fn = 69
48 ≤ n ≤ 51
Initial Value n = 48
Function Selects the error correction level for QR Code.
n1 Function Reference: Approximate figure for recovery

48 Select error correction level 0 7%
49 Select error correction level 1 15 %
Name QR Code: Stores symbol data in the symbol storage area.

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m d1...dk
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m d1...dk
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m d1...dk
Defined Region 4 ≤ (pL + pH × 256) ≤ 7092 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 27)
cn = 49, fn = 80, m =48
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = (pL + pH × 256) - 3
Function Stores symbol data (d1...dk) in the QR Code symbol storage area.

Name Prints QR Code symbol data stored in the symbol saving region
cn = 49, fn = 81, m = 48
Function Executes encoding and printing the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region, by GS ( k Function 181
command.
Note The user must ensure the quiet zone.
Name Send size information of the symbol data of the QR Code symbol saving region
cn = 49, fn = 82, m = 48
Function Sends the size information of the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region by GS ( k Function 080.
Details The size information of the symbol is not printed with the processing of this function.
Size information indicates the size of the symbol printed by Function 181.
The quiet zone does not include size information.
Data of the size information is shown below.
Header 37H 55 1Byte
Identifier 36H 54 1Byte
Horizontal Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes
Vertical Size *1 30H to 39H 48 to 57 1 to 5 Bytes
Fixed Value 31H 49 1Byte
Other Information *2 30H/31H 48/49 1Byte
NUL 00H 0 1Byte
* 1 The horizontal and vertical sizes are shown as the number symbol dots.
The decimal value of the horizontal and vertical sizes are converted to character data
and sent in order from the MSB.
Ex.: When the horizontal size is 120 dots, “120” is converted to 3 bytes of data (Hex:31H,
32H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48).
* 2 “Other information” indicates whether it is possible to print symbol data stored in the sav-
ing region.
Hex Decimal Data length
30H 48 Printable
31H 49 Not printable

Name 2D GS1 DataBar: Set module siz

cn = 51
fn = 67
2≤n≤8
Initial Value n=2
Function The width of one module of the 2D GS1 DataBar is set to n dots.
Note The setting for this function affects the processing of function 381.
This setting is enabled until ESC@ is executed, the printer is reset, or the power is turned off.
The set unit is 1 dot.
The width is set as 0.125 mm (1/203 inches).
Reference GS ( k Function 381, ESC @
<Function 371> GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH (cn=51, fn=71)
Name 2D GS1 DataBar: Set The maximum width of the 2D GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked
Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn nL nH
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn nL nH
cn = 51
fn = 71
106 ≤ n ≤ 3952
Initial Value (nL + nH x 256) = 141 (nL = 141, nH = 0)
Function The maximum width of the 2D GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked is set to n dots.

<Function 380> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n d1...dk (cn=51, fn=80)
Name 2D GS1 DataBar: Store data in symbol saving region

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m n d1...dk
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m n d1...dk
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m n d1...dk
Defined Region 4≤(pL+pH×256)≤259 (0≤pL≤255, pH = 0, 1)
cn = 51
fn = 80
m = 48
n = 72, 73, 76
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k=(pL+pH×256) - 4
Function Symbol data (d1...dk) for the 2D GS1 DataBar is stored in the symbol saving region.
n Type of Symbol Data (k) ASCII Data (d)

72 GS1 Databar k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
Stacked
73 GS1 Databar k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
Stacked
Omnidirectional
76 GS1 Databar 2≤k≤255 0~9, A~Z, a~z 48 ≤ d ≤ 57,65 ≤ d ≤ 90,97 ≤ d ≤ 122,
Expanded SP, !, “, %, $, ‘, 32 ≤ d ≤ 34, 37 ≤ d ≤ 47, 58 ≤ d ≤ 63,
d = 95,123
Stacked (, ), *, +, ,, -, .,
[However d1 = 40, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57,
/, :, ;, <, =, >, ?, 48 ≤ d3 ≤ 57,48 ≤ d1 ≤ 57,48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57]
_, {
Note Data stored in the symbol saving region by this function is processed using function 381.
After processing functions 381 and 382, data in the saving region is maintained.
k bytes for d1...dk are processed as symbol data.
This setting is valid until this function is reset, ESC@ is executed, the printer is reset, or the power is off.

Name 2D GS1 DataBar: Print symbol data of symbol saving region

cn = 51
fn = 81
m = 48
Function Executes encoding and printing of the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region by GS ( k function 380.
Note The user must secure the quiet zone.
Function This command prints bar code data or deploys it to the image buffer.
This command is ignored when one of the following errors occurs:
- Error that occurs when the bar code is generated due to the combination of each barcode setting command.
- When the generated bar code data exceeds the printable size for the GS1 DataBar.
- When the print data exceeds the current set print area.
Make sure you check the printed bar code before actual use.
For standby mode:

- If unprinted data still exists in the line buffer, the buffered data is printed out, the command is executed, and
then the bar code is printed. Therefore, you cannot print mixed data (characters, bit images, bar codes) on
the same line.
For page mode:
- This command only deploys bar code data to the image buffer.

Name Compound symbol: Set module siz

cn = 52
fn = 67
2≤n≤8
Initial Value n=2
Function The width of one module for compound symbols is set to n dots.
<Function 471> GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH (cn=52, fn=71)
Name Compound symbol: Set The maximum width of the 2D GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked
Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn nL nH
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn nL nH
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn nL nH
cn = 52
fn = 71
106 ≤ n ≤ 3952
Initial Value (nL + nH x 256) = 141 (nL = 141, nH = 0)
Function The maximum width of the GS1DataBar Expanded Stacked in compound symbols is set to n dots.

Name Compound symbol: Store data in symbol saving region

cn = 52
fn = 72
0 ≤ n ≤ 2, 48 ≤ n ≤ 50
Initial Value n=0
Function Select the font for HRI characters when printing combined symbols.
n HRI font
0,48 not printed
1,49 printed (Select font A(12x24))
2,50 printed (Select font B(9x17))
When “Print” HRI is selected, HRI is printed under 1D bar codes.
When the combined symbol uses a 2D code (GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional,
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked), this setting is not affected and HRI is not printed.

<Function 480> GS ( k pL pH cn fn m a b d1...dk (cn=52, fn=80)

Code ASCII GS ( k pL pH cn fn m a b d1...dk
Hex. 1D 28 6B pL pH cn fn m a b d1...dk
Decimal 29 40 107 pL pH cn fn m a b d1...dk
Defined Region 7≤(pL+pH×256)≤2366 (0≤pL≤255, 0≤pH≤9)
cn = 52
fn = 80
m = 48
a = 48,49
65 ≤ b ≤ 77(a=48)
b = 65,66 (a=49)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k=(pL+pH×256) - 5
Function Symbol data (d1...dk) for the Compound symbol:is stored in the symbol saving region.
a = 48
b Bar Code Type Data (k) ASCII Defined region of d

65 EAN8 k = 7,8 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
66 EAN13 k = 12,13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
67 UPC-A k = 11,12 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
UPC-E (11-digit version
69 k = 11,12 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
(0 included))
70 GS1 DataBar k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
71 GS1 DataBar Truncated k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
72 GS1 DataBar Stacked k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
GS1 DataBar Stacked
73 k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
Omnidirectional
74 GS1 DataBar Limited k = 13 “0”to”9” 48 ≤ d ≤ 57 [However d1 = 48,49]
0~9, A~Z, a~z 8 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90, 97 ≤ d ≤ 122,
32 ≤ d ≤ 34, 37 ≤ d ≤ 47, 58 ≤ d ≤ 63,
SP, !, “, %, $,
d = 95,123
75 GS1 DataBar Expanded 2 ≤ k ≤ 255 ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -,
[However d1 = 40, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d3 ≤ 57 , 48 ≤
., /, :, ;, <, =, >, d1 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57]
?, _, {
0~9, A~Z, a~z 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90, 97 ≤ d ≤ 122,

32 ≤ d ≤ 34, 37 ≤ d ≤ 47, 58 ≤ d ≤ 63,
SP, !, “, %, $,
GS1 DataBar Expanded d = 95,123
76 2 ≤ k ≤ 255 ‘, (, ), *, +, ,, -,
Stacked [However d1 = 40, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d3 ≤ 57 , 48 ≤
., /, :, ;, <, =, >, d1 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57]
?, _, {
77 GS1-128 2 ≤ k ≤ 255 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127
a = 49
b Type of Symbol Data (k) Data (d)

65 CC-A, CC-B, CC-C 3 ≤ k ≤ 2361 32 ≤ d ≤ 127
Automatic distinction
by a digit number.
66 fixing to CC-C 3 ≤ k ≤ 2361 32 ≤ d ≤ 127

After processing functions 481, data in the saving region is maintained.
k bytes for d1...dk are processed as symbol data.


cn = 52
fn = 81
m = 48
Function Executes encoding and printing of the symbol data stored in the symbol saving region by GS ( k function 480.
The user must secure the quiet zone.
Function This command prints bar code data or deploys it to the image buffer.
This command is ignored when one of the following errors occurs:
- Error that occurs when the bar code is generated due to the combination of each barcode setting command.
- When the generated bar code data exceeds the printable size for the GS1 DataBar.
- When the print data exceeds the current set print area.
Make sure you check the printed bar code before actual use.
For standby mode:

- If unprinted data still exists in the line buffer, the buffered data is printed out, the command is executed, and
then the bar code is printed. Therefore, you cannot print mixed data (characters, bit images, bar codes) on
the same line.
For page mode:
- This command only deploys bar code data to the image buffer.

GS / m
Name Print download bit images

Code ASCII GS / m
Hex. 1D 2F m
Decimal 29 47 m
Function Prints defined download bit image data using mode m.
m Print Mode Density of Vertical Direction Dots Density of Horizontal Direction Dots
Details • This command is ignored if there is no download bit image data defined.
• Excluding upside-down printing, print modes (emphasized printing, overlap printing,
underlines, character sizes and black/white inverted printing) are unaffected.
• If there is download bit image data defined that exceeds the print region, that excess portion
is not printed.
• Regardless of the line feed amount set by ESC 2 (Initial line feed amount setting) and ESC 3
(Line feed amount setting), a paper feed is executed for the amount of dots (the height of the
download bit image n) when in normal mode and horizontal double wide mode, and for the
amount of dots (the height of the download bit image n x 2) when in double high mode and
double wide double high mode.
• See section 2.3.2 for details on the download bit image expansion position in page mode.
Reference GS *

GS:
Name Start/execute macro definition

Code ASCII GS :
Hex. 1D 3A
Decimal 29 58
Function Starts and stops macro definition.
Details • If this command is input during normal operation, the macro definition is started.
• If this command is input while defining a macro, the macro definition is stopped.
• If GS ^ (Execute macro definition) is input while defining a macro, the macro definition is
cancelled and the contents are cleared.
• The initial status of the macro is undefined.
• The contents of the definition are not cleared by ESC @ (Initialize printer).
• The macro enters an undefined status if GS: is input immediately after inputting GS:.
• The data count that can be defined in a macro is 2048 bytes. Data that exceeds 2048 bytes
is not defined.
STAR • Operators should be aware that if the raster graphic command (GS v) is inserted into the
data while defining a macro, the macro definition is immediately ended as being undefined
and the printer enters a raster graphics process.
Reference GS ^

GS B n
Name Specify/cancel white/black inverted printing

Code ASCII GS B n
Hex. 1D 42 n
Decimal 29 66 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels black and white inverted printing.
• Cancels black and white inverted printing when n = <*******0>B.
• Specifies black and white inverted printing when n = <*******1>B.
• Internal characters and download characters are targeted for black and white inverted
printing.
• The right space of set characters set by ESC SP (Set character right space amount) is also
targeted for black and white inverted printing.
• The following are not targeted for black and white inverted printing.
a. ESC* : Bit image
b. GS / : Download bit image
c. GS k : Bar code
d. GS H : HRI Characters
e. HT : Skipped portion by horizontal tab
f. ESC $ : Skipped portion by specification of vertical position
g. ESC \ : Skipped portion by specification of relative position
• This does not affect the line spacing.
• Black and white inverted printing has priority over underlines. Therefore, the inverted
characters are not underlined, even if underline is specified. However, the underline setting
status does not change.
• This command is effective for ANK and Chinese characters.

GS C 0 n m
Name Set counter print mode

Code ASCII GS C 0 n m
Hex. 1D 43 30 n m
Decimal 29 67 48 n m
0 ≤ m ≤ 2, 48 ≤ m ≤ 50
Initial Value n=0
m=0
Function Sets the serial number counter print mode.
m Printing Position Processing of Counter Value Less than Set Digit Count
0, 48 Align Right Applies a space to the left side
1, 49 Align Right Applies a 0 to the left side
2, 50 Align Left Applies a space to the right side
Details • n specifies the digits to print.

• When n = 0, the printer prints only the actual number of digits of the counter value.
• Sets the print digit count when n ≠ 0.
• m sets the serial number counter printing position in the set digit count.
• If the counter value is larger than the n set digit count, the printer prints n digits below the
counter value.
<n = 3, m = 0> <n = 3, m = 1> <n = 3, m = 2>
ΔΔ1 001 1ΔΔ
Δ=Space
Reference GS C 1, GS C 2, GSC ;, GS c

GS C 1 aL aH bL bH n r
Name Set Counter Mode (A)

Code ASCII GS C 1 aL aH bL bH n r
Hex. 1D 43 31 aL aH bL bH n r
Decimal 29 67 49 aL aH bL bH n r
Defined Region 0 ≤ aL ≤ 255
0 ≤ aH ≤ 255
0 ≤ bL ≤ 255
0 ≤ bH ≤ 255
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ r ≤ 255
Initial Value aL = 1, aH = 0
bL = 255, bH = 255
n=0
r=1
Function Sets the counter mode for the serial counter.
Details • aL, aH and bL, bH specify the counter range.
• n specifies the number of steps to count up or down.
• r specifies the number of times to repeat printing with the counter value fixed.
• If {(aL + aH x 256) < (bL + bH x 256) and n ≠ 0 and r ≠ 0} this command sets the count up
mode.
• If {(aL + aH x 256) > (bL + bH x 256) and n ≠ 0 and r ≠ 0} this command sets the count down
mode.
• If {(aL + aH x 256) = (bL + bH x 256) and n = 0 and r = 0} this command stops counting.
• When the count up mode is set, (aL + aH x 256) is the counter minimum value and (bL + bH
x 256) is the counter maximum value.
Also, if the counter exceeds the maximum value, it starts counting up again from the
minimum value.
• When the count down mode is set, (aL + aH x 256) is the counter maximum value and (bL +
bH x 256) is the counter minimum value.
Also, if the counter is smaller than the minimum value, it starts counting down again from the
maximum value.
• Executing this command clears the internal counter that shows the number of times printing
was repeated.
Reference GS C 0, GS C 2, GS C ; , GS c

GS C 2 nL nH
Name Set counter mode value

Code ASCII GS C 2 nL nH
Hex. 1D 43 32 nL nH
Decimal 29 67 50 nL nH
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Initial Value nL = 1, nH = 0
Function Sets the serial number counter value.
Details • nL and nH set the counter value.
• In the count up mode, if the counter value specified by this command goes out of the counter
operating range, specified by GSC1 or GSC;, it is forced to convert to the minimum value by
the next GSc.
• In the count down mode, if the counter value specified by this command goes out of the
counter operating range, specified by GSC1 or GSC;, it is forced to convert to the maximum
value by the next GSc.
Reference GS C 0, GS C 1, GS C ; , GS c

GS C ; sa; sb; sn; sr; sc;
Name Set Counter Mode (B)

Code ASCII GS C ; sa ; sb ; sn ; sr ; sc ;
Hex. 1D 43 3B sa 3B sb 3B sn 3B sr 3B sc 3B
Decimal 29 67 59 sa 59 sb 59 sn 59 sr 59 sc 59
Defined Region “0” ≤ sa ≤ ”65535”
“0” ≤ sb ≤ ”65535”
“0” ≤ sn ≤ ”255”
“0” ≤ sr ≤ ”255”
“0” ≤ sc ≤ ”65535”
Initial Value sa = “1”
sb = “65535”
sn = “0”
sr = “1”
sc = “1”
Function Sets the serial number counter counting mode and counter value.
Details • sa, sb, sn, sr and sc are all ASCII character strings represent setting values using decimals.
They are composed of character strings of 0 to 9.
• sa, and sb specify the counter range.
• sn specifies the number of steps to count up or down.
• sr specifies the number of times to repeat printing with the counter value fixed.
• sc specifies the counter value.
• If {sa < sb and sn ≠ 0 and sr ≠ 0} this command sets the count up mode.
• If {sa > sb and sn ≠ 0 and sr ≠ 0} this command sets the counter down mode.
• If {sa = sb or n = 0 and sr = 0} this command stops counting.
• When the count up mode is set, sa is the counter minimum value and sb is the counter
maximum value.
Also, if the counter exceeds the maximum value, it starts counting again from the minimum
value.
• When the count down mode is set, sa is the counter maximum value and sb is the counter
minimum value.
Also, if the counter is smaller than the minimum value, it starts counting down again from the
maximum value.
• Each argument from sa to sc can be omitted. The setting just prior is maintained without
change to the setting value that corresponds to the omitted argument.
• Executing this command clears the internal counter that shows the number of times printing
was repeated.
• If an argument outside of the definition region is input, the command is stopped and
processing is handled normally from subsequent data.
Reference GS C 0, GS C 1, GS C 2, GS c

GS E n
Name Set printing speed

Code ASCII GS E n
Hex. 1D 45 n
Decimal 29 69 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Sets print speed.
7 Undefined -- --
6 Undefined -- --
5 Print Speed (See table below)
4
3 Undefined -- --
2 Undefined -- --
1 Undefined -- --
0 Undefined -- --
Print Speed
Bit-5 Bit-4 Print Speed
0 0 High speed
0 1 Mid-speed
1 0 Slow speed
1 1 Undefined
Details • This command is effective in standard mode.

• This command is enabled only when at the top of the line.
• The speed setting is disabled during reduced printing in the vertical direction. However, this
command setting is enabled when reduced printing in the vertical direction is released.
STAR • This command changes the print speed after the test print is stopped.

GS H n
Name Select HRI character print position

Code ASCII GS H n
Hex. 1D 48 n
Decimal 29 72 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the printing position of HRI characters when printing bar codes.
n Printing Position
0, 48 No print
1, 49 Above bar code
2, 50 Below bar code
Above and below bar code
3, 51
(both)
Details • HRI is an acronym for Human Readable Interpretation.

• HRI characters are printed with fonts selected by GS f (Select HRI character font).
Reference GS f, GS k

GS I n
Name Transmission of Printer ID

Code ASCII GS I n
Hex. 1D 49 n
Decimal 29 73 n
Defined Region Spec. A 1 ≤ n ≤ 3, 49 ≤ n ≤ 51, 65 ≤ n ≤ 69
Spec. B 1 ≤ n ≤ 4, 49 ≤ n ≤ 51, 65 ≤ n ≤ 69, 111 ≤ n ≤ 113
Function Sends the specified printer ID.
Spec. A
n Printer ID Type Specifications
TM-T88II = 0 x 20
1, 49 Model ID
BA-T500 = 0 x 27
2, 50 Type ID (See table below; Type ID)
3, 51 ROM Version ID Depends on the ROM version
Spec. B
n Printer ID Type Specifications
1, 49 Model ID See the models below.
2, 50 Type ID (See <Type ID> in the table below.)
3, 51 ROM version ID Depends on the ROM version
65 Firmware Version Depends on the Firmware Version
66 Manufacturers Name STAR
67 Model Name See the models below.
68 Serial Number “0000000000000000”
69 Double bytes Character Japanese Kanji : KANJI JAPANESE
Type Chinese Character : CHINA GB2312 or CHINA GB18030
Taiwan Chinese Character : TAIWAN BIG-5
<Type ID>
7 Fixed at “0”
6 Undefined --- ---
5 Undefined --- ---
4 Fixed at “0”
3 MICR Reader None Yes
2 Direct connection to customer display None Yes
1 Auto-cutter None Yes
0 2 Byte Code Handling None Yes

Details • If using DTR/DSR control when using a serial interface, the printer sends its ID after it has
verified that the host has entered a data ready state (the DSR signal is a space). If the host
is not able to receive data (DSR signal is a mark), the printer will wait until it is ready.
The using XON/XOFF control, the printer transmits its ID without verifying whether the host
can receive data.
• Because this command is executed while expanding the print buffer, there may be a delay
between the reception of the command and printer ID transmission, depending on the
reception buffer status.
• (1 ≤ n ≤ 3, 49 ≤ n ≤ 51) sends 1 byte of the printer ID.
• When ASB is enabled, the printer ID transmitted by this command and the ASB status must
be differentiated. See Appendix-2 for details on how to identify.
• (65 ≤ n ≤ 69) sends the following printer information.
Header: Hex. = 5FH/Decimal = 95 (1 byte)
Data: Printer Information
NUL: Hex. = 00H/Decimal = 0 (1 byte)
• The following processes occur when preparations for transmitting data have been completed.

1. Executes a READY to BUSY process If the printer is already in a BUSY state, the printer
does nothing.
2. Executes the [Header + Data + NUL] transmission
3. Executes a BUSY to READY process If the printer is already in a BUSY state for some other
reason, it does nothing.
STAR Spec. A: STAR printers ignore this command if 65 ≤ n ≤ 69 is specified.
Reference See Appendix -2 for details.

GS L nL nH
Name Set left margin

Code ASCII GS L nL nH
Hex. 1D 4C nL nH
Decimal 29 76 nL nH
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Initial Value nL = 0,nH = 0
Function • nL and nH set the specified left margin.
• The left margin is [(nL + nH x 256) x basic calculated pitch]
Printable Region
Left Margin Print Region Width

Details • This command is effective only when input at the top of the line when standard mode is being
used.
• This command has no affect in page mode. This command is only effective for the setting.
• The maximum setting for the left margin is the same size as the printable region for the
horizontal direction.
Specifications that exceed the maximum value are rounded off to that value.
left margin, it is not affected even if the basic calculated pitch is changed.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction of GS P (Set basic calculated
pitch) to calculate the left margin.
If the calculation results in fractions, the pitch is corrected to a minimal mechanical pitch and
Reference GS P, GS W Appendix -4

GS P x y
Name Set basic calculation pitch

Code ASCII GS P x y
Hex. 1D 50 x y
Decimal 29 80 x y
Defined Region 0 ≤ x ≤ 255
0 ≤ y ≤ 255
Initial Value x = 180, y = 360
Function Sets the horizontal direction basic calculation pitch to approximately 25.4 [(1/x) inch] and the
vertical direction basic calculation pitch to approximately 25.4 [(1/x) inch].
• When x = 0, the horizontal direction basic calculation pitch is returned to its initial value.
• When y = 0, the vertical direction basic calculation pitch is returned to its initial value.
Details The horizontal direction indicates a direction perpendicular to the paper feed; and the vertical
direction indicates the paper feed direction.
• In standard mode, use the parameter that indicates the following regardless of the
character direction (upside down, 90˚ rotation, etc.).
a. Commands that use x: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC \, FS S, GS L, GS W
b. Commands that use y: ESC 3, ESC J, GS V
• In page mode, use the parameter that indicates the following according to character
direction.
a. When starting point is upper left or lower right by ESC T (Selection of character print
direction in page mode):
Commands that use x: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC W, ESC \, FS S
Commands that use y: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, GS $, GS \, GS V
b. When starting point is upper right or lower left by ESC T (Selection of character print
direction in page mode):
Commands that use x: ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, GS $, GS \
Commands that use y: ESC SP, ESC $, ESC W, ESC \, FS S, GS V
• Each set value is unaffected even if this command is executed.
• If there is a fraction in the result of the calculation when combined with another command, it
is corrected with the minimum mechanical pitch, and the remainder is discarded.
STAR To improve the difference in distance calculations that are generated by the difference in print
density (Star = 203 DPI/Epson = 180 DPI) with the installed print head, Star printers have a
“basic calculation pitch correction” . By setting this to 203 DPI, it corrects the value calculated
using the basic calculation pitch such as ESC $ (Move to absolute position), and GS L (Left
margin) to enable the same distance of movement as an Epson printer.
However, data such as fonts and bit images cannot be corrected with basic calculation pitch
correction.
• Basic calculation pitch correction: 203DPI or 180DPI
• Basic calculation pitch correction when left margin is specified
• Basic calculation pitch: XY
• Left margin specification value: nL nH

(1) When basic calculation pitch correction has selected 203 DPI
Left margin = (nL + nH x 256) x 2032/X/10 (Decimals are discarded.)
(2) When basic calculation pitch correction has selected 180 DPI
Left margin = (nL + nH x 256) x 180/X (Decimals are discarded.)
Reference ESC SP, ESC $, ESC 3, ESC J, ESC W, ESC \, GS $, GS L GS V, GS W, GS \

GS T n
Name Move to top of line

Code ASCII GS T n
Hex. 1D 54 n
Decimal 29 84 n
Defined Region n = 0,1,48,49
Function Moves print position to top of line.
• This command is effective only in standard mode. It is ignored in page mode.
n Function
0, 48 After erasing data in the printer buffer, it moves the print position.
1, 49 After printing data in the printer buffer, it moves the print position.

GS V m
Name Cut paper

Code ASCII GS V m
Hex. 1D 56 m
Decimal 29 86 m
Defined Region m = 0,1,48,49
Function Executes specified paper cut.
m Function
0, 48 Full cut
1, 49 Partial cut (one point uncut)
2, 50 Not Used
3, 51 Not Used
65 Feeds paper to (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) and performs a full cut
Feeds paper to (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) and performs a partial cut (one point
66
uncut)
67 Not Used
68 Not Used
being used.
• Cuts paper.

STAR • The auto-cut function differs according to the model. A partial cut is executed on those
models that cannot perform a full cut.
A full cut is executed on those models that cannot perform a partial cut. Refer to the product
specifications manual for the specifications of the auto-cut function.
• Models that do not have the auto-cut function do not cut paper. However, commands that
accompany a paper feed of (cutting position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) (n = 65, 66), a
paper feed of (tear bar position + [n x basic calculated pitch]) is executed.
Reference ESC i, ESC m

GS V m n
Name Cut paper

Code ASCII GS V m n
Hex. 1D 56 m n
Decimal 29 86 m n
Defined Region m = 65, 66, 0 ≤ n ≤ 255
Function Executes specified paper cut.
m Function
0, 48 Full cut
1, 49 Partial cut (one point uncut)
2, 50 Not Used
3, 51 Not Used
66
uncut)
67 Not Used
68 Not Used
being used.
• Feeds paper to the cutting position when n = 0, then cuts the paper.
• Feeds paper [n x basic calculated pitch] beyond the cutting position when n ≠ 0, then cuts the
paper.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (y) relating to the vertical direction for the paper feed amount.

GS W nL nH
Name Set print region width

Code ASCII GS W nL nH
Hex. 1D 57 nL nH
Decimal 29 87 nL nH
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Initial Value See the Appendix -4
Function • Sets the print region width specified by nL and nH.
• Print region width is [(nL + nH x 256) x basic calculated pitch].
Printable Region
Left Margin Print Region Width
being used.
• This command has no affect on page mode when in page mode. Only the setting is effective
for this command.
• When a value that exceeds the printable region of one line, the entire region, excluding the
left margin, is set as the print region width.
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (Set basic calculated pitch). Also, the set printing
region width is not changed even if the basic calculated pitch is changed after setting the
print region width.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction of GS P (Set basic calculated
pitch) to calculate the print region width.
• If the print region width is smaller than the width of the first character expanded at the top of
the line (including the right space), the following are processed only on that line.
1. The print region is expanded to the right for the size of that character within the range that
does not exceed the printable region.
2. If there is not enough space even if 1. is executed, the print region is expanded to the left
side.
3. If there is not enough space even if 2. is executed, the right space deleted.
Reference GS L, GS P, Appendix -4

GS \ nL nH
Name Specify relative position for character vertical direction in page mode
Code ASCII GS \ nL nH
Hex. 1D 5C nL nH
Decimal 29 92 nL nH
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Function • Specifies the character vertical direction position for the data expansion starting position
using the relative position based on the current point in page mode. This sets the position
moved from the current position to [(nL + nH x 256) x basic calculated pitch] for the next data
expanding starting position.
Details • When not in page mode, this command is ignored.
• If the direction below the current position is specified for the characters, specify a positive
number; if the direction above is specified, a negative number is used.
• Negative numbers are represented by the complement of 65536. For example, when moving
in the upward direction N pitches, use:
nL + nH × 256 = 65536-N
• Specifications for relative positions that exceed the specified print region are ignored.
• The following operations occur depending on ESC T (Selecting the character printing
direction in page mode).
a. If the starting point is upper left or lower right, specify the relative position for the paper
feed direction.
Use the basic calculated pitch (y) for the horizontal direction at this time.
b. If the starting point is upper right or lower left, specify the relative position for the paper
feed in the vertical direction. Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction at
this time.
Reference ESC $, ESC T, ESC W, ESC \, GS $, GS P

GS ^ r t m
Name Execute macro

Code ASCII GS ^ r t m
Hex. 1D 5E r t m
Decimal 29 94 r t m
Defined Region 0 ≤ r ≤ 255
0 ≤ t ≤ 255
0≤m≤1
Function • Executes a defined macro.
r specifies the number of times to execute the macro.
t specifies the time to wait when executing the macro.
m specifies the macro execution mode.
m = 0: Executes the macro continuously the r number of times while interposing time gaps
specified by t.
m = 1: After an amount of time specified by t, the POWER LED flashes and waits for the
paper feed switch to be pressed.
The macro is executed once when the paper feed switch is pressed.
This operation is repeated the number of times specified by r.
Details • After executing a macro once, the printer waits approximately (t x 100 m) sec according to
that specified by t.
and the contents of the definition are cleared.
• When a macro is undefined, and r = 0, this command is ignored.
• When m = 1, paper is not fed using the paper feed switch while the macro is being executed.
STAR • If a raster graphic command (GS v) is received while executing a macro on a printer
equipped with a parallel interface, the user should be aware that the printer will enter a BUSY
state.
Reference GS :

GS b n
Name Specify/cancel smoothing

Code ASCII GS b n
Hex. 1D 62 n
Decimal 29 98 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels smoothing.
• Cancels smoothing when n = <*******0>B.
• Specifies smoothing when n = <*******1>B.
• Targets for smoothing are: embedded characters, download characters and external
characters
• Even if smoothing is specified, it will not be performed if the character is set for magnification
in either the vertical or horizontal directions.
Reference ESC !, GS !

GS c
Name Print counter

Code ASCII GS c
Hex. 1D 63
Decimal 29 99
Function After expanding the current serial counter value as print data (a character string) to the print
buffer, the printer counts up or counts down according to the count mode.
Details • The counter value expanded to the print buffer the printer prints by either the print instruction
or by a print buffer full.
• The counter print mode is set by GS C 0.
• The counter mode is set by GS C 1, or GS C ;.
• In the count up mode, if the counter value specified by this command goes out of the counter
operating range, specified by GSC1 or GSC;, it is forced to convert to the minimum value by
the execution of this command.
• In the count down mode, if the counter value specified by this command goes out of the
counter operating range, specified by GSC1 or GSC;, it is forced to convert to the maximum
value by the execution of this command.
Reference GS C 0, GS C 1, GS 2, GS C ;

GS f n
Name Select HRI character font

Code ASCII GS f n
Hex. 1D 66 n
Decimal 29 102 n
Defined Region n = 0,1,48,49
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the printing position of HRI character font when printing bar codes.
n Font
0, 48 Selects Font A (12 x 24).
1, 49 Selects Font B (9 x 17).
Details • HRI is an acronym for Human Readable Interpretation.

• HRI characters are printed in a position specified GS H (Select HRI character print position).
STAR The following are the HRI character font configurations on STAR printers.
Font A 12 x 24 Dots
Font B 9 x 24 Dots
Reference GS H, GS k

GS h n
Name Set bar code height

Code ASCII GS h n
Hex. 1D 68 n
Decimal 29 104 n
Initial Value n = 162
Function Sets bar code height to n dots.
Reference GS k

1. GS k m d1 … dk NUL,
2.3. GS k m n d1 … dk
Name Print bar code

Code 1. ASCII GS k m d1...dk NUL
Hex. 1D 6B m d1...dk NUL
Decimal 29 107 m d1...dk NUL
2.3. ASCII GS k m n d1...dk
Hex. 1D 6B m n d1...dk
Decimal 29 107 m n d1...dk
Defined Region 1. 0 ≤ m ≤ 6 The definition region of k and d differ according to the bar code type.
2. 65 ≤ m ≤ 73 The definition region of n and d differ according to the bar code type.
3. 65 ≤ m ≤ 78 The definition region of n and d differ according to the bar code type.
Function Selects bar code type and prints bar codes.

For 1:
m Bar Code Type Defined region of k Defined region of d
0 UPC-A 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
1 UPC-E 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
2 JAN13 (EAN13) 12 ≤ k ≤ 13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
3 JAN8 (EAN8) 7≤k≤8 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
4 CODE39 1≤k 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90, 32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47
2 ≤ k (However, this is an
5 ITF 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
even number.)
6 CODABAR 1≤k 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 68, 36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58
For 2:
m Bar Code Type Defined region of n Defined region of d
65 UPC-A 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
66 UPC-E 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
67 JAN13(EAN13) 12 ≤ n ≤ 13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
68 JAN8(EAN8) 7≤n≤8 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
69 CODE39 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90,32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47
70 ITF 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 (Even number) 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
71 CODABAR 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 68,36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58
72 CODE93 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127
73 CODE128 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127

For 3:
m Bar Code Type Defined region of n Defined region of d
65 UPC-A 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
66 UPC-E 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
67 JAN13(EAN13) 12 ≤ n ≤ 13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
68 JAN8(EAN8) 7≤n≤8 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90,32, 36, 37, 43, 45, 46, 47
69 CODE39 1 ≤ n ≤ 255
70 ITF 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 (Even number) 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
48 ≤ d ≤ 57, 65 ≤ d ≤ 68,36, 43, 45, 46, 47, 58,
71 CODABAR 1 ≤ n ≤ 255
42(d1,dk)
72 CODE93 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127
73 CODE128 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127
74 GS1-128 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 0 ≤ d ≤ 127
GS1 DataBar
75 n=13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar
76 n=13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57
Truncated
GS1 DataBar
77 n=13 48 ≤ d ≤ 57[However, 48 ≤ d1 ≤ 49]
Limited
32 ≤ d ≤ 34, 37 ≤ d ≤ 63, 65 ≤ d ≤ 90, d = 95,
97 ≤ d ≤ 122, d = 123
GS1 DataBar
78 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 [However, d1 = 40, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d3 ≤ 57,
Expanded
or 48 ≤ d1 ≤ 57, 48 ≤ d2 ≤ 57]
Details For 1:
• This command is quit by the NULL code.
• For UPC-A and UPC-E, a bar code is printed when 12 bytes of bar code data are input.
Subsequent data is processed as normal data.
• For JAN13 (EAN13), a bar code is printed when 13 bytes of bar code data are input.
• For JAN8 (EAN8), a bar code is printed when 8 bytes of bar code data are input.

•The data count for ITF bar codes is always even numbered. If the data count is odd
numbered, the last data is ignored.


For 2:
• n specifies the data count. n bytes from the next data is processed as bar code data.
• If n is outside of the defined region, the command is stopped and normal printing commences
from subsequent data.
• ITF bar code data count must always be odd. The last data will be ignored for even
numbered data.
When in standard mode:

• If d is outside of the defined region, only a paper feed is executed and normal printing
commences from subsequent data.
• If the horizontal width of the bar code exceeds the print region of one line, the paper is fed
without printing the bar code.
• Executes a paper feed for the height of the bar code (including HRI characters when
HRI character printing is specified) regardless of the line feed amount using the following
commands.
a. ESC 2: S
et default line spacing
b. ESC 3: S
et line feed amount
• This command is effective only when no data exists in the print buffer. If there is data in the
print buffer, data after m is printed as normal data.
• Sets the next print position to the beginning of the next line after printing the bar code.
• Print mode (enhanced printing, duplex printing, underlines, character size, 90˚ rotation) is
unaffected, except upside-down printing.
When in page mode:

• Executes only a bar code expansion but does not print it. After expanding the bar code,
the next dot after the last data of the bar code is the starting position for the expansion of
subsequent data.
• If d is outside of the defined region, the command is stopped and normal printing commences
from subsequent data. The position for starting data expansion does not move.
• If the horizontal width of the bar code exceeds the print region of one line, the data expansion
starting position is moved to the left side outside the printing region without printing the bar
code.

For 3:
• n specifies the data count. n bytes from the next data is processed as bar code data.
• When n exceeds the region, n bytes are received and discarded.
• ITF bar code data count must always be odd. The last data will be ignored for even
numbered data.

When in standard mode:
• When d exceeds the region, only paper feed is executed, and data is received for the
counter and discarded.
• If the horizontal width of the bar code exceeds the print region of one line, the paper is fed
without printing the bar code.

• Executes a paper feed for the height of the bar code (including HRI characters when
HRI character printing is specified) regardless of the line feed amount using the following
commands.
a. ESC 2: S
et default line spacing
b. ESC 3: S
et line feed amount
• This is valid only when there is no data in the print buffer. When there is data in the print
buffer, it is received by the counter and then discarded.
• Sets the next print position to the beginning of the next line after printing the bar code.
• Print mode (enhanced printing, duplex printing, underlines, character size, 90˚ rotation) is
unaffected, except upside-down printing.
When in page mode:

• Only the bar code is deployed. Printing is not executed. After deploying the bar code, the
next dot of the final bar code data becomes the start position for the next data deployment.
• When d exceeds the region, command processing is stopped, and data is received for the
counter and discarded.
The data deployment start position is not moved at this point.
• When the width of the bar code exceeds the print area for one line, the data deployment start
position for bar code printing is moved to the left beyond the print area and printing is not
executed.
<When using CODE 93 bar code (m = 72)>

• Prints an HRI character (□) of the start characters at the top of the HRI character string.
• Prints an HRI character (□) of the end characters at the top of the HRI character string.
• Prints HRI characters of the control characters (00H to 1FH and 7FH) combining (■) and one
letter of the alphabet.
Control Characters Control Characters
HRI Characters HRI Characters
ASCII Hex. Decimal ASCII Hex. Decimal
NUL 00 0 ■U DLE 10 16 ■P
SOH 01 1 ■A DC1 11 17 ■Q
STX 02 2 ■B DC2 12 18 ■R
ETX 03 3 ■C DC3 13 19 ■S
EOT 04 4 ■D DC4 14 20 ■T
ENQ 05 5 ■E NAK 15 21 ■U
ACK 06 6 ■F SYN 16 22 ■V
BEL 07 7 ■G ETB 17 23 ■W
BS 08 8 ■H CAN 18 24 ■X
HT 09 9 ■I EM 19 25 ■Y
LF 0A 10 ■J SUB 1A 26 ■Z
VT 0B 11 ■K ESC 1B 27 ■A
FF 0C 12 ■L FS 1C 28 ■B
CR 0D 13 ■M GS 1D 29 ■C
SO 0E 14 ■N RS 1E 30 ■D
SI 0F 15 ■O US 1F 31 ■E
DEL 7F 127 ■T

<When using CODE 128 bar code (m = 73)>

• See Appendix-6 for details on CODE 128 bar codes and code tables.
• To print CODE 128 bar codes on this printer, be careful of the following points to send the bar
code data.
a. At the top of the bar code string, always set the code set selection characters (either of the
CODE A, CODE B, or CODE C) to select the initial code set.
b. Specify special characters using the two characters of ‘{‘ and one subsequent character.
Also, the ‘{‘ of the ASCII characters are specified by sending ‘{‘ for two characters
consecutively.
Special Transmission Data

Characters ASCII Hex. Decimal
SHIFT {S 7B, 53 123, 83
CODE A {A 7B, 41 123, 65
CODE B {B 7B, 42 123, 66
CODE C {C 7B, 43 123, 67
FNC1 {1 7B, 31 123, 49
FNC2 {2 7B, 32 123, 50
FNC3 {3 7B, 33 123, 51
FNC4 {4 7B, 34 123, 52
’{‘ {{ 7B, 7B 123, 123
• If the top of the bar code data string is not a code set selection character, the command is
stopped and processing is handled normally from subsequent data.
• If the combination of ‘{‘ and 1 character immediately after does not conform to either of
the special characters, the command is stopped and processing is handled normally from
subsequent data.
• If a character that cannot be used with the selected code set is received, the command is
stopped and processing is handled normally from subsequent data.

• HRI characters that correspond to shift characters and code set selection characters are not
printed.
• HRI characters of function characters are printed with a space.
• HRI characters of the control characters (00H to 1FH and 7FH) are printed with a space.
STAR • If printing bar codes that require check digits on STAR printers, even if the check digit is sent
as a bar code, the check digit that was calculated on the printer is printed.
Reference GS H, GS f, GS h, GS w, Appendix-6

<When using GS1-128 bar code (m = 74)>

• Be sure to note the following points when sending bar code data for GS1-128 bar code
printing.
The following four special characters operate as shown below.
Special
Characters Hex. Decimal
The first SP after d1 is the data division identifier for identifying (AI).
SP 20 32
The SP is reflected by the HRI but is not included in the encoding data.
“(“ is reflected by the HRI. This is useful when using “(“,”)” to highlight the AI.
( 28 40
It is not included in encoding data.
The first “)“ after d1 is the data division identifier for identifying (AI).
) 29 41
The “)“ is reflected by the HRI but is not included in the encoding data.
The check digit calculated by modulus 10 is inserted automatically at the
* 2A 42 position specified in “*”.
The check digit is reflected in the HRI instead of the “*”.
Also the following characters are expressed as 2 bytes.

Special Send data
FNC1 {1 7B, 31 123, 49
FNC3 {3 7B, 33 123, 51
( {( 7B, 28 123, 40
) {} 7B, 29 123, 41
* {* 7B, 2A 123, 42
{ {{ 7B, 7B 123, 123
A space character is used as the HRI character for FNC1 and FNC3 function characters.
A space character is used as the HRI control characters (00H to 1FH and 7FH).

<When using GS1 Databar Expanded (m = 78)>

• Be sure to note the following points when sending bar code data for GS1 Databar Expanded
printing.
The following special characters operate as shown below.
Special
( 28 40
) 29 41
Also the following characters are expressed as 2 bytes.

Special Send data
FNC1 {1 7B, 31 123, 49
( {( 7B, 28 123, 40
) {} 7B, 29 123, 41
If the double-digit lead for the bar code data line is not a number, or is not “(“ and a number, command
processing is stopped at this point and the next data is processed as standard data.
If the combination of ‘{‘ and the character directly behind does not correspond to, command processing is
stopped at this point and the next data is processed as standard data.
Although “*” can be used, it is not reflected in the HRI or the encoding data.
STAR • If printing bar codes that require check digits on STAR printers, even if the check digit is sent
as a bar code, the check digit that was calculated on the printer is printed.
Reference GS H, GS f, GS h, GS w, Appendix-6

GS r n
Name Transmission of status

Code ASCII GS r n
Hex. 1D 72 n
Decimal 29 114 n
Function Sends the specified status.
• n = 1, 49: Sends paper detector status
• n = 2, 50: S
ends the drawer kick connector status.
Details • When using a serial interface:
• When in DTR/DSR control: Sends the status after checking that the host can received data.
If the host is not able to receive data, it waits until reception is possible.
• When in XON/XOFF control: The printer transmits statuses without confirming whether the
host computer can receive data.
• Because this command is executed while expanding the reception buffer, there may be a
delay between the reception of the command and the status transmission, depending on the
reception buffer status.
• When ASB is enabled , the status transmitted by this command and the ASB status must be
differentiated. See Appendix-2 for details on how to identify.
Detector Status (n = 1, 49)
Bit Status “0” “1”
7 Fixed at “0”
6 Undefined --- ---
5 Undefined --- ---
4 Fixed at “0”
3 Paper roll end detector Has Paper Paper out
2 Paper roll end detector Has Paper Paper out
1 Paper roll near end detector Has Paper Paper out
0 Paper roll near end detector Has Paper Paper out

Bit-2,3: If the end detector shows there is no paper, the printer will always go offline, so this
command is not executed. Therefore, the status of bit - 2 = 1 or bit – 3 = 1 is not sent.
Drawer Kick Connector Status (n = 2, 50)
Bit Status “0” “1”
7 Fixed at “0”
6 Undefined --- ---
5 Undefined --- ---
4 Fixed at “0”
3 Undefined --- ---
2 Undefined --- ---
1 Undefined --- ---
0 Drawer kick connector pin #3 “L” “H”

GS v 0 m xL xH yL yH d1 … dk
Name Print raster bit images

Code ASCII GS v 0 m xL xH yL yH d1...dk
Hex. 1D 76 30 m xL xH yL yH d1...dk
Decimal 29 118 48 m xL xH yL yH d1...dk
0 ≤ xL ≤ 128, xH=0 (0 ≤ xL +xH×256) ≤ 128)
0 ≤ yL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ yH ≤ 15 (0 ≤ yL +yH×256 ≤ 4095)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
k = (xL+xH×256) × (yL+yH×256) However, k ≠ 0
Function Prints raster method bit images using mode m.

m Mode Density of Vert. Dir. Dots Density of Hor. Dir. Dots
• xL and xH specify the horizontal direction data count for one bit image (xL + xH x 256) in bytes.
• yL and yH specify the vertical direction data count for one bit image (yL + yH x 256) in dots.
Details • This command is effective only when there is no print data in the print buffer when standard
mode is selected.
• Print modes (character size, enhanced characters, duplicated characters, upside down,
unline, black/white inverted, etc.) do not affect raster bit images.
• Data not in the print region is discarded in dot increments.
• It is possible to specify any position to start printing raster bit images according to HT
(Horizontal tab), ESC $ (Specify absolute position), ESC \ (Specify relative position) and GS
L (Specify let margin). However, if the print starting position is no a multiple of 8, printing
speed will decrease.
• ESC a (Position alignment) settings are effective also for raster bit images.
• When executing this command while defining a macro, the macro definition is terminated and
the command commences with processing.
The macro during this time is undefined.
• d specifies defined data.
• Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that correspond to the dots that
are not printed are 0.
STAR • On STAR printers, the ACK pulse width when using a parallel interface is fixed at 1 μsec.
• When in page mode, transmission of this command is prohibited. If sent, the results of the
print are not guaranteed.
• Dot density (when the STAR printer head = 203 DPI) on STAR printers.

m Mode Density of Vert. Dir. Dots Density of Hor. Dir. Dots
[Ex.:] When xL + xH × 256 = 64
(xL+xHx256) x 8dot = 512 dot

1 2 3 •••••••• 63 64
65 66 67 127 128
(yL + yH x 256) dot
k-1 k
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MSB LSB

GS w n
Name Set bar code horizontal size

Code ASCII GS w n
Hex. 1D 77 n
Decimal 29 119 n
Initial Value n=3
Function Sets the bar code horizontal size.
Binary Level Bar Code
Multi-level Bar Code
n Fine Element Width Thick Element Width
Module Width [mm]
[mm] [mm]
1 0.141 0.141 0.423
2 0.282 0.282 0.706
3 0.423 0.423 1.129
4 0.564 0.564 1.411
5 0.706 0.706 1.834
6 0.847 0.847 2.258
Details • Multi-level bar codes specify the follow bar code types.
UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13 (EAN13), JAN8 (EAN8), CODE 93, CODE 128
• Binary level bar codes specify the follow bar code types.
CODE39, ITF, CODABAR
STAR • The bar codes that are printed do not conform to each standard, so you should confirm
before actual use.
Particularly, if n = 1 is specified, the bar code is not guaranteed.
• The following are the module widths on STAR printers.
Binary Level Bar Code
Multi-level Bar Code
n Fine Element Width Thick Element Width
Module Width [mm]
[mm] [mm]
1 0125 0.125 0.375
2 0.25 0.25 0.625
3 0.375 0.375 1.125
4 0.5 0.5 1.375
5 0.625 0.625 1.75
6 0.75 0.75 2.25
Reference GS k

4-3-2 Chinese Character Control Commands
Chinese character control commands are ignored by models shipped to single-byte countries. All Chinese char-
acter control commands are ignored if the specification for the location of use is specified as SBCS (single byte
countries) by the memory switch.
FS ! n
Name Batch specify Chinese character print mode

Code ASCII FS ! n
Hex. 1C 21 n
Decimal 28 33 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Batch specifies the Chinese character print mode
7 Underline OFF ON
6 Undefined --- ---
5 Undefined --- ---
4 Undefined --- ---
3 Double tall expanded OFF ON
2 Expanded wide OFF ON
1 Undefined --- ---
0 Undefined --- ---
Details • Quadruple-size characters are printed by specifying both double-tall and double-wide modes.
• An underline is applied to Chinese characters for the entire character width, including the FS
S (left and right character space amount).
However, underlines are not applied to portions that have been skipped using HT (horizontal
tab) or rotated 90 degrees.
• The width of the Chinese character underline is set by FS - (specify Chinese character
underline) regardless of the character size.
• Chinese character size can be specified by FS W and GS !, but the last executed command
is effective.
• Chinese character underline is specified and cancelled by FS -, but the last executed
command is effective.
STAR • This command is ignored when the memory switch location of use is specified as SBCS
(single byte countries).
Reference FS -, FS W, GS !

FS &
Name Specify Kanji mode

Code ASCII FS &
Hex. 1C 26
Decimal 28 38
Function Specifies Kanji mode.
Details < Japanese Kanji Specifications >
• Kanji mode specification using this command is enabled only when using JIS codes.
• If the Kanji mode is specified, all character codes are handled as 2 byte Chinese character
codes.
• Kanji codes are processed in the order first byte, second byte.
• Kanji mode is cancelled as the default setting.
• It is possible to select the Kanji code type using FS C.
< Chinese Kanji Specifications/ Taiwanese Kanji Specifications/ Korean Kanji Specifications>
• If Kanji mode is specified, the first byte that follows processing of the character code
equivalent to the first byte of the Kanji code is processed as the second byte of the Kanji
code.
• Kanji codes are processed in the order first byte, second byte.
• Kanji mode is specified as the default setting.
• ANK adornment commands are possible for Kanji enhancement (ESC E) and black/white
inversion (GS B) However, if the Kanji is enlarged over three times, enhancement is ignored.
Specifications A:　Enhancement of Kanji is ignored for those characters rotated
90 degrees to the right (ESC V) .
Specifications B:　Enhancement of Kanji is effective for those characters rotated 90 degrees
to the right (ESC V).
• The following shows the 2 byte code defined area.

Specifications Defined Area
Upper Bytes Lower Bytes
Japanese Kanji Characters JIS Type 0x21 to 0x7E 0x21 to 0x7E
Japanese Kanji Characters/Shift JIS Type 0x81 to 0x9F 0x40 to 0xFE
0xE0 to 0xEF
Chinese Kanji characters 0xA1 to 0xFD 0xA1 to FE (*)
Taiwanese Kanji characters 0xA1 to 0xFD 0x40 to FE
Korean Kanji characters 0xA1 to 0xFD 0xA1 to FE

(*) Bit – 7 of the lower bytes of the Chinese Kanji is always processed as MASK (0xA1A1 →
0xA121)
Reference FS., FS C

[Japanese Kanji Installed] <Command Ignored>
·FS C n(n=0)
ANK Characters
(Font -A/Font-B)
FS & FS C n(n=1)
FS FS C n(n=0)
JIS SHIFT-JIS
Code System Code System
<Command Ignored> FS C n(n=1) <Command Ignored>
·FS C n(n=0) ·FS C n(n=1)
·FS & ·FS &
·FS .
[Chinese Kanji Installed]
FS &
ANK Characters
Chinese Kanji
(Font-A/Font-B)
FS .
<Command Ignored> <Command Ignored>
·FS C n(n=0 / n=1) ·FS C n(n=0 / n=1)

FS – n
Name Specify/cancel Chinese character underline

Code ASCII FS - n
Hex. 1C 2D n
Decimal 28 45 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels Chinese character underlines.
n Function
0, 48 Cancels Chinese character underline
1, 49 Sets to one-dot width Chinese character underline and specifies Chinese
character underlines.
2, 50 Sets to two-dot width Chinese character underline and cancels Chinese
character underlines.
Details • An underline is applied to Chinese characters for the entire character width, including the left
and right character space amount.
However, underlines are not applied to portions that have been skipped using HT (horizontal
tab) or rotated 90 degrees to the right.
• When Chinese character underline mode is cancelled by setting the value of n to 0,
subsequent Chinese character data is not underlined, and the underline thickness set before
the mode is turned off is maintained.
In default, the underline width for Chinese characters is set to 1 dot.
• The set Chinese character underline width is the constant specified thickness regardless of
the size of the character.
• The FS ! (Batch specify Chinese character print mode) command can also turn Chinese
character underline mode on or off, but the setting of the last received command is effective.
• The underline for Chinese characters is applied in the following positions.
• 1-dot width underline → 24th dot
• 2-dot thickness underline → 23rd and 24th dot
Reference FS !

FS .
Name Cancel Chinese character mode

Code ASCII FS .
Hex. 1C 2E
Decimal 28 46
Function Cancels Chinese characters mode.
Details < Japanese Language Character Specifications >
• Chinese characters mode specification using this command is cancelled only when using JIS
codes.
• If the Chinese character mode is specified, all character codes are handled as 1 byte ASCII
codes.
• Chinese character mode is cancelled as the default setting.
< Chinese Kanji Specifications/ Taiwanese Kanji Specifications/ Korean Kanji Specifications >
• If the Chinese character mode is specified, all character codes are handled as 1 byte ASCII
codes.
• Chinese character mode is specified as the default setting.
Reference FS &, FS C

FS 2 c1 c2 d1 … dk
Name Define external character

Code ASCII FS 2 c1 c2 d1...dk
Hex. 1C 32 c1 c2 d1...dk
Decimal 28 50 c1 c2 d1...dk
Defined Region • c1 and c2 differ according to specifications and code type. See below.
Specifications c1 c2
Japanese Kanji Specifications (JIS code type) c1=77H 21H ≤ c2 ≤ 7EH
Japanese Kanji Specifications (SHIFT-JIS code type) c1=ECH 40H ≤ c2 ≤ 7EH
80H ≤ c2 ≤ 9EH
Chinese Kanji Specifications c1=FEH A1H ≤ c2 ≤ FEH
Taiwanese Kanji Specifications c1=FEH A1H ≤ c2 ≤ FEH
Korean Kanji Specifications c1=FEH A1H ≤ c2 ≤ FEH
• 0 ≤ d ≤ 255
• k = 72
Initial Value All spaces
Function Defines the external character pattern of the Chinese character to a character code specified
by c1 and c2.
Details • c1 and c2 indicate the Chinese character code that defines the external character; c1 is the
first byte; c2 is the second byte.
• d specifies defined data. Bits that correspond to the dots to print are 1, and the bits that
• Defined data is cleared by ESC @.
• External character registration of JIS codes and SHIFT-JIS codes for Japanese characters
uses the same region.
Reference FS C

24 dots
7 MSB
d1 d4 • • • • • • • • • • • • • d70 6
24 5
dots d2 d5 • • • • • • • • • • • • • d71 4
3
d3 d6 • • • • • • • • • • • • • d72
2
1
LSB
d1 = <00>H d4 = <03>H d7 = <0F>H d10 = <0D>H d13 = <0C>H d16 = <0D>H • • •

d2 = <00>H d5 = <0C>H d8 = <0C>H d11 = <80>H d14 = <03>H d17 = <83>H • • •
d3 = <00>H d6 = <00>H d9 = <00>H d12 = <00>H d15 = <00>H d18 = <80>H • • •

FS C n
Name Select Chinese character code type

Code ASCII FS C n
Hex. 1C 43 n
Decimal 28 67 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Selects the Chinese character code type.
n Selection
0, 48 JIS Code Type
1, 49 SHIFT-JIS Code Type
Details • If using the JIS code type, the Chinese characters codes below are effective. This command
is enabled only when using Japanese language specifications.
First Byte: <21>H to <7E>H
Second Byte: <21>H to <7E>H
• If using the SHIFT-JIS code type, the Chinese characters codes below are effective.
First Byte: <81>H to <9F>H and <E0>H to <EF>H
Second Byte: <40>H to <7E>H and <80>H to <FC>H

FS S n1 n2
Name Set Chinese character space amount

Code ASCII FS S n1 n2
Hex. 1C 53 n1 n2
Decimal 28 83 n1 n2
Defined Region 0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255
0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Initial Value n1 = 0,n2 = 0
Function Sets the Chinese character left and right space amounts.
• Left space amount: n1 x (basic calculated pitch)
• Right space amount: n2 x (basic calculated pitch)
Details • The space amount set by this command is the amount when using standard sized
characters.
When expanding characters more than double in the horizontal direction, the space amount
is [set amount x horizontal direction magnification].
• Space amount can be set independently for both the standard and page modes.
• The basic calculated pitch is set by GSP (Set basic calculated pitch). Also, after setting
the Chinese character space amount, it is not affected even if the basic calculated pitch is
changed.
• If there are fractions in the result, correct to the minimum mechanical pitch and discard.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (x) for the horizontal direction in standard mode.
• The Kanji character width is (“left space amount” + “Kanji font dot count” + “right space
amount”) x (basic calculated pitch).
(See the information on character specifications in the appropriate printer specifications
manual for details on the Kanji font dot count.))
• In page mode, the basic calculated pitch that is used according to the starting point is shown
below.
b. When the starting point is specified to be upper right or lower left by the ESC T command,
the basic calculated pitch (y) for the vertical direction is used.
c. The maximum value for the left or right space for Chinese characters is approximately
35.893 mm (255/180 inches). Specifications that exceed the maximum value are rounded off
to that value.
Reference GS P

FS W n
Name Specify/cancel double-tall, double wide Chinese characters

Code ASCII FS W n
Hex. 1C 57 n
Decimal 28 87 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Specifies or cancels quadruple size Chinese characters.
• Cancels quadruple size when n = <*******0>B.
• Specifies quadruple size when n = <*******1>B.
• Quadruple size characters are those characters that have both vertical and horizontal
directions expanded simultaneously.
• If quadruple size is cancelled using this command, the next Chinese character data is printed
at normal size.
• The FS ! (Batch specify Chinese character print mode) command or GS ! (Specify character
size) can also specify the Chinese character size, but the setting of the last received
command is effective.
Reference FS !, GS !

4-3-3 ESC/POS Black Mark Commands
ESC/POS black mark related commands are to control the top of form (black mark) functions. These commands
are effective only when the black mark function is valid.
<Black mark specifications>

1. Top of form (black mark detection) operation
A. Selectable when power is turned on (when a reset signal is input), when a self-print test is
completed, when the cover is closed and by the memory switch.
B. When the Feed switch is pressed
Performs Top of Form (black mark detection) operation
C. Command
See the following command details.
2 Black Mark Errors

A. Black mark error is entered
• When white detection is detected continuously over 400mm when feeding paper – A black
mark error occurs
• When black detection is detected continuously over 9mm when feeding paper – A paper out
error occurs
(On models that dually use paper out sensor for the black mark sensor, the error is a paper
out error.)
B. Operations during a black mark error
• Error LED flashes
• Feed switch is invalid
• Only the following commands are invalid. Other commands are ignored.
DLE EOT n: Real-time Status Command
DLE ENQ n: Real-time Request Command (Black Mark Error Cancel Com
mand)
• ASB Status is valid.
C. How to cancel a black mark error
• Turn power on again (reset signal is input)
• Real-time request command (Black mark error cancel command) DLE ENQ n cancel the er
ror.

FF
Name Print and recover to page mode

Code ASCII FF
Hex. 0C
Decimal 12
Function • When in page mode, this prints all buffered data to the print region collectively, then recovers
to the standard mode.
• In standard mode, this prints the data in the print buffer and feeds paper to the TOF position
(the black mark).
Details • In page mode, all buffer data is deleted after printing.
• In page mode, the print area set by ESCW (Set print region in page mode) is reset to the
default setting.
• In page mode, no paper cut is executed.
• In page mode, this sets the print position to the beginning of the next line after execution.
STAR • The TOF position (black mark) varies according to the paper used and to customer
specifications.
Reference ESC FF, ESC L, ESC S

DLE ENQ n
Name Real-time request to printer

Code ASCII DLE ENQ n
Hex. 10 05 n
Decimal 16 5 n
Function Responds to requests n specifications from the host in real-time. n specifications are below.
n = 1: Recover from the error and start printing from the line where the error occurred.
n = 2: Recover from error after clearing the reception buffer and print buffer.
Details • This command is enabled even when the printer specification is disabled by ESC = (select
• This command is enabled only when an auto-cutter and black mark errors occur.
• This command cannot be executed when the printer is BUSY on parallel interface models.
full.
• The printer retains the settings by ESC !, ESC 3, that were in effect when an error occurred
even when DLE ENQ 2 is executed. The printer is initialized completely using this command
and ESC @.
Notes: • Operators must use caution for other commands when the data string of <10>H<05>H<n> (1
≤ n ≤ 2) is received because it operates in the same manner as this command.
Ex.: In ESC * m nL nH [d]k, d1 = <10>H, d2 = <05>H, d3 = <01>H
more codes.
Ex.: If you attempt to transmit DLE EBQ 2 up to transmitting ESC3 by trying to transmit ESC 3 n
from the host, it is processed as ESC 3 10H. Operators must use caution.
STAR • Auto-cutter error specifications vary according to model, so for models for which there
are non-recoverable auto-cutter errors, three byes of this command are ignored. See
Appendix-2 for details on auto-cutter error specifications for model types.
• The black mark error is canceled and the printer feeds paper to the top of form position
(black mark position) when this command is received during a black mark error. Paper is cut
according to the memory switch setting (paper position, cover close setting).
• Models connected to a presenter ignore this command.
• When this command is set to n = 2, the printer is reset.

GS FF
Name Top of form of mark paper

Code ASCII GS FF
Hex. 1D 0C
Decimal 29 12
Function Top of form of mark paper
Details • This command is effective only when BM is valid. This command is ignored when BM is
invalid.
• This command is enabled only when at the top of the line.
• This command moves to the TOF position of BM.
STAR • STAR printers ignore this command.
• Byte counts specified by (pL + pH x 256) are discarded.
Reference GS ( F, FF

GS ( F pL pH a m nL nH
Name Set black mark adjustment value

Code ASCII GS ( F pL pH a m nL nH
Hex. 1D 28 46 pL pH 61 m nL nH
Decimal 29 40 70 pL pH 97 m nL nH
Defined Region (pL+pHx256) = 4, pL = 4, pH = 0
1 ≤ a ≤ 2
m = 0,1,48,49
0 ≤ nL + nH × 256 ≤ 65535, 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
Initial Value All adjustment values = 0
Function Sets the adjustment value of the black mark detection position.
a specifies the type of adjustment value.
a Function
1 Sets the adjustment value of the black mark detection position.
Sets the adjustment value of the paper cutting position after black mark
2
detection.
m specifies the direction of adjustment.

m Function
0, 48 Forward Direction (Paper Feed Direction)
1, 49 Reverse Direction

nL, nH specify the amount of adjustment.
Details • When processing this command while defining a macro, the macro definition is immediately
terminated and the command commences with processing.
• The black mark detection position (a = 1) is affected by the following command operations.
• FF
• GS FF
• The paper cutting position after black mark detection (a = 2) is affected by the following
command operation.
• GS V m n
• Because this command is executed when processing a normal command after it is stored
once in the reception buffer, there may be a delay between the reception of the command
from the reception buffer to the actual operation.
STAR • On STAR printers, the default value of the black mark detection position is 2 mm from
the bottom edge of the mark so, to make it the same position as on EPSON printers, it is
necessary to adjust the position using this command.
Reference FF, GS FF, GS V

GS ( M pL pH n m (Function Code: n = 1, 49)
Name Save black mark adjustment value

Code ASCII GS ( M pL pH n m
Hex. 1D 28 4D pL pH n m
n = 1, 49
1 ≤ m ≤ 3, 49 ≤ m ≤ 51
Function • Saves the black mark adjustment value set by the GS (F command to the mth region in the
volatile memory.
After saving to a non-volatile memory, the printer is reset.
m Function
1 Saves the adjustment value to the 1st saving region of the non-volatile memory.
2 Saves the adjustment value to the 2nd saving region of the non-volatile memory.
3 Saves the adjustment value to the 3rd saving region of the non-volatile memory.

Consider the life of the non-volatile memory and avoid over-use of this command.
Reference GS ( F

Name Load black mark adjustment value

n = 2, 50
1 ≤ m ≤ 3, 49 ≤ m ≤ 51
Function Loads the m position black mark adjustment value in the volatile memory.
m Function
1 Loads the adjustment value from the 1st saving region of the non-volatile memory.
2 Loads the adjustment value from the 2nd saving region of the non-volatile memory.
3 Loads the adjustment value from the 3rd saving region of the non-volatile memory.
Reference GS ( F

Name Set black mark adjustment value auto-load when powering on

n = 3, 51
1 ≤ m ≤ 3, 49 ≤ m ≤ 51
Function Validates/invalidates the black mark adjustment value auto-load when powering on.
After saving the setting to the non-volatile memory, the printer is reset.
m Function
0 Auto-load function invalid
1 Auto-loads the 1st adjustment value of the non-volatile memory when powering on.
2 Auto-loads the 2nd adjustment value of the non-volatile memory when powering on.
3 Auto-loads the 3rd adjustment value of the non-volatile memory when powering on.

Consider the life of the non-volatile memory and avoid over-use of this command.
Reference GS ( F

GS <
Name Mechanically initialize printer

Code ASCII GS <
Hex. 1D 3C
Decimal 29 60
Function Cuts paper after feeding to the TOF (black mark).
Details • Does not affect other settings.
• This command is effective in standard mode and page mode.
STAR • The TOF position (black mark) varies according to the paper used and to customer
specifications.

GS V m n
Name Cut paper

Code ASCII GS V m n
Hex. 1D 56 m n
Decimal 29 86 m n
Defined Region m = 65, 66, 0 ≤ n ≤ 255
Function Executes the specified paper cut.
m Function
66
uncut)
67 Not Used
68 Not Used
being used.
• Feeds paper to the TOF position (black mark) when n = 0, then cuts the paper.
• Feeds paper [n x basic calculated pitch] beyond the TOF position (black mark) when n ≠ 0,
then cuts the paper.
• Use the basic calculated pitch (y) relating to the vertical direction for the paper feed amount.
• The TOF position (black mark) varies according to the paper used and to customer
specifications.

4-3-4 STAR Original Commands
STAR original commands are not regulated by the ESC/POS control codes, but are standard for improved func-
tions and for independent STAR functions.
ESC GS = nL nH da1 … dak db1 …dbk
Name Write data to a blank code page

Code ASCII ESC GS = nL nH da1...dak db1...dbk
Hex. 1B 1D 3D nL nH da1...dak db1...dbk
Decimal 27 29 61 nL nH da1...dak db1...dbk
Defined Region nL = 0
nH = 48
1 ≤ nL+ (nH x 256)
0 ≤ da ≤ 255 (Font-A Data)
0 ≤ db ≤ 255 (Font-B Data)
k = nL+ (nH x 256) ÷ 2
Function • Stores blank code page data in non-volatile memory.
Details • A blank code page is a character code table that is completely free of character codes 80H to
FFH. It is selected when the character code table selection command (ESC tn) sets n = 255,
or (ESC GS t n) sets n = 255.
• The following are data that is written to the blank code page.
Font-A: 1 Character = 48 bytes; 6144 bytes = 48 bytes x 128 characters
Font-B: 1 Character = 48 bytes; 6144 bytes = 48 bytes x 128 characters
• Font-A data and Font-B data is sent continuously.
• The printer is reset after writing with to the non-volatile memory.
Reference ESC t, ESC GS t, Appendix-3

ESC GS t n
Name Select character code table

Code ASCII ESC GS t n
Hex. 1B 1D 74 n
Decimal 27 29 116 n
Function Selects character code table.
Specifications A:
Setting Value of n
Character Table
Hex. Decimal
00 0 Normal*
01 1 CodePage437 (USA, Std. Europe)
02 2 Katakana
04 4 Codepage 858 (Multilingual)
05 5 Codepage 852 (Latin-2)
06 6 Codepage 860 (Portuguese)
07 7 Codepage 861 (Icelandic)
08 8 Codepage 863 (Canadian French)
09 9 Codepage 865 (Nordic)
0A 10 Codepage 866 (Cyrillic Russian)
0B 11 Codepage 855 (Cyrillic Bulgarian)
0C 12 Codepage 857 (Turkish)
0D 13 Codepage 862 (Hebrew)
0E 14 Codepage 864 (Arabic)
0F 15 Codepage 737 (Greek)
10 16 Codepage 851 (Greek)
13 19 Codepage 772 (Lithuanian)
15 21 Codepage 874 (Thai)
20 32 Codepage 1252 (Windows Latin-1)
22 34 Codepage 1251 (Windows Cyrillic)
40 64 Codepage 3840 (IBM-Russian)
41 65 Codepage 3841 (Gost)
42 66 Codepage 3843 (Polish)
43 67 Codepage 3844 (CS2)
44 68 Codepage 3845 (Hungarian)
45 69 Codepage 3846 (Turkish)
46 70 Codepage 3847 (Brazil-ABNT)
47 71 Codepage 3848 (Brazil-ABICOMP)
48 72 Codepage 1001 (Arabic)
49 73 Codepage 2001 (Lithuanian-KBL)
4A 74 Codepage 3001 (Estonian-1)
4B 75 Codepage 3002 (Estonian-2)
4C 76 Codepage 3011 (Latvian-1)
4D 77 Codepage 3012 (Latvian-2)
4E 78 Codepage 3021 (Bulgarian)
4F 79 Codepage 3041 (Maltese)
FF 255 Blank page

Specifications B:
Setting Value of n
Character Table
Hex. Decimal
00 0 Normal*
02 2 Katakana
04 4 Codepage 858 (Multilingual)
05 5 Codepage 852 (Latin-2)
06 6 Codepage 860 (Portuguese)
07 7 Codepage 861 (Icelandic)
08 8 Codepage 863 (Canadian French)
09 9 Codepage 865 (Nordic)
0A 10 Codepage 866 (Cyrillic Russian)
0B 11 Codepage 855 (Cyrillic Bulgarian)
0C 12 Codepage 857 (Turkish)
0D 13 Codepage 862 (Hebrew)
0E 14 Codepage 864 (Arabic)
0F 15 Codepage 737 (Greek)
15 21 Codepage 874 (Thai)
22 34 Codepage 1251 (Windows Cyrillic)
40 64 Codepage 3840 (IBM-Russian)
41 65 Codepage 3841 (Gost)
42 66 Codepage 3843 (Polish)
43 67 Codepage 3844 (CS2)
44 68 Codepage 3845 (Hungarian)
45 69 Codepage 3846 (Turkish)
46 70 Codepage 3847 (Brazil-ABNT)
47 71 Codepage 3848 (Brazil-ABICOMP)
48 72 Codepage 1001 (Arabic)
49 73 Codepage 2001 (Lithuanian-KBL)
4A 74 Codepage 3001 (Estonian-1)
4B 75 Codepage 3002 (Estonian-2)
4C 76 Codepage 3011 (Latvian-1)
4D 77 Codepage 3012 (Latvian-2)
4E 78 Codepage 3021 (Bulgarian)
4F 79 Codepage 3041 (Maltese)
60 96 Thai Character Code 42 (Thai)
FF 255 Blank page
Details • Command ignored when n other than definition is input.

ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL
Name Memory Switch Settings

Code ASCII ESC GS # m N n1 n2 n3 n4 LF NUL
Hex. 1B 1D 23 m N n1 n2 n3 n4 0A 00
Decimal 27 29 35 m N n1 n2 n3 n4 10 0
Defined Region 48 ≤ n1 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n1 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n1 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n1 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n1 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n2 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n2 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n2 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n2 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n2 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n1 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n3 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n3 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n3 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n3 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n3 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n3 ≤ “f”)
48 ≤ n4 ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ n4 ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ n4 ≤ 70 (”A” ≤ n4 ≤ “F”), 97 ≤ n4 ≤ 102 (“a” ≤ n4 ≤ “f”)
Spec. A
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ (*)70 (”A” ≤ N ≤ (*)“F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ (*) 102, (“a” ≤ N ≤ (*) (*) “f”)
Spec. B
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ (*)70 (”A” ≤ N ≤ (*)“F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ (*) 102, (“a” ≤ N ≤ (*) (*) “f”)
N = 85 (N = “U”) User defined area
Spec. C
m = 87, 84, 44, 43, 45, 64, 42 (m = “W”, “T”, “,”, “+”, “-”, “@”, “*”)
48 ≤ N ≤ 57 (”0” ≤ N ≤ “9”), 65 ≤ N ≤ (*)70 (”A” ≤ N ≤ (*)“F”), 97 ≤ N ≤ (*) 102, (“a” ≤ N ≤ (*) (*) “f”)
N = 85 (N = “U”) User defined area
(*) The memory switch defined area differs according to the model.
Models with Spec. C can load the factory default settings by specifying m=42 (“*”).
Function • Sets the memory switches
Function Class m N n1 n2 n3 n4
Definition data write and reset Write “W” Fixed at “0” Fixed at “0000”
Definition data write and reset and test print Write “T” Fixed at “0” Fixed at “0000”
Data Definition (Data Specification) Definition “,” N n1 n2 n3 n4
Data definition (Set specified bit) Definition “+” N n1 n2 n3 n4
Data definition (Clear specified bit) Definition “-” N n1 n2 n3 n4
Data Definition (Initialize all data) Definition “@” Fixed at “0” Fixed at “0000”
Data Definition (Load Factory Default Setting) Defiition “*” Fixed at “0” Fixed at “0000”

• N: Memory switch number to specify
• n1 n2 n3 n4: Specified Data
• m = “,” → Specified Data
• m = “+” → Bit number to set
• m = “-” → Bit number that was cleared.

Details Sends command to write after defining memory switch using the definition command
specified by the following classes.
Memory switch information defined by the command to write is written to the volatile memory.
When writing to the volatile memory by the command to write, the printer executes a reset.
This command exists in models that have the specifications of A, B, and C as indicated in the
above defined areas.
Models having B and C specifications can register any 16 bit data by specifying N = 85 (U).
Models with Spec. C can load the factory default settings by specifying m=42 (“*”).
(See the “Special Appendix, Command Table per Model” for details per model.)

ESC RS F n
Name Select Font

Code ASCII ESC RS F n
Hex. 1B 1E 46 n
Decimal 27 30 70 n
Defined Region 0 ≤ n ≤ 1, n = 16
Initial Value n=0
Function • Selects the font.
n Font
0 Font A (12 x 24 dots)
1 Font B (9 x 24 dots)
16 OCR B (16 x 24 dots)
The functions outlined below are disabled when the OCR B font is selected.
• Code page
• Blank code page
• Country characters
• Slashed zero
Character modifier, expansion and external character settings are disabled when using the
OCR B font for reading using a scanner. Check the OCR B font in actual use before using.

ESC RS C n
Name Print Mode Selection

Code ASCII ESC RS C n
Hex. 1B 1E 43 n
Decimal 27 30 67 n
Defined Region 0 ≤ n ≤ 1 48 ≤ n ≤ 49
n=16,n=32
Initial Value ---
Function Selects print mode
n Print Mode
0,48 Single color mode
1,49 2-color mode
16 Low power consumption mode
32 Double resolution mode

• This command is ignored when low power consumption mode is selected.
• This command is not cleared by ESC @.
• If there is unprinted data in the line buffer, the printing of the line buffer data will be executed.
• This command is processed after the current printing has been completed.
• This command is ignored when reduced printing in the vertical direction is setting.

ESC RS L m
Name Batch Control Logo

Code ASCII ESC RS L m
Hex. 1B 1E 4C m
Decimal 27 30 76 m
Defined Region Spec. A m = 255
Spec. B 0
≤ m ≤ 3, 48 ≤ m ≤ 51 (“0” ≤ m ≤ “3”), m = 255)
Initial Value ---
Function Spec. A: Batch deletes all registered logos.
After printing is completed, the printer is reset.
Spec. B: Performs a control specified by parameter m for the logo.
After execution, the printer is reset
m Logo Control Mode
0, 48 Normal mode, batch printing
1, 49 Double-wide mode, batch printing
2, 50 Double-tall mode, batch printing
3, 51 Double-wide, double tall mode, batch printing
255 Batch delete logos

This command is ignored in page mode.

ESC GS ETX s n1 n2
Name Send print-end counter, initialize

Code ASCII ESC GS ETX s n1 n2
Hex. 1B 1D 03 s n1 n2
Decimal 27 29 3 s n1 n2
Defined Region Spec. A: 0 ≤ s ≤ 2
Spec. B: 0 ≤ s ≤ 4
Spec. C: 0 ≤ s ≤ 5
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Function This command is run when reading from the reception buffer. Processes the print end
counter according to the s parameter.
s Name Function
Sends the current print end counter to the host.
0 Print end counter reference
(Does not wait for print end. Does not count up.)
Runs the next operation.
(1) Prints data in line buffer, if data exists.
1 Print end counter update (2) Waits until printing ends (motor stops).
(3) Updates print end counter (+1)
(4) Sends print end counter to host.
Returns the print end counter to its default value (zero clear).
2 Print end counter clear (Does not wait for print end. Does not send the print end counter
to the host.
Start document (1) Sets data intake mode
3
n1, n2 = 0 (2) Initialize
(1) Prints data in line buffer, if data exists.
End document
4 (2) Waits until printing ends (motor stops).
n1, n2 = 0
(3) Cancels data intake mode
n1=0 : Initializes to the content of MSW. (n2=0)
n1=1 : Data timeout setting
5 Data timeout setting n2=0: Timeout disabled
Others: n2 = Data timeout time (units: seconds 1 to 255 seconds)
n1=2 : Sends the current timeout setting to the host. (n2=0)
When s = 0, or s = 1 is specified, the data format returned to the host is as shown below.
<Returned Data Formats>
Code ASCII ESC GS ETX s n1 n2 [Print end counter] NUL
Hex. 1B 1D 03 s n1 n2 [Print end counter] 00
Decimal 27 29 3 s n1 n2 [Print end counter] 0
* Echoes back the specified contents from the host as is until ESC GS ETX s n1 n2, and then
sends the print end counter value and NUL.
When [Print end counter] is 1 byte in length, the initial value is 0x00.
When s = 1, increments by 1 each time the command is processed. After 0xFF, returns to
0x00.
There is one [Print end counter] in the printer that is unrelated to the n1, n2 values.
(There is no counter for the n1, n2 values.)

(Reference Information) Differences between the ETB command and this command
Item ESC GS ETX s n1 n2 ETB
Affect on ASB (ETB Status) No ○
ASB Occurrence No ○
Affect on ASB valid/invalid setting No ○
Affect of the ESC RS E n command No ○
Send only when in the
Status transmission destination in Ethernet Send ASB to all sessions
print session (host) that is
(When multi-sessions is valid) (hosts) that are connected
connected
* This print end counter and the ETB counter sent by the ETB command are separate. They
have no affect on each other.
The following shows a communication example of this command.

Communication Example 1
Host Transmission Data Printer return data
ESC GS ETX 0x00 0x00 0x00 →
(Reference Counter)
← ESC GS ETX 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Print Data + ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x00 0x00 →
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x01 0x00
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x02 0x00
Communication Example 2
Host Transmission Data Printer return data
ESC GS ETX 0x02 0x02 0x00
(Clear Counter)
ESC GS ETX 0x00 0x02 0x00 →
(Reference Counter)
← ESC GS ETX 0x00 0x02 0x00 0x00 0x00
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x02 0x11 0x01 0x00
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x02 0x12 0x02 0x00
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x02 0x13 0x03 0x00
(Reference Update)
← ESC GS ETX 0x01 0x02 0x14 0x04 0x00
<Example using n1, n2>

• For Ethernet: Specify as n1 = host ID, n2 = document number, and check the compatibility of source
information and returned information for the host ID and document ID along with getting the
returned print end counter.
• For cases other than Ethernet:
Specify n1+n2 x 256 as the document ID and check the compatibility with the document ID in
the same way.
• When it is not possible to check compatibility of the source and returned data, fix at n1 = 0, n2 = 0.

When s=3, s=4 (Document start command + document end command) , operates as though in data cancel mode.
If there is an error after receiveing the document start command, reception data is received and discarded until
the document end command is received when the printer is recovered from the error. If the document end com-
mand cannot be recognized, all reception data is destroyed. Timeouts are 10 seconds. Automatically cancels the
data intake mode.
Restrictions
1) Sleep mode decrease
2) Invalid when in Page mode
When s = 3, initialize the following settings using the initializing process.

• Set slash zero
• Set specify/cancel external character (external register character data is retained)
• Page length
• Current position (move to top of page, top of line)
• Horizontal tab/Vertical tab
• Set upside-down, position alignment
• Left/right margins
<T: TOP Command/E: END Command>

T T
Doc 1 Doc 1
PE PE
Receive Receive
and discard E and discard
T
Doc 2 Doc 2
E
T
Doc 3 Doc 3
E E

The interface disconnection detection function through data reception timeout is controlled when s=5
is specified.
When this function is enabled, the interface is determined to have been disconnected when no data is received
for a specified period of time at the data read section of the printer.
When a disconnection is detected during a command execution, the command parsing is stopped.
When data cancel is enabled, the print start function using the timer (ESC GS g 1) is disabled, and data is
canceled.
n1=0 and n2=0: Initializes the interface disconnection detection function through data
reception timeout.
(Returns to the MSW settings. The initial value for the timeout time is 3 seconds.)
n1=1 : Set enable/disable and the timeout time for data reception timeouts.
When n2 is 0, the disconnection detection function is disabled due to data reception timeouts.
When n2 is anything except for 0, the data reception timeout is set. (Units: seconds, 1 to 255
seconds)
n1=2 and n2=0: Sends the current setting to the host.

The data format returned to the host is as shown below.

<Returned Data Formats>
Code ASCII ESC GS ETX s n1 n2 [timeout setting] NUL
Hex. 1B 1D 03 s n1 n2 [timeout setting] 00
Decimal 27 29 3 s n1 n2 [timeout setting] 0
* Echoes back the specified contents from the host as is until ESC GS ETX s n1 n2, and then
sends the timeout setting value and NUL.

4-3-5 STAR Original Presenter Control Commands
The following commands control the presenter functions.
The following commands are effective only on models equipped with a presenter.
ESC SYN 0 n
Name Execute presenter paper recovery

Code ASCII ESC SYN 0 n
Hex. 1B 16 30 n
Decimal 27 22 48 n
Defined Region n = 0, 48
Function Executes presenter paper recovery.
This command is ignored when a presenter is not connected.
Also, this command is executed when paper is supplied by the presenter, exists in the
presenter and the paper has been cut. This command is ignored under all other conditions.
(Ignored when paper is being recovered.))
Reference ESC SYN 1, ESC SYN 2, ESC SYN 3, ESC SYN 4

ESC SYN 1 n
Name Set presenter paper recovery function and automatic recovery time
Hex. 1B 16 31 n
Decimal 27 22 49 n
Initial Value Memory Switch Setting
Function Sets presenter paper automatic recovery function and automatic recovery time.
Settings using this command are effective from the next sheet when the printer processes
this command and paper has already been supplied to the presenter.
n Function
n=0 Paper automatic recovery function invalid.
1 ≤ n ≤ 255 Paper automatic recovery function valid.
Automatic recovery time: n x 0.5 sec (0.5 sec to 127.5 sec)

ESC SYN 3 n
Name Get presenter paper counter

Hex. 1B 16 33 n
Decimal 27 22 51 n
Function Acquires presenter paper counter.
Counter can count to 0xFFFFFFFF sheets.
Counter is cleared to zero when the following conditions are met.
• At a printer reset
• At <ESC> <SYN> 4 n command
The paper counter sends the counter value at the time this command is processed.
The counter is counted up when paper is completely recovered or when pulled out.
The counter counts from when the power is turned ON, excluding the following.
• When paper is discharged because of an error
• When printing using self-print
• When paper in the presenter is discharged when the power is turned ON
n Counter
n = 0, 48 Acquires paper reel counter
n = 1, 49 Acquires paper recovery counter

<Counter transmission format from printer: When using the paper reel counter>
Printer Transmission: ESC SYN 3 n c1 c2 c3 c4
Reel counter: c4 + (c3 x 256) + (c2 x 256 x 256) + (c1 x 256 x 256 x 256)

ESC SYN 4 n
Name Initialize presenter paper counter

Hex. 1B 16 34 n
Decimal 27 22 52 n
Defined Region n = 0
Function Initializes the presenter paper counter (paper reel counter/paper recovery counter).
Initialization of the paper counter using this command is executed when this command is
processed.

ESC GS SUB DC1 m t1 t2
Name Specify snout operation mode

Code ASCII ESC GS SUB DC1 m t1 t2
Hex. 1B 1D 1A 11 m t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 26 17 m t1 t2
Defined Region 0 ≤ m ≤ 3 (48 ≤ m ≤ 51)

t1 = 0, t2 =0
Initial Value MSW Setting
Function Specify the snout operation mode using the m parameter.

m Snout Operating Mode
0, 48 Snout LED output OFF
1, 49 Snout LED output ON (while printing, or during presenter opera-
tion)
2, 50 Snout LED output ON (during an error)
3, 51 Snout LED output ON (while printing, or during presenter opera-
tion or an error)
This command is valid when a presenter is connected.

When the snout is not connected, this command is prohibited from use.
Reference ESC GS SUB DC2, ESC GS SUB DC3

Name Specify Snout LED ON/OFF time

Hex. 1B 1D 1A 12 m t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 26 18 m t1 t2
0 ≤ t1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Initial Value t1 = 2, t2 = 2
Function Specify Snout LED ON/OFF times.
m specifies the snout operation mode.
m Snout Operating Mode
1, 49 This command specifies the LED ON/OFF times while the presenter is operating.
(LED lights in orange while the printer is printing.)
2, 50 This command specifies the LED ON/OFF times for recoverable and non-recover-
able errors.
t1 specifies the snout LED ON time.

When 1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255: ON time = t1 x 50 msec
When t1 =: When ON time is default value (t1=2)
t2 specifies the snout LED OFF time.
When 1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255: OFF time = t2 x 50 msec
When t2 = 0: When OFF time is default value (t2=2)

Name Execute snout LED operation

Hex. 1B 1D 1A 13 m t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 26 19 m t1 t2
0 ≤ t1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Initial Value ---

Function Operate the snout LED.
m specifies the snout LED output terminal.
m LED output terminal
1, 49 External output terminal 1
2, 50 External output terminal 2
t1 specifies the ON time for the snout LED operation.

When 1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255: ON time = t1 x 50 msec
When t1 = 0 When ON time is default value (Default =2 x 50 msec)
t2 specifies the OFF time for the snout LED operation.
When 1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255: OFF time = t2 x 50 msec
When t2 = 0: When OFF time is default value (Default =2 x 50 msec)
This command has priority if received while operating the snout LED in the operation mode
specified by the

4-3-6 STAR Original Mark Commands
This command is specialized for printing mark sheets for lotteries. This command can print lines.
<Print Sample>
L O T T E R Y 1 0
01 05 32 85 86 50 70 77 08
50 21 42 46 40 12 02 06 78
Mark Printing
2003/04/08 STAR Micronics co.,. ltd

No. 0304081254896
<Example of Command Transmission>

• Mark Format
Mark Height h = 10 dots, Mark line feed amount v = 20 dots
Mark number 0: Mark Color c = White, Mark horizontal width w = 16 dots
Mark number 1: Mark Color c = Black, Mark horizontal width w = 40 dots
Mark number 2: Mark Color c = White, Mark horizontal width w = 40 dots
Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 2

Hor. W Hor. W Hor. W
Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 1 Mark 0 Mark 2 Mark height h Mark LF amount v
• Example Transmission
1. Mark height, Line feed amount setting
<ESC> <GS> *1 h v (h = “010”, v = “020”)
2. Color of each mark number, Horizontal width setting
<ESC> <GS> *2 m c w (Mark number 0 setting: m = “0”, c = “0”, w = “016”)
3. Register the mark format specified by 1 and 2 in advance in the non-volatile memory (it is possible to print
marks that are not registered in the non-volatile memory.)
<ESC> <GS> *W
4. Printing Marks
<ESC><GS>*0nm1m2m3m4m5m6m7
(n = “007”, m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “1”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “1”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “2”)
(n = “007”,m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “2”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “1”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “1”)
(n = “007”, m1 = “1”, m2 = “0”, m3 = “1”, m4 = “0”, m5 = “2”, m6 = “0”, m7 = “2”)

ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3 … mk
Name Print mark

Code ASCII ESC GS * 0 n m1 m2 m3 . . . mk
Hex. 1B 1D 2A 30 n m1 m2 m3 . . . mk
Decimal 27 29 42 48 n m1 m2 m3 . . . mk
Defined Region “001” ≤ n ≤ ”255”
“0” ≤ m ≤ ”9”
k = n
Initial Value ---
Function Prints the mark number specified by m, based on the mark format (mark height, mark line
feed amount, each mark color, and each mark horizontal width) that is preset.
n indicates the number of marks to print; If the number of marks is 10 (m1 to m10), n = “010.”
m specifies the mark number to print.
n and m are ASCII character strings that are represented by decimals; They are composed of
character codes “0” to “9.”
This command is ignored if there is print data in the image buffer. Therefore, other
characters cannot be included (characters, bit images, bar codes, etc.).
If there is no mark specified in the remaining print region, the number of bytes specified by n
are discarded.
Also, in page mode, if the value of n is out of the defined range, subsequent data are
processed as normal data.
This command is affected by position alignment, left margin, moved position, positions such
as horizontal tab and upside down printing.
Reference ESC GS * 1, ESC GS * 2, ESC GS * W, ESC GS *C

ESC GS * 1 h v
Name Specify mark height and line feed

Code ASCII ESC GS * 1 h v
Hex 1B 1D 2A 31 h v
Decimal 27 29 42 49 h v
Defined Region “001” ≤ h ≤ ”255”
“001” ≤ v ≤ ”255”
h ≤ v
Initial Value Non-volatile memory
Function Specifies mark height and line feed amount
h is the mark height (number of dots); v is the line feed amount for the mark (number of dots)
h and v are ASCII character strings that are represented by decimals; They are composed of
character codes “0” to “9.”
If a small line feed amount is specified, missing print can occur, so more than v = 16 dots is
recommended.
Reference ESC GS * 0, ESC GS * 2, ESC GS * W, ESC GS * C

ESC GS * 2 m c w
Name Specify mark color and mark horizontal width for each mark number
Code ASCII ESC GS * 2 m c w
Hex. 1B 1D 2A 32 m c w
Decimal 27 29 42 50 m c w
Defined Region “0” ≤ m ≤ ”9”
“0” ≤ c ≤ ”1”
“001” ≤ w ≤ ”999”
Initial Value Non-volatile memory
Function Specifies mark color and mark horizontal width for each mark number.
m specifies the mark number.
c specifies the mark color.
w specifies the mark horizontal width (number of dots).
If w exceeds the print region, this command is ignored.
m, c and w are ASCII character strings that are represented by decimals; They are
composed of character codes “0” to “9.”
c Mark Color
n = “0” (48) White
n = “1” (49) Black
Reference ESC GS * 0, ESC GS * 1, ESC GS * W, ESC GS * C

ESC GS * W
Name Register mark format to non-volatile memory

Code ASCII ESC GS * W
Hex. 1B 1D 2A 57
Decimal 27 29 42 87
Defined Region ---
Initial Value ---
Function Registers the mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, each mark color, and each
mark horizontal width) to the non-volatile memory.
After registering to the non-volatile memory, the printer is reset.
Considering the non-volatile memory service life, avoid using this command frequently.
Reference ESC GS * 0, ESC GS * 1, ESC GS * 2, ESC GS * C
ESC GS * C
Name Initialize mark format in the non-volatile memory

Code ASCII ESC GS * C
Hex. 1B 1D 2A 43
Decimal 27 29 42 67
Defined Region ---
Initial Value ---
Function Initializes the registered mark format (mark height, mark line feed amount, each mark color,
and each mark horizontal width) in the non-volatile memory. After initialization, the printer is
reset.
Initial Value of the Mark Format

• Mark Height: “016” (16 dots)
• Mark line feed amount: “032” (32 dots)
• Mark Color: “0” (White →
All mark numbers)
• Mark Horizontal Width: “080” (80 dots →
All mark numbers)
Reference ESC GS * 0, ESC GS * 1, ESC GS * 2, ESC GS * W

4-3-7 STAR Original Auto Logo Commands
This command functions to print logos, like the one below, by only changing the product name, when only prod-
uct names can be changed in systems that are already in use. Also, this function has two operating modes.
1) Standard Auto Logo Function
The Auto Logo function is preset and executes the following operations using the print cut command under the
current system as a trigger.
1. Starts up the Auto Logo function using the current system cut command as a trigger
2. Prints if there is print data in the image buffer
3. Executes user macro 1
4. Prints Auto Logo
Logo 2 is printed by #4 Auto Logo printing according to the command character “/” that was preset in the cur-
rent print data and embedding the Logo number “2” to print. Specifically, if the product is registered with
“CHEESEBURGER/2” the logo 2 coupon ticket is automatically printed for the purchaser of a cheese burger.
Also, Logo 1 for the header is used for company logos. By registering to the user macro 2 of #5, cut command +
Logo 1 print command, the company logo of logo1 will be printed. User macro 1 of #3 is used when it is neces-
sary to position the Auto Logo in the center. When doing so, register the left alignment command using the user
macro 2 of #5 and return to its original setting.
Header 㩷 Logo1㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
******************** 㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㩷
********************
1 CHEESEBURGER
. $2.00 㩷MCDONALD’S
㪤㪘㪚㪛㪦㪥㪘㪣㪛㪪㩷
2 COKE
. $1.00
㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㩷
********************
-------------------------
---------- 1.㪈㪅㪚㪟㪜㪜㪪㪙㪬㪞㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪉㪅㪇㪇
CHEESEBURGER $2.00㩷
TOTAL $3.00㩷 2㪉㪅㪚㪦㪢㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷
COKE
. $1.00㩷
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪈㪅㪇㪇
㩷 Current System
-------------------------
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㩷 ----------
TOTAL $3.00㩷 Print Data
㪫㪦㪫㪘㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪊㪅㪇㪇㩷
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut

command Partial Cut㩷
Current System Print Data 3. User macro 1 executed
㩷Cheeseburger
㩷㩷㩷㩷㪟㪼㪸㪻㪼㫉㩷㩷㪣㫆㪾㫆㪉㩷
Partial Cut
4. AutoLogo printed
COKE 㩷 Logo3㩷
5. User macro 2 executed

Paper is cut
Header logo is printed
Header 㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S

2) Simple Auto Logo Functions
The simple Auto Logo function is preset and executes the following operations using the print cut command un-
der the current system as a trigger.
1. Starts up the simple Auto Logo function using the current system cut command as a trigger
2. Center alignment command process
3. Print Logo 2
4. Feed paper to cutting position and executes a partial cut
5. Print Logo 1
6. Recovers position alignment command to setting prior to execution of the simple Auto Logo

With the simple Auto Logo function, the logo number of the logo to be printed is decided in advance.
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷 Header Logo1㩷
********************
MCDONALD’S
******************** 㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㩷
********************
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00 㩷㪤㪘㪚㪛㪦㪥㪘㪣㪛㪪㩷
2.COKE $1.00 MCDONALD’S
㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㪁㩷
********************
-------------------------
---------- 㪈㪅㪚㪟㪜㪜㪪㪙㪬㪞㪜㪩㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪉㪅㪇㪇
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00㩷
TOTAL $3.00㩷 2.COKE $1.00㩷
㪉㪅㪚㪦㪢㪜㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪈㪅㪇㪇
㩷 Current System
-----------------------------------
㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㪄㩷
TOTAL $3.00㩷 Print Data
㪫㪦㪫㪘㪣㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㩻㪊㪅㪇㪇㩷
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut command

Current System Print Data 2. Center alignment
3. Logo2 is printed Footer 㩷 Logo2㩷
4. Paper is fed to cutting position and

partially cut

5. Logo1 is printed. Header 㩷 Logo1㩷

6. Returns to position alignment
********************
MCDONALD’S 㩷

<Example of Command Transmission>
1) Set the Auto Logo function in advance and register it to the non-volatile memory.
ESCGS/1n (n = 0x01): Standard Auto Logo Function ON
ESCGS/2n (n = “/”): Specify Auto Logo Command Character (“/”)
ESCGS/3nLnHd1d2...dk: User Macro 1 Definition
nL = 3n H = 0: Registered Macro Count = 3 Bytes
d1 = 0x1 bd2 = 0x61 d3 = 0x01: Registered Macro <ESC a1: Center Alignment>
ESCGS/4nLnHd1d2...dk: User Macro 2 Definition
nL = 16 nH = 0: Registered Macro Count = 16 Bytes
d1 = 0x1d d2 = 0x56 d3 = 0x42 d4 = 0x00: Registered Macro <GS V 660: Transport to
Cutting Position and Perform Partial Cut>
d5 = 0x1c d6 = 0x70 d7 = 0x01 d8 = 0x00: <FS p10: Logo1 Print>
d9 = 0x1b d10 = 0x61 d11 = 0x00: <ESC a0: Left Alignment>
d12 = 0x1b d13 = 0x70 d14 = 0x03 d15 = 0x64 d16 = 0x00: <ESC p3 100 0: Draw Drive>
ESCGS/5n (n = 0x01): Auto Logo Command Character, Space Switch
ESCGS/6n (n = 0x01): Partial Cut Before Auto Logo Printing Valid
ESCGS/W: Register Auto Logo Definition Data to Non-volatile Memory
2) Send registered command character embedded in print data

“CHEESEBURGER/2” –> “/” is recognized as the Auto Logo command character; “/2” switch to space; “2” speci-
fies Logo2.

ESC GS / W
Name Register Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory

Code ASCII ESC GS / W
Hex. 1b 1d 2f 57
Decimal 27 29 47 87
Defined Region ---
Initial Value ---
Function Registers Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory
After registration, the printer is reset.
This command is ignored when Auto Logo is being executed.
Reference ESC GS / C, ESC GS / 1, ESC GS / 2, ESC GS / 3, ESC GS / 4, ESC GS / 5, ESCGS/6

ESC GS / C
Name Initialize Auto Logo setting to non-volatile memory

Code ASCII ESC GS / C
Hex. 1b 1d 2f 43
Decimal 27 29 47 67
Defined Region ---
Initial Value ---
Function Initializes registered data in the non-volatile memory of the Auto Logo function.
After initialization, the printer is reset.

The default values of the Auto Logo function are below.
Setting Initial Value
Auto Logo Function OFF
Command Character None
User Macro 1 None
User Macro 2 None
Command Character Switch No print
Partial Cut Before Auto Logo Printing Invalid
Reference ESC GS / W, ESC GS / 1, ESC GS / 2, ESC GS / 3, ESC GS / 4, ESC GS / 5, ESC GS / 6

ESC GS / 1 n
Name Auto Logo Function On/Off Setting

Code ASCII ESC GS / 1 n
Hex. 1b 1d 2f 31 n
Decimal 27 29 47 49 n
Initial Value n = 0
Function Turns the Auto Logo function on and off.
This command is registered to the non-volatile memory by the “<ESC> <GS> / W” command.
When in page mode, the Auto Logo function is invalid.
n Setting
0 Auto Logo Function Off
Standard Auto Logo Function ON
<Operation Specifications>
1. Starts up the Auto Logo function using the current system cut command as a
trigger
1
4. Prints Auto Logo
Simple Auto Logo Function ON
<Operation Specifications>
1. Starts up the Auto Logo function using the current system cut command as a
trigger
3. Execute center alignment
2 4. Print Logo 2 (When 2 color printing is set: Logo3)
5. Feed paper to cutting position and execute a partial cut
6. Print Logo 1
7. Recover position alignment setting
Note: • With this setting, user macro and command character are invalid.
(“/” is printed as a character if the command character is set to “/” when setting.)

The commands that are the triggers for the Auto Logo function are below.
When the standard Auto Logo Function is turned on by n = 1, the following trigger commands
function only as triggers and do not cut paper. Therefore, it is necessary to register any cut
command to the user macro 2.
When the simple Auto Logo Function is turned on by n = 2, the following cut commands are
executed and are the triggers for the simple Auto Logo function.
•<GS> V m: C
ut command
• <GS> V m n: C
ut command
•<ESC> i: F
ull cut command (not recommended)
•<ESC> m: P
artial cut command (not recommended)
Reference ESC GS / W, ESC GS / C, ESC GS / 2, ESC GS / 3, ESC GS / 4, ESC GS / 5, ESC GS / 6

ESC GS / 2 n
Name Set command character

Hex. 1b 1d 2f 32 n
Decimal 27 29 47 50 n
Defined Region 32 ≤ n ≤ 127, n = 0
Initial Value n = 0
Function Sets the Auto Logo function command character.
n Setting
32 to 127 Command Character
0 No Command Character Setting
A command character is a character that is a command for specifying the logo number to
print with the Auto Logo printing.
When “/” is specified as the command character, “/2/3” is embedded in the print data.
The printer does not process the “/” as character data but as a command and stores number
that follows at the end and prints it as an Auto Logo in the order that it is stored. Therefore, if
“/2/3” is embedded, Auto Logo will print Logo2 and Logo3 in that order. If the specified logo
has not been registered, logo printing will be ignored.
Also, if there is no set command character setting, a logo will not be printed.
Note that “/2/3” is processed as a command is not printed.
However, using the “<ESC> <GS> /5 n” command it is possible to switch “/2/3” to a space.
In the same way as with “/2/3/2/2” if a logo is duplicated, only the initial logo is printed.
A maximum of 32 logos can be stored as Auto Logos.
Continuing after the command character, the following shows the defined area of the
character d that specifies the logo number.
“1” ≤ d ≤ ”9” (49 ≤ d ≤ 57) → Logo number 1 to 9
“A” ≤ d ≤ ”F” (65 ≤ d ≤ 70) → Logo number 10 to 16
The logo of key codes kc1 and kc2 defined by “GS ( L <fn=67>” or “GS 8 L <fn=67>” is
possible to print by the Logo number of this command.
The following table shows he key codes and logo number.
n kc1 kc2 n kc1 kc2
“1” 0 1 “9” 0 9
“2” 0 2 “A” 1 0
“3” 0 3 “B” 1 1
“4” 0 4 “C” 1 2
“5” 0 5 “D” 1 3
“6” 0 6 “E” 1 4
“7” 0 7 “F” 1 5
“8” 0 8

ESC GS / 3 nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Name Set user macro 1

Code ASCII ESC GS / 3 nL nH d1 d2...dk
Hex. 1b 1d 2f 33 nL nH d1 d2...dk
Decimal 27 29 47 51 nL nH d1 d2...dk
nH = 0
1 ≤ (nL+nHx256) ≤ 64
dk = (nL+nHx256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value No user macro 1 setting
Function Sets the user macro 1 of the Auto Logo function.
Registers print data in user macro 1.
A maximum of 64 bytes of data can be registered.
Note that it is prohibited to register Auto Logo command characters in a user macro.

ESC GS / 4 nL nH d1 d2 ... dk
Name Set user macro 2

Code ASCII ESC GS / 4 nL nH d1 d2...dk
Hex. 1b 1d 2f 34 nL nH d1 d2...dk
Decimal 27 29 47 52 nL nH d1 d2...dk
nH = 0
1 ≤ (nL+nHx256) ≤ 64
dk = (nL+nHx256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value No user macro 2 setting
Function Sets the user macro 2 of the Auto Logo function.
Registers print data in user macro 2.
A maximum of 64 bytes of data can be registered.
Note that it is prohibited to register Auto Logo command characters in a user macro.

ESC GS / 5 n
Name Set command character switching method

Hex. 1b 1d 2f 35 n
Decimal 27 29 47 53 n
Initial Value n = 0
Function Sets the Auto Logo function command character switching method.
n Setting
0 Does not print the command character and the following logo number
1 Switches the command character and the following logo number into a space
character (0 x 20)

When “/” is specified as the command character, the “/2” embedded in the print data is not a
character string, but processed as a command.
At this time, “/2” is processed as a command is not printed.
However, by specifying n = 1 in this command, it is possible to switch “/2” to a space.

ESC GS / 6 n
Name Set partial cut before Auto Logo printing

Hex. 1b 1d 2f 36 n
Decimal 27 29 47 54 n
Initial Value n = 0
Function Sets a partial cut before the Auto Logo printing.
n Setting
0 Does not execute a partial cut before the Auto Logo printing.
1 Executes a partial cut before the Auto Logo printing.

When printing Logo2 and Logo3 as Auto Logo printing like the one in the drawing below, this
command selects to execute a partial cut before printing Logo2 of the Auto Logo and Logo3.
If a partial cut is executed using this function, it is possible to provide coupons, etc., that are
printed using Auto Logo with a partial cut.
Header
*********************
**************
MACDONALDS
MCDONALD’S
***************
********************
1.CHEESBUGER
1.CHEESEBURGER $2.00
2.COKE
2.COKE $1.00
-----------------------------------
- -- -- -- --- -- -- --- -- -- -
TOTAL $3.00
TOTAL $3.00
1. AutoLogo triggered by cut

command Partial Cut
2. User macro 1 is executed
Cheesebur
Header ger Logo2 is printed
3. AutoLogo is printed. Partial Cut

COKE Logo3 is printed
4. User macro 2 is executed.

Paper is cut.
Head logo is printed Header
********************
MCDONALD’S

4-3-8 STAR Original Buzzer Commands
ESC GS BEL m t1 t2
Name Ring buzzer

Code ASCII ESC GS BEL m t1 t2
Hex. 1B 1D 07 m t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 7 m t1 t2
Defined Area 1≤m≤2
1 ≤ t1 ≤ 255
1 ≤ t2 ≤ 255
Initial Value ---
Function Rings the buzzer.
m specifies the drive terminal of the buzzer.
m Buzzer Drive Terminal
1, 49 Buzzer Drive Terminal 1
t1 specifies energizing time; t2 specifies the delay time.

• Energizing time = 20 msec x t1
• Delay time = 20 msec x t2
The buzzer will not ring while printing.
Use of this command other than for ringing the buzzer is prohibited.
(There is the possibility of damage if using this command for driving the drawer on models
that support external device terminals.)
ON
Drive Pulse
OFF
20 × t1 (msec) 20 × t2 (msec)
(Energizing Time) (Delay Time)
Print Operation Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited

ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2
Name External buzzer drive pulse condition settings

Code ASCII ESC GS EM DC1 m n1 n2
Hex. 1B 1D 19 11 m n1 n2
Decimal 27 29 25 17 m n1 n2
Defined Area 1 ≤ m ≤ 2 49 ≤ m ≤ 50
0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255
1 ≤ n2 ≤ 255
Initial Value n1=0,n2=0
Function Sets external buzzer derive pulse condition.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal to perform the condition settings.
n1 specifies the energizing time; n2 specifies the delay time.

• Energizing time: =20msec x n1
• Delay time: =20msec x n2
ON
Drive Pulse
OFF

20 × n1(msec) 20 × n2(msec)
(Energizing Time) (Delay Time)
Print Operation Printing and Paper Feed Prohibited
Drives for external buzzers set using this command is performed by <ESC> <GS> <EM>
<DC2> m n1 n2.
The setting value is not initialized by <ESC> “@” and <CAN>.

ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2
Name External buzzer drive execution

Code ASCII ESC GS EM DC2 m n1 n2
Hex. 1B 1D 19 12 m n1 n2
Decimal 27 29 25 18 m n1 n2
Defined Area 1 ≤ m ≤ 2 49 ≤ m ≤ 50
1 ≤ n1 ≤ 20
N2=0
Initial Value - - -
Function Repeatedly drives the buzzer according to the ON/OFF conditions set by the external buzzer
drive pulse conditions command <ESC> <GS> <EM> <DC1> m t1 t2.
m specifies the buzzer drive terminal to drive.
Specifies the number of repetitions of the buzzer drive with (n2 x 256 + n1).
The buzzer will not ring while printing.
This command is prohibited for uses other than to ring the buzzer.
(If this command is used to drive the cash drawer on models that have an external device
terminal, the system will be damaged. Absolutely never use it for other purposes.)
The buzzer can be stopped by pressing the paper feed switch or opening the cover when it is
ringing.
[EX.]
n1 = 8
ON
Drive Pulse OFF
ON OFF
Print Operation Printing/Paper Feed Prohibited
(Note) If the off time is set to 0 (zero), it is possible to ring the buzzer
continuously for the amount of n1. For example, if on = 5 seconds, off = 0,
and n1 = 20 times, the buzzer will ring for 100 seconds.

4-3-9 Two-dimensional Bar Code 2D Code PDF417 Command Details
This command prints two-dimensional bar code 2D code PDF417.

There are four types of commands, according to functions, for two-dimensional bar code PDF417.
(1) Bar code type setting (<ESC> <GS> “x” “S”)
(2) Bar code data setting (<ESC> <GS> “x” “D”)
(3) Bar code printing (<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”)
(4) Bar code expansion information acquisition (<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”)

The following describes the functions in detail.
(1) Bar code type setting

These commands set the bar code type. Because these are all set with default values, they should be used only
when it is necessary to change. (Refer to section below for details on each setting.)
p1
START p2 STOP
PDF417 is configured by a fixed bar pattern for starting and stopping, and a bar pattern called a code word.
Code words are configured by 17 modules.
4 11111 3 5
<Code Word>
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “0” specifies values of p1 and p2.

USE_LIMITS mode specify the ratio of p1 and p2. USE_FIXED mode specifies p1 (line count) and p2 (code
word count per line).
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “1” specifies values of error correction levels.
PDF417 can read information even if a portion of the data is corrupted by using the error correction.
By increasing this level, the bar code size increases because there is more preparatory information.
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” and <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3” specify the size of the module that configures the code
word.
The X direction size (in dot increments) is determined by <ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” for the module, and <ESC>
<GS> “x” “S” “3” specifies the Y direction size from the aspect.
Module size setting is the basis for the bar code image that is generated, so the resulting print will vary accord-
ing to that setting.
Printable size of bar code

Vertical Size [dots] Horizontal Size [dots]
640 640

The settings above are set individually, so the errors described below may be generated even if there is no
particular problem in those settings. In such case, if the bar code is generated the (3) print command (<ESC>
<GS> “x” “P”) is ignored.
• Error is generated when generating a bar code, due to the combination of the bar code setting commands.
• The bar code data that is generated exceeds the printable size of PDF417.
• Print data exceeds the currently set print region.
It is recommended to use (4) Bar code expansion information acquisition (<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”) as a means for
checking these errors prior to printing.
(2) Bar code data setting command

This command sets the print data of the bar code.
(3) Bar code print command

• Standard mode
This command prints the bar code according to the settings of (1) and (2).
• Page mode
This command expands to the bar code image buffer according to the settings of (1) and (2).
(4) Bar code expansion information acquisition

This command checks whether it is possible to print the bar code according to the settings of (1) and (2).
- Precautions for use of commands -

• Unless the following operations are performed, the setting values are maintained for (1) and (2).
This setting value is held between both the standard mode and the page mode.
• Sending of new setting commands
• Sending an initializing command (<ESC> @, <CAN>)
• The power is turned off
• Sent each time for (3).
• Printing
• When printing, position shifting according to the horizontal tab, absolute position specification,
relative position specification, and position alignment is valid.
• Upside-down printing and two-color printing are possible.
• When a bar code is printed, always verify it by actual use.
Send the command transmission example last.
= ESC/POS standard mode =

1. Bar code type setting
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “0” 0 2 3: Sets the bar code size to USE_LIMITS = 2:3
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “1” 3: Sets ECC level to 3
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” 3: Sets the module X direction size to 3 dots
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3” 3: Sets module aspect ratio to 3
2. Bar code data setting

<ESC> <GS> “x” “D” 10 0 “0123456789”: Sets the bar code data
3. Printing bar code

To verify whether printing is possible with the current settings, check the bar code expansion information
<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”: Bar code expansion information check
<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”: Print

= ESC/POS Page Mode =
(1) Specify page mode
<ESC> “L”: Select page mode
(2) Set bar code type

<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “0” 0 2 3: Set bar code size to USE LIMITS = 2:3
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “1” 3: Set ECC level to 3
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “2” 3: Set module X direction size to 3
<ESC> <GS> “x” “S” “3” 3: Set module aspect ratio to 3
(3) Set bar code data

<ESC> <GS> “x” “D” 10 0 “0123456789”: Select bar code data
(4) Print bar code

Check the bar code expansion information to check whether to print using the current settings.
<ESC> <GS> “x” “I”: Check bar code expansion information
<ESC> <GS> “x” “P”: Expand bar code
<ESC> <FF>: Print

ESC GS x S 0 n p1 p2
Name Set PDF417 bar code size

Code ASCII ESC GS x S 0 n p1 p2
Hex. 1B 1D 78 53 30 n p1 p2
Decimal 27 29 120 83 48 n p1 p2
Defined Area n = 0, 1
When n = 0: 1 ≤ p1 ≤ 99, 1 ≤ p2 ≤ 99
When n = 1: p1 = 0 or 3 ≤ p1 ≤ 90, p2 = 0 or 1 ≤ p2 ≤ 30 (However, this excludes p1 = p2 =0)
Initial Value n = 0, p1 = 1, p2 = 2
Function Parameter details
n p1, p2
(Specify Method to Specify Bar Code Size) (Size Specification)
USE_LIMITS
p1: p2: Proportions of Vertical (p1) and Horizontal (p2)
0 (Specify ratio of bar code horizontally and
However, p1: p2 = 1: 99 to 10 : 1 (p1/p2 = 0.01 to 10)
vertically)
p1: Number of lines (0, 3 to 90), p2: Number of columns
USE_FIXED (0, 1 to 30)
1 (Specifies number of lines and number of However, p1 * p2 ≤ 928
columns of bar code.) When either p1 or p2 specifies 0, it indicates that that
setting value is variable.
Setting the bar code size using this command specifies the general size of the bar code. The size will automati-
cally be corrected according to the other settings.
ESC GS x S 1 n
Name Set PDF417 ECC (security level)

Code ASCII ESC GS x S 1 n
Hex. 1B 1D 78 53 31 n
Decimal 27 29 120 83 49 n
Defined Area 0≤n≤8
Initial Value n=1
• n: ECC level (0 to 8)

ESC GS x S 2 n
Name Set PDF417 module X direction size

Hex. 1B 1D 78 53 32 n
Decimal 27 29 120 83 50 n
Defined Area 1 ≤ n ≤ 10
Initial Value n=2
• n: Sets the module X direction size (x-dim). Units: Dots
It is recommended that 2 ≤ n when specifying using this command.
When using with n = 1, check by actual use.

ESC GS x S 3 n
Name Set PDF417 module aspect ratio

Hex. 1B 1D 78 53 33 n
Decimal 27 29 120 83 51 n
Defined Area 1 ≤ n ≤ 10
Initial Value n=3
• n: Sets the module aspect ratio (asp).
The module Y direction size (x-dim x asp) is set using this command.
It is recommended that 2 ≤ n when specifying using this command.
When using with n = 1, check by actual use.
ESC GS x D nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Name Set PDF417 bar code data

Code ASCII ESC GS x D nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Hex. 1B 1D 78 44 nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Decimal 27 29 120 68 nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Defined Area 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
1 ≤ (nL + nH x 256) ≤ 1024
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
1 ≤ k ≤ 1024
Initial Value ---
• nL + nH x 256 : Bar code data count
• dk : Bar code data (Maximum 1024 data)
When [nL + nH x 256] is outside of the definition, data of [nL + nH x 256] bytes is discarded.

ESC GS x P
Name Print PDF417 bar code

Code ASCII ESC GS x P
Hex. 1B 1D 78 50
Decimal 27 29 120 80
Defined Area ---
Initial Value ---
Function This command prints bar code data or expands it to the image buffer.
Also, this command is ignored if the following errors occur.
• When an error is generated when generating a bar code, due to the combination of the bar
code setting commands
• When the bar code data that is generated exceeds the printable size of PDF417
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region
When a bar code is printed, always verify it by actual use.
Standard mode
If there is unprinted data in the line buffer, after that data is printed, and this command
is executed, the bar code is printed. Therefore, it is not possible to print with other data
(characters, bit images, or bar codes) existing in the same line.
Page mode
This command only expands bar code data to the image buffer.

ESC GS x I
Name Get PDF417 bar code expansion information

Code ASCII ESC GS x I
Hex. 1B 1D 78 49
Decimal 27 29 120 73
Defined Area ---
Initial Value ---
Function When printing a bar code with the current settings and at the print starting position using
this command, error information is sent from the printer. Therefore, it is possible to check
whether it is possible to print before actually printing, by using this command.
If an error occurs, this command is discarded even if the print command (<ESC> <GS> “x”
“P”) is sent.
If the following errors occur, “Error” information is sent from the printer.
• When an error is generated when generating a bar code, due to the combination of the bar
code setting commands.
• When the bar code data that is generated exceeds the printable size of PDF417.
• When the print data exceeds the currently set print region
Transmission format: <ESC> <GS> “x” “I” n
n
0 No Error
1 Error

4-3-10 STAR Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands
This command is for models equipped with an expansion control function for page control of line unit commands,
by controlling the image buffer by page.
ESC GS g 0 m n
Name Print starting trigger

Code ASCII ESC GS g 0 m n
Hex. 1B 1D 67 30 m n
Decimal 27 29 103 48 m n
Defined Area m = 0, n = 0
Initial Value ---
Function Starts printing when there is unprinted data in the image buffer.
It is prohibited to send this command while in the raster mode.
ESC GS g 1 m n
Name Print starting timer

Code ASCII ESC GS g 1 m n
Hex. 1B 1D 67 31 m n
Decimal 27 29 103 49 m n
Defined Area m = 0, 0 ≤ n ≤ 255
Initial Value Depends on the model
Function Sets the print starting timer specified at n x 10 msec.
The print starting timer starts measuring from the point where the print data reception stops,
and measures up to the set print starting timer.
When the set print starting timer is reached, the printer starts printing if there is unprinted
data in the image buffer.
It is prohibited to send this command while in the raster mode.
n Operating Mode
0 Print starting timer = initial value
1 to 255 Print starting timer n x 10 msec.

4-3-11 STAR Original 2-Dimensional Bar Code QR Code Command Details
* Note that QR code is a registered trademark of DENSO WEB.

This command is for printing 2-dimensional bar code QR codes. There are four functions of the commands re-
lating to the 2-dimensional bar code QR codes, shown below.
(1) Set bar code type (<ESC> <GS> “y” “S”)

(2) Set bar code data (<ESC> <GS> “y” “D”)
(3) Set Star page mode (<ESC> <GS> “y” “T”)
(4) Print Bar code (<ESC> <GS> “y” “P”)
(5) Set bar code type (<ESC> <GS> “y” “I”)
The details of each function are described below.

These commands set the bar code type. Because all initial values are set, use these only to make changes.
(See the details for each setting below.)
Cell
Alignment Pattern
<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “0” Sets the model

Currently supported models are model 1 and model 2. Model 2 has a configuration including an alignment bar to
improve its support of weight to handle skewing when codes are large.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “1” Sets the error correction level
QR codes can be read even if a part of the data is corrupted, by using error correction. Raising this level in-
creases the size of the bar code because there is an increase in preparatory information.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “2” Specifies the size of the cell (One four squared region configuring the QR code)
The QR code is formed into a square of an equivalent size in the vertical and horizontal directions, but the size
of the bar code image that is generated depends on the cell size setting. See Appendix 9 for details on the ac-
tual printed size of the QR code.
These settings are individual settings. Therefore, even though there may not be any particular problem in each
of them, there is the potential for an error to be generated. (See the descriptions below.) In such cases, the bar
code will not be generated and the (4) Print command (<ESC> <GS> “y” “P”) is ignored. With the (5) Get bar
code expansion information command, an error code is returned.
• Error is generated when generating a bar code by the combination of each setting command.
• Print data exceeds the currently set print region
Therefore, it is recommended to use (5) Get bar code expansion information command (<ESC> <GS> “y” “I”) as
a means for checking for these errors prior to printing.

This command sets the bar code print data. There are four types of data that can be set using QR codes. They
are: numbers; English characters; binary; and Kanji. Furthermore, there are two types of data setting methods.
One is to specify these along with the bar code data (data manual analysis), and the other is to specify only the
bar code data (data automatic analysis).

(3) Set Star page mode
This command sets the expansion starting position and rotation information for bar code data expansion.
(4) Print Bar code

This command prints bar codes based on the settings of (1) to (3).

This command confirms whether to print bar codes based on the settings of (1) to (3).
= Precautions on using these commands =

• The setting values for (1) to (3) are held unless any of the following operations are performed.
• Sending a new setting command
• Sending an initialize command (<ESC> @, /)
• Turning the power OFF
• When there is an error in sending a command with (2), the set data is cleared and the command itself
is disabled.
• (4) is sent when necessary.
• Printing:
• When printing, position movement using specify absolute position, specify relative position, and
align position are enabled.
• Upside down printing and 2-color printing are possible.
• Printed bar codes should always be checked in an actual use.
The following is an example showing the sending of the commands.

<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “0” 1 Sets to model 1.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “1” 0 Sets mistake correction level to L.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “S” “2” 3 Sets cell size to 3 dots.

• <ESC> <GS> “y” “D” “1” 0 20 0 “2005, January, 1 (SAT)” <LF>
Sets bar code data (Data automatic analysis)
Sets bar code data (Data manual analysis)
• <ESC> <GS> “y” “D” “2” 9 1 4 0 “2005” “,”

4 2 0 “Year” “,”
1 1 0 “1” “,”
4 2 0 “Month” “,”
1 1 0 “1” “,”
4 2 0 “Day” “,”
4 2 0 “(” “,”
2 3 0 “SAT” “,”
4 2 0 “)” “,”

(3) Print bar code
To verify whether to print with the current settings, check the bar code expansion information.
<ESC> <GS> “y” “I” Check bar code expansion information

<ESC> <GS> “y” “p” Print

ESC GS y S 0 n
Name Set QR code model

Code ASCII ESC GS y S 0 n
Hex. 1B 1D 79 53 30 n
Decimal 27 29 121 83 48 n
Initial Value n=2
Function Sets the model.
• Parameter details
n Set Model
1 Model 1
2 Model 2
ESC GS y S 1 n
Name Set QR code mistake correction level

Code ASCII ESC GS Y S 1 n
Hex. 1B 1D 79 53 31 n
Decimal 27 29 121 83 49 n
Initial Value n=0
Function Sets the mistake correction level.
n Mistake Correction Level Mistake Correction Rate (%)
0 L 7
1 M 15
2 Q 25
3 H 30
ESC GS y S 2 n
Name Set QR code cell size

Code ASCII ESC GS y S 2 n
Hex. 1B 1D 79 53 32 n
Decimal 27 29 121 83 50 n
Initial Value n=3
Function Sets the cell size.
• n: Cell size (Units: Dots)
• It is recommended that the specification using this command be 3 ≤ n.
If n = 1 or 2, check by actually using.

ESC GS y D 1 m nL nH d1 d2 … dk
Name Set QR code cell size (Auto Setting)

Code ASCII ESC GS y D 1 m nL nH d1 d2 … dK
Hex. 1B 1D 79 44 31 m nL nH d1 d2 … dK
Decimal 27 29 121 68 49 m nL nH d1 d2 … dK
Defined Area m=0
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
1 ≤ nL + nH x 256 ≤ 7089 (k = nL + nH x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value ---
Function Automatically expands the data type of the bar code and sets the data.
• nL + nH x 256: Byte count of bar code data
• dk: Bar code data (Max. 7089 bytes)
• When using this command, the printer receives data for the number of bytes (k) specified by
nL and nH. The data automatically expands to be set as the bar code data.
• Indicates the number bytes of data specified by the nL and nH.
When processing Chinese character (Kanji) codes, two bytes is one character.
• Command analysis is terminated if the command is outside of the defined area. Bar code
data is cleared at this time.
• The data storage region of this command is shared with the manual setting command so
data is updated each time either command is executed.

ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1L n1H d11 d12 • • • d1k m2 n2L n2H d21 d22 • • • d2k ml • • • dlk
Name Set QR code cell size (Manual setting)

Code ASCII ESC GS y D 2 a m1 n1L n1H d 11 d12 … d1K
Hex. 1B 1D 79 44 32 a m1 n1L n1H d 11 d12 … d1K
Decimal 27 29 121 68 50 a m1 n1L n1H d 11 d12 … d1K
ASCII m2 n2L n2H D21 d22 … d2K ml … dlk
Hex. m2 n2L n2H D21 d22 … d2K ml … dlk
Decimal m2 n2L n2H D 11 d22 … d2K ml … dlk
Defined Area 1 ≤ a ≤ 255

1 ≤ m ≤ 4
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255
1 ≤ nL + nH x 256 ≤ 7089 (k = nL + nH x 256)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
1 ≤ I ≤ 255
Initial Value ---
Function Specifies the bar code data type and sets the data.
• a: Block count
• m: Input data type
• nL + nH x 256: Bar code data byte count
• dk: Bar code data (Max. 7089 bytes)
m Data Type Data Definition Region (d)

1 Numbers “0” to “9”
2 English Characters “”, “$”, “%” “*”, “+”, “-“ “.” “/”, “:”, “0” to “9”, “A” to “Z”, “a” to “z”
3 Binary 0x00 to 0xFF
4 Kanji (Shift JIS) 0x8140 to 0x9FFC, 0xE040 to 0xEBBF
However, the lower 8 bits are 0x40 to 0x7E, and 0x80 to 0xFC

• The printer receives the data type specified by m, and the data of the number of bytes (k)
specified by nL and nH, based on the block count specified by a.
• 1 block specified by a indicates m1, n1L, n1H, d11 • • • d1k (data type + data count + bar
code data), and by continuously sending these a multiple of times, one bar code data can
mix data types.
• It is possible to set a maximum of 255 blocks with one command transmission.
• nL and nH specify the number of bytes of the data, so when using Kanji, calculate that 1
character has 2 bytes.
• If this command is outside of the definition region, immediately stop the command analysis
process.
When doing so, the bar code data is cleared.
• This command data storage region is shared with the automatic setting command, so data is
updated each time either command is executed.
• When the data type is specified as the English Characters (m=2) and “a” to “z” are
transmitted, these are converted to the upper-case “A” to “Z” and the bar code are generated.

ESC GS y P
Name Print QR code

Code ASCII ESC GS y P
Hex. 1B 1D 79 50
Decimal 27 29 121 80
Defined Area ---
Initial Value ---
Function Prints bar code data.
Standard mode
When receiving this command, if there is unprinted data in the image buffer, the printer will
print the bar code after printing the unprinted print data.
Page mode
Only expands to bar code data image buffer.
A margin of more than 4 cells is required around the QR code. The user should ensure that
space.
Always check printed bar codes in actual use.
ESC GS y I
Name Get QR code expansion information

Code ASCII ESC GS y I
Hex. 1B 1D 79 49
Decimal 27 29 121 73
Defined Area ---
Initial Value ---
Function Sends information on generated image sizes and errors in bar code expansion using the
current settings. Therefore, it is possible to check whether printing is possible prior to actual
printing. If there is an error in the expanded bar code, this command is ignored even if the
expand command (<ESC> <GS> “y” “P”) is sent.
In the even that errors like the ones below occurs, “Error” information is sent from the printer.
• When there is an error in generating a bar code by the combination of bar code setting
commands.
• When the generated bar code data exceeds the printable size
Sending Format: <ESC> <GS> “y” “I” n1 n2

n1 n2 Bar Code Information
0x0000 Error
0x0001 to 0xffff Size around generated bar code (Units: Dots)


4-3-12 STAR Original Page Function Commands
ESC GS h 0 k m n
Name 180˚ inversion function

Code ASCII ESC GS h 0 k m n
Hex. 1B 1D 68 30 k m n
Decimal 27 29 104 48 k m n
Defined Area 0 ≤ k ≤ 1 m=0 n=0
Initial Value ---
Function Enables/disables 180˚ inversion function
n 180˚ Inversion Function
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
<180˚ Inversion Function>

Executes a 180˚ inversion by a 180˚ inversion trigger when this function is set.
However, this function is executed on print data built-up in the image buffer.
The 180˚ inversion function is ignored if there is print data longer than the image buffer.
Also, the 180 degree inversion function is ignored if printing is started by settings other than
the following 180 degree inversion trigger while the print startup control is set for each line, if
page mode is selected or if a macro is being registered or executed.
This setting is not cleared by <ESC> @ or <CAN>.
180˚ inversion triggers

• Cut command: <GS> V m n ,<GS> V m
• BM detection command: <GS> <FF>, <FF>
• Print start command: <ESC> <GS> g 0 m n
Usage example
1) 180˚ inversion function enabled: <ESC> <GS> h 0 k m n (k=0x01,m=0x00,n=0x00)
2) Print data transmission: Print data (Print length should be within image buffer length)
3) Trigger command transmission: <GS> V m n (Cutter command is 180˚ inversion trigger.)

ESC GS h 1 k m n
Name Water mark function

Code ASCII ESC GS h 1 k m n
Hex. 1B 1D 68 31 k m n
Decimal 27 29 104 49 k m n
Defined Area 0 ≤ k ≤ 2 0 ≤ m ≤ 2 1 ≤ n ≤ 255
Initial Value ---
Function Enables/disables water mark function.
k Water Mark Function
0 Disabled
Enabled
1
Prints 1 logo specified by n at position centered in horizontal and vertical directions.
Enabled
2 Repeatedly prints the logo specified by n from top edge of page to bottom edge of page at
position centered in horizontal direction.

To make the image appropriate for a water mark, set the logo data forming method to print as
the water mark using this setting.
If it is not possible to the appropriate image using this setting, reregister the logo data
registered as the water mark after forming it to the appropriate data.
m Water Mark Data Forming Method
0 Prints logo data specified by n as it is.
1 Thins logo data specified by n 25% for printing.
2 Thins logo data specified by n 12.5% for printing.
Specify the registered logo as the water mark.
n Logo Number
Registered logo number
1-255
If the specified logo number is not registered, the water mark will not be printed.
<Water Mark Function>

When the water mark function is enabled, the water mark is printed by a water mark printing
trigger.
However, this function is executed on print data built-up within the image buffer length.
Water mark printing is ignored when there is print data beyond the length of the image buffer.
Water mark is ignored when in 2-color mode, page mode, when registering macros and
when executing macros if printing is started by anything other than the following water mark
triggers. This setting is not cleared by <ESC> @ or <CAN>.
Water mark triggers

• Cut command: <GS> V m n,<GS> V m
• BM detection command: <GS> <FF>,<FF>,<GS> <
• Print start command: <ESC> <GS> g 0 m n
Usage example
1) Register logo to logo number 1 when using water mark.
2) Water mark function enable: <ESC> <GS> h 1 k m n (k=0x02,m=0x01,n=0x01)
3) Print data transmission: Print data (Print length should be within image buffer length)
4) Trigger command transmission: <GS> V m n (Cutter command is water mark print trigger.)

The logo of key codes kc1 and kc2 defined by “GS ( L <fn=67>” or “GS ( L <fn=67>” is possible
to print by the Logo number n of this command.
The following table shows the Key codes and logo number.
<SP> in the table below is space (20H).

4-3-13 Star Original Reduced Printing Function Command
ESC GS c h v
Name Set reduced printing

Code ASCII ESC GS c h v

Hex. 1B 1D 63 h v

Decimal 27 29 99 h v

Defined Area 0 ≤ h ≤ 255
0 ≤ v ≤ 255
Initial Value h = 0 (Horizontal direction reduced printing setting invalid)
v = 0 (Vertical direction reduced printing setting invalid)
Function Set reduced printing
h Set horizontal direction reduced printing
0 Invalid
1 Valid (67%)
2 - 255 Command ignored
v Set vertical direction reduced printing

0 Invalid
1 Valid (50%)
2 - 255 Command ignored
• Reduced printing in the horizontal direction compresses the entire horizontal direction 67%.
• Reduced printing in the vertical direction prints in Double Resolution mode, so this is invalid
in low peak current mode and powered USB I/F.
• Disabled in Page Mode.
• Reduced printing of barcodes can be enabled or disabled by memory switch setting.
However, cares must be taken as the print position other than the barcode is affected if
reduced printing is disabled.

4-3-14 STAR Original Text Search Commands
ESC GS ) B pL pH fn [parameter]
Name Set text search

Code ASCII ESC GS ) B pL pH fn [parameter]

Hex. 1B 1D 29 42 pL pH fn [parameter]

Decimal 27 29 41 66 pL pH fn [parameter]

Function Runs processes related to text search.
• pL and pH specify the parameter count (pL + pH x 256) in bytes after fn.
fn Function No Function Name

48 Function 48 Enable and disables text search
49 Function 49 Set the number of times to run the text search macro
50 Function 50 Set to print the string that matches in the text search
64 Function 64 Define the text search string
65 Function 65 Define the text search macro
66 Function 66 Define the timing of the text search macro execution
80 Function 80 Register text search settings and definitions in the non-volatile memory
81 Function 81 Initialize text search settings and definitions
96 Function 96 Print the text search settings and definitions
97 Function 97 Run the text search macro
< Text search functional overview >

Determines whether a string registered in the printer in advance is in the print data.
If it is included, run a text search macro that corresponds to that string after or before running the following trigger
command.
• Execute cuts by continous <LF>.
• <GS> “V”

< Text search functional overview >
The following gives an example of command transmission used to set the printer to print the “first logo” at the end of receipt when the
print data contains a character string “Cheese burger”.
Function No. Contents
1 1C 71 .. -- Register the logo as the first logo (see FS q).
2 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 51 00 Function 81 Initialize the settings and definitions of functions 48, 49, 50,
64, 65, and 66.
3 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 30 01 Function 48 Enable text searching.
4 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 31 00 Function 49 Set the text search macro to run once.
5 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 32 00 Function 50 Configure the print setting for the matched text string such
that the matched text string is printed.
6 1B 1D 29 42 11 00 40 01 Function 64 Set the text search string with string number 1 to “Cheese
01 0D 43 68 65 65 73 65 burger,” and set the text search macro that is executed
20 62 75 72 67 65 72 when this string is included to text search macro 1.
7 1B 1D 29 42 08 00 41 01 Function 65 Define text search macro 1 as a command to print logo 1
04 00 1C 70 01 00 (see FS p).
8 1B 1D 29 42 03 00 42 01 Function 66 Set the execution time for the text search macro that is ex-
01 ecuted when text search string 1 is included (text search
macro 1 in this case) to immediately before cutting.
9 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 60 00 Function 96 Print the settings and definitions of functions 48, 49, 50, 64,
65, and 66. Check the settings and definitions.
10 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 61 01 Function 97 Check the settings and definitions. Make sure the macro
runs properly.
11 .. 43 68 65 65 73 65 20 -- Send print data that includes a string such as that shown in
62 75 fig. 1 (“Cheese burger”) and a trigger command, and check
72 67 65 72 .. 0A 1D 56 to make sure that the printed result is similar to fig. 2.
42 00
12 1B 1D 29 42 02 00 50 00 Function 80 Register the text search settings and definitions to non-
volatile memory. After you make sure that everything works
properly, use this command to register the text search set-
tings and definitions to non-volatile memory. Afterward,
even if you do not send commands 1 to 10, you can obtain a
printed result such as that shown in fig. 2 simply by sending
print data such as that shown in fig. 1.
Before setting the text search After setting the text search
The first logo is printed becu-

ase the data contains the string
“Cheese burger”.

<Function 48> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m (fn = 48)
Name Enable and disables text search

Code ASCII ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m

Hex. 1B 1D 29 42 pL pH fn m

Decimal 27 29 41 66 pL pH fn m

fn = 48
m=0, 1
Initial Value Depends on setting registered in the non-volatile memory (At the time of shipment: m = 0)
Function Makes text searches valid or invalid.
m Set
0 Invalid
1 Valid
When text search is valid, determines whether a string registered in the printer in advance is
in the print data.
If it is included, run a text search macro that corresponds to that string before or after running
the following trigger command.
• Execute cuts by continous <LF>.
• <GS> “V”
• <ESC> “i"
• <ESC> “m”
No setting when the parameter is not a valid value.
This setting is applied to printer operations when this command is processed.
This setting is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS ) B <Function 80) command.
This command is ignored when the text search macro is running.
Disabled in Page Mode.

Name Set the number of times to run the text search macro

fn = 49
m=0, 1
Function Sets the number of times to run the text search macro when the strings match.
m Set
0 Run one time
1 Run for the number of times strings match

Name Set to print the string that matches in the text search



fn = 50
m=0, 1, 2
Function Sets the string print operation when strings match.
m Set
0 Prints the string
1 Does not print the string
2 Switches the string with a blank character

<Function 64> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m k d1…dk (fn = 64)
Name Define the text search string

Code ASCII ESC GS ) B pL pH fn n m k d1 ... dk
Hex. 1B 1D 29 42 pL pH fn n m k d1 ... dk
Decimal 27 29 41 66 pL pH fn n m k d1 ... dk
Defined Region 4 ≤ (pL + pH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 255)

fn = 64
1 ≤ n ≤ 100
1 ≤ m ≤ 100
0 ≤ k ≤ 32
32 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value Depends on setting registered in the non-volatile memory (At the time of shipment: no string
definition)
Function Defines the text search string for number n.
If the text search string for number n is already defined, it is overwritten.
M specifies the text search macro number to run.
K specifies the size of the defined data in bytes.
d specifies the defined data.
When the parameter has an invalid value, no definition.
This definition is applied to printer operations when this command is processed.
This definition is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS ) B <Function 80)
command.

<Function 65> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m k1 k2 d1…dk (fn = 65)
Name Define the text search macro

Code ASCII ESC GS ) B pL pH fn m k1 k2 d1 ... dk
Hex. 1B 1D 29 42 pL pH fn m k1 k2 d1 ... dk
Decimal 27 29 41 66 pL pH fn m k1 k2 d1 ... dk
Defined Region 4 ≤ (pL + pH x 256) ≤ 65535 (0 ≤ pL ≤ 255, 0 ≤ pH ≤ 255)
fn = 65
1 ≤ m ≤ 100
0 ≤ (k = k1 + k2 x 256) ≤ 7680 (0 ≤ k1 ≤ 255, 0 ≤ k2 ≤ 30)
(Size of defined area = 7,680 bytes)
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value Depends on setting registered in the non-volatile memory (At the time of shipment: no text
search macro definition)
Function Defines the text search macro for number m.
If the text search macro for number m is already defined, it is overwritten.
(k = k1 + k2 x 256) specifies the size of the defined data in bytes.
d specifies the defined data.
If the parameter has an invalid value, processing of this command ends at that point.
This definition is applied to printer operations when this command is processed.
This definition is registered to non-volatile memory by the ESC GS ) B <Function 80)
command.

<Function 66> ESC GS ) B pL pH fn n t (fn = 66)
Name Define the text search macro

Code ASCII ESC GS ) B pL pH fn n t
Hex. 1B 1D 29 42 pL pH fn n t
Decimal 27 29 41 66 pL pH fn n t
fn = 66
1 ≤ n ≤ 100
t = 0, 1
Initial Value Depends on setting registered in the non-volatile memory (At the time of shipment: Soon after
cutting)
Function Sets when to execute a text search macro when there is a match for text search string n.
t Setting
0 soon after cutting
1 soon before cutting

Name Register text search settings and definitions in the non-volatile memory
fn = 80
m=0
Initial Value ---
Function Registers the text search setting to non-volatile memory.
The following shows the contents to register.
Function No Contents
Function 48 Enable and disables text search
Function 49 Set the number of times to run the text search macro
Function 50 Set to print the string that matches in the text search
Function 64 Define the text search string
Function 65 Define the text search macro
Function 66 Define the timing of the text search macro execution
Function 81 Initialize text search settings and definitions
After registration ends, resets the printer.
The printer operates by reading the setting registered using this command the next time the
printer power is turned on.
Consider the life of the non-volatile memory and avoid over-sue of this command.

Name Initialize text search settings and definitions

fn = 81
m=0
Initial Value ---
Function Initialize text search settings and definitions
The following shows the contents to initialize.
Function No Contents Initial Value
Function 48 Enable and disables text search Invalid
Function 49 Set the number of times to run the text search macro 1 time
Function 50 Set to print the string that matches in the text search Prints the string
Function 64 Define the text search string No text search string definition
Function 65 Define the text search macro No text search macro definition
Function 66 Define the timing of the text search macro execution soon after cutting

Name Print the text search settings and definitions

fn = 96
m=0
Initial Value ---
Function Prints text search settings and definitions
The following shows the contents to print.
Function No Contents
Function 48 Enable and disables text search
Function 49 Set the number of times to run the text search macro
Function 50 Set to print the string that matches in the text search
Function 64 Define the text search string
Function 65 Define the text search macro
Function 66 Define the timing of the text search macro execution
The text search macro is not run at this time.
Name Run the text search macro

fn = 97
1 ≤ m ≤ 100
Initial Value ---
Function Runs the text search macro for number m.

4-3-15 Star Original Printer Information Transmission Commands
ESC GS ) I pL pH fn [parameter]
Name Set graphics data

Code ASCII ESC ) I pL pH fn [parameter]
Hex. 1B 29 49 pL pH fn [parameter]
Decimal 27 41 73 pL pH fn [parameter]
Function Executes printer information processing.

48 Function 48 Send the all kind of multibyte fonts

<Function 48> ESC GS ) I pL pH fn d1 d2
Name Send the all kind of multibyte fonts

Code ASCII ESC GS ) I pL pH fn d1 d2

Hex. 1B 1D 29 49 pL pH fn d1 d2

Decimal 27 29 41 73 pL pH fn d1 d2
Function Sends the all kind of multibyte font in the printer.
Details Sends in the following format.
ESC GS ) I pL pH fn k1 k2 [multibyte font kind1, multibyte font kind2, ..... ] LF NUL
k1 and k2 indicate the number of transmission data bytes (k1 + k2 * 256) after the multibyte
font types.
When there are multiple multibyte font types in the printer, they are delimited by commas
(2Ch).
The kind of multibyte font is sent as character string data.
Kind of multibyte fonts Transmitting string
Japanese KANJI JAPANESE
Simplified Chinese GB2312 CHINA GB2312
Simplified Chinese GB18030 CHINA GB18030
Traditional Chinese BIG5 TAIWAN BIG-5
Korean KOREA C-5601C
Exemple: When “Simplified Chinese GB18030" and "Traditional Chinese BIG5 " are installed in the printer:
ESC GS ) I pL pH fn k1 k2 CHINA GB18030 , TAIWAN BIG-5 , LF NUL
(k1 = 29, k2 =0)
When the multibyte font is not installed in the printer, the following data is sent:
ESC GS ) I pL pH fn k1 k2 LF NUL
(k1 = 2, k2 =0)

4-3-16 Star Original Individual Logo Commands
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn [parameter]
Name Set graphics data

Code ASCII ESC ) L pL pH fn [parameter]
Hex. 1B 29 4C pL pH fn [parameter]
Decimal 27 41 76 pL pH fn [parameter]

Function Executes graphics data processing.


48 Function 48 Send the registered individual logo CRC
49 Function 49 Send the registered individual NV graphics memory capacity
50 Function 50 Send all key code of the registered NV graphics

<Function 48> ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2
Name Send the registered individual logo CRC

Code ASCII ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2
Hex. 1B 1D 29 4C pL p
H fn kc1 kc2
Decimal 27 29 41 76 pL pH fn kc1 kc2
fn = 48
32 ≤ kc1 ≤ 126, 32 ≤ kc2 ≤ 126
Function Sends a CRC of the logo already stored in the printer.
Details • The CRC operation is used only for the logo graphics data currently stored in the printer.
• The key codes, size and color information are excluded from the CRC operation.
• When the printer receives the command, it calculates the CRC and sends it.
• If a logo containing multiple colors is stored, the logo data of the “n+1” color is added after the logo data of
the “n-th” color and calculated. •
• The CRC operation is as follows.
16 15 2 0
CRC16: P olynomial = x +x +x +x
Initial value: FFFF (Hex)
Shift direction: Right
Output XOR: FFFF (Hex)
* See the sample codes for concrete implementation examples.
• The CRC of only the stored logo can be sent by the “GS ( L” or “GS 8 L” command.
• When logo data is stored, the CRC of the received data is operated.
• If the logo data exceeds the horizontal print area, the CRC is operated based on the data that is received
when logo data is stored.
• A CRC of the logo, stored by the “FS q” command, cannot be sent.
The CRC is sent in the following format:

ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 CRC-data LF NUL
* The CRC data is converted into a character string and sent.
If a unregistered key code is specified, the following data is sent instead:
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 LF NUL
<Command processing flow>

Printer Host
ESC GS ) L ...
Calculate CRC of
key code specified
Send CRC

<CRC calculation procedure, sample codes, C language>
#define CRC16 0xA001
unsigned int CalcCrc16( int size, unsigned char data[] )
unsigned int result;
int i,j;
result = 0xFFFF;
for( i=0 ; i<size; i++)
result ^= data[i];
for(j = 0x0001; j < 0x0100; j = j << 1)
if( result & 0x0001 )
result >>= 1;
result ^= CRC16;
else
result >>= 1;
result = (~result) & 0xFFFF;
return result;

Notes • If a logo is registered by the “FS q” command, the logo data already existing is erased.
• If a logo is registered by the “GS (L” or “GS 8 L” command, the logo that has been registered by the “FS q”
command is erased and the new one is registered.
Reference GS ( L, GS 8 L

<Function 49> ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2
Name Send the registered individual logo CRC

Code ASCII ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2
Hex. 1B 1D 29 4C pL p
H fn kc1 kc2
Decimal 27 29 41 76 pL pH fn kc1 kc2
fn = 49
32 ≤ kc1 ≤ 126, 32 ≤ kc2 ≤ 126
Function Send the individual used capacity of NV graphics already stored in the printer.
Details • The used capacity is the total number of bytes of the used region.
• The management data (14 bytes) are also included in the use capacity.
• The only NV graphics memory capacity, stored by the “GS ( L” or “GS 8 L” command, cannot be sent.
• The NV graphics memory capacity, stored by the “FS q” command, cannot be sent.
Sends the used capacity in the following format:

ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 [ used capacity ] LF NUL
Ex.: When the used capacity is 1200 bytes:
“120” (Hex:31H, 32H, 30H, 30H, Decimal:49, 50, 48, 48) is converted to 4-bytes of data.
If a unregistered key code is specified, the following data is sent instead:
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 LF NUL

<Function 50> E S C G S ) L p L p H f n d 1 d 2
Name Send all key code of the registered NV graphics

Code ASCII ESC GS ) L pL pH fn d1 d2
Hex. 1B 1D 29 4C pL pH fn d1 d2
Decimal 27 29 41 76 pL pH fn d1 d2
fn = 50
d1 = 0, d2 = 0
Function Send all key code of NV graphics already stored in the printer.
Details Specification A
• All key code of only NV graphics, stored by the “GS ( L” or “GS 8 L” command, cannot be sent.
• All key code of NV graphics, stored by the “FS q” command, cannot be sent.
Sends all key code in the following format:
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn kc1 kc2 [ key code key code .... ] LF NUL
Where, k1 and k2 indicate the number of data bytes (k1 + k2 * 256) transmitted after the key codes.
Ex.: When a NV graphics with key codes 01 and 02 is registered,
a nd k1 = 6, k2 = 0, [“key code” key code” ...] is “0102” (Hex: 30h, 31h, 30h, 32h; Decimal: 48, 49, 48, 50)
When no NV graphics is registered, the following is transmitted.
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn k1 k2 LF NUL (Where, k1 = 2, k2 = 0)
Specification B
- If NV graphics are registered with “GS ( L” or “GS 8 L” command, all of their key codes can be sent.
- If NV graphics are registered with “FS q” command, none of their key codes can be sent.
All key codes are sent in the following format.
ESC GS) L pL pH fn k1 k2 [key-code key-code ...] LF NUL
Up to 512 key codes can be sent, but logo key codes exceeding this limit are not sent.
k1 and k2 represent the number of transmission data bytes (k1+k2*256) after the key codes.
Example: If NV graphics of key codes 01 and 02 are registered, k1=6 and k2=0. [key-code key-code...] is “0102” (30h, 31h, 30h,
32h in Hex; and 48, 49, 48, 50 in Decimal).
If NV graphics are not registered, the following data is sent.
ESC GS ) L pL pH fn k1 k2 LF NUL (where, k1=2 and k2=0)
If the USB interface is used, the NSB must be made invalid.

4-3-17 Star Original Audio Commands
ESC GS s O z a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2
Name Playback NV Audio

Code ASCII ESC GS s O z a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2
Hex. 1B 1D 73 4F z a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 115 79 z a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2
Defined Region Z = 0
a = 0, 1, 48, 49
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
1 ≤ c1 + c2 x 256 ≤ 65535
0 ≤ d1 + d2 x 256 ≤ 65535
0 ≤ t1 + t2 x 256 ≤ 65535
Initial Value ---
Function Plays back the specified NV audio.
a specifies the area where the audio data to playback is stored.
a Audio data storage area
1, 49 User area
n specifies the audio number to playback.
(c1 + c2 x 256) specifies the number of times.
(d1 + d2 x 256) specifies the delay time.
Delay time is the time from starting to process this command to the start of audio playback
(in seconds).
(t1 + t2 x 256) specifies the interval time.
Interval time is the time from the end of the previous audio to the start of the next audio (in
seconds).
Delay Time Interval Time Interval Time

Audio Audio Audio
Time
Start Command Processing End Command Processing
If audio is already being played back, playback after waiting for the end of the audio.
If the printer is printing, playback after printing is ended.
When the parameter has an invalid value, there is no audio playback.
If the audio data of the specified audio number has not been registered, there will be no
playback.
Audio will stop by inputting the FEED switch while there is audio playback using this
command.
Audio will stop using the NV audio stop command (ESC GS s P) while there is audio
playback using this command.

ESC GS s P
Name Stop NV Audio

Code ASCII ESC GS s P
Hex. 1B 1D 73 50
Decimal 27 29 115 80
Defined Region ---
Initial Value ---
Function Stops audio playback for the following reasons.
• NV audio playback command ESC GS s O
• NV audio lump playback command ESC GS s T
When run in real-time when this command is received
This command is ignored with there is no audio playback.
ESC GS s R z n1 n2 n3 d1 … dn
Name Playback received audio

Code ASCII ESC GS s R z n1 n2 n3 d1 … dn
Hex. 1B 1D 73 52 z n1 n2 n3 d1 … dn
Decimal 27 29 115 82 z n1 n2 n3 d1 … dn
1 ≤ (n = n1 + n2 x 256 + n3 * 65536) ≤ 16,777,215
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Initial Value ---
Function Does not register audio data in the non-volatile memory and plays back one time while
receiving data.
(k1 + k2 x 256 + k3 x 65536) specifies the number of bytes of the audio data.
d is audio data in sampling frequency of 11.025 kHz, ADPCM format in quantization bit rate
of 4 bits.
When data transfer from the host is slow (theoretical value: 44,100 bps or lower), playback is
intermittent.

ESC GS s I z e a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2 … 0xFF
Name Register automatic audio setting information

Code ASCII ESC GS s I z e a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2 … 0xFF
Hex. 1B 1D 73 49 z e a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2 … FF
Decimal 27 29 115 73 z e a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2 … 255
Defined Region z = 0, 1
0 ≤ e ≤ 63 (0x3F)
a = 1, 49
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ c1 + c2 x 256 ≤ 65535
0 ≤ d1 + d2 x 256 ≤ 65535
0 ≤ t1 + t2 x 256 ≤ 65535
Initial Value At the time of shipment: Set to automatic audio
e Printer Internal Status a n c1+ c2 x 256 d1 + d2 x 256 t1 + t2 x 256
0x00 Cutter error 0 1 1 0 0
0x01 Flash ROM error 0 2 1 0 0
0x02 EE-PROM error 0 3 1 0 0
0x03 SRAM error 0 4 1 0 0
0x04 Head temperature 0 5 1 0 0
detection error
0x05 Power voltage error 0 6 1 0 0
0x06 to 0x0F (Reserved) 0 0 0 0 0
0x10 BM Error 0 7 1 0 0
0x11 PE error 0 8 1 0 0
0x12 Cover open 0 9 1 5 0
0x13 NE error 0 10 1 0 0
0x14 to 0x1F (Reserved) 0 0 0 0 0
0x20 Head high 0 11 1 0 0
temperature stop error
0x21 to 0x2F (Reserved) 0 0 0 0 0
0x30 Idling 0 0 0 0 0
0x31 to 0x3F (Reserved) 0 0 0 0 0
Function When z = 1, the automatica audio setting information returns to the default factory setting. (At
this time, do not send parameters after e.)
When z = 0, register the automatic audio setting information to playback when the printer’s
internal status occurs.
e specifies the printer’s internal status assigned to audio.
a specifies the area where the audio data to set is stored.
1, 49 User area
n specifies the audio number to playback.
However, when n = 0, or audio data of a specified number is not registered, automatic audio
is invalid.
(c1 + c2 x 256) specifies the number of times.
(d1 + d2 x 256) specifies the delay time.
Delay time is the time from the occurrence of the printer’s internal status to the start of audio
playback (in seconds).

(t1 + t2 x 256) specifies the interval time.
Interval time is the time from the end of the previous audio to the start of the next audio (in
seconds).
You can register multiple times by repeating parameters e to t2.
Perform lump registration until 0xFF which is the end code.
When the parameter is determined to be free of error, the printer starts processing this
command.
When the parameter has an invalid value, there is no setting. (Sets already determined to be
free of problems are valid.)
This command should be specified a the top of the line. However, if there is unprinted data in
the line buffer, this command is executed after printing that data.
After registering automatic audio setting information, reset the printer.
Error processing mechanical operations or status processing and the like are not possible
while registering automatic audio setting information (the time from receiving 0xFF which is
the end code until printer reset is completed after automatic audio registration ends).
Audio will stop by inputting the FEED switch while there is audio playback using this setting.
Command Transmission Example
Cutter error • • • User area 12th/3 times/delay 2 seconds/interval 1 second,

Flash ROM error • • • User area 13th/4 times/delay 5 seconds/interval 6 seconds
ESC GS s I z e a n c1 c2 d1 d2 t1 t2
1B 1D 73 49 00 0
0 01 0C 03 00 02 00 01 00
01 01 0D 04 00 05 00 06 00 FF

ESC GS s U z n [k1 k2 k3 d1 … dk]1 … [k1 k2 k3 d1 … dk]n
Name Register user area NV audio data

Code ASCII ESC GS s U z n [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]1 ... [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]n
Hex. 1B 1D 73 55 z n [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]1 ... [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]n
Decimal 27 29 115 85 z n [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]1 ... [k1 k2 k3 d1 ... dk]n
0 ≤ n ≤ 255
0 ≤ [ k1 + k2 x 256 + k3 x 65536 ] 1 + … + [ k1 + k2 x 256 + k3 x 65536 ] n ≤ 1701888
0 ≤ d ≤ 255
I
nitial Value English (See table below)
n English Audio
1 Welcome !
2 Thank you !
3 Order coming in.
4 Drink Order coming in.
5 Food Order coming in.
6 Order has been Cancelled.
7 New order coming in.
8 Order to go coming in.
9 Print finished.
10 Please take your receipt.
11 Please come again.
12 Please give your receipt to the operator.
13 Now printing, please wait a moment.
14 Please do not pull the paper until printing finishes.
15 Thank you for visiting.
16 Please take the number ticket.
17 Please have a seat and wait a moment.
18 Thank you for your purchase.
19 Please wait here, we will guide you shortly.
Function All data already registered in the user area is erased when starting processing of this
command.
Registers n audio data to the user area. (However, when n = 0, nothing is registered.)
Audio numbers are set in ascending order in the order they are registered from user area
audio number 1 to n.
(k1 + k2 x 256 + k3 x 65536) specifies the number of bytes of the audio data.
d is audio data in sampling frequency of 11.025 kHz, monoaural ADPCM format in
quantization bit rate of 4 bits.
The size of the registration region is 1,662 KB (approx. 308 seconds).
This command should be specified a the top of the line. However, if there is unprinted data in
the line buffer, this command is executed after printing that data.
When the first parameter is determined to be free of error, the printer starts processing this
command.
If the defined area specified by the parameter is not empty, or if there is an error in the
parameter specification, register processing is aborted.

(The pre-registered and complete data is effective.)
The printer should be reset if audio data registration is completed or register processing is
forceably aborted.
Error processing, mechanical operations and status processing and the like cannot executed
while registering audio data (the time from when the first parameter is determined to be OK
until printer initialization is completed after registering audio data).

ESC GS s T a t1 t2
Name Batch Playback NV Audio

Code ASCII ESC GS s T t1 t2
Hex. 1B 1D 73 54 t1 t2
Decimal 27 29 115 84 t1 t2
Defined Region a = 1, 49
0 ≤ t1 + t2 x 256 ≤ 65535
Initial Value ---
Function Lump-playback of NV audio registered in the non-volatile memory from #1 in ascending
order.
a specifies the audio data registration area.
1, 49 User area
(t1 + t2 x 256) specifies how many seconds from the top to playback each audio data.
However, when (t1 + t2 x 256) = 0, plays back each audio data completely without specifying
the number of seconds.
Insert 1 second of interval time between the previous audio and the next audio.
Audio will stop by inputting the FEED switch while this command is running.
Audio will stop using the NV audio stop command (ESC GS s P) while running this
command.

5. CHARACTER CODE TABLE
Refer to the separate ” Character Code Tables ”.

6. APPENDIX
6-1 Appendix 1 Cautions
<Precautions relating to printing and paper feeds>
(1)This is a line printer. Printing is always accompanied by a paper feed. Therefore, if a value that is smaller
than the print data is set for one line of a line feed, paper will be fed more than the set amount to print that
data.
For example, if one line feed is set to 10 dots (10/180 inches), a paper feed of only 10 dots will occur, but if
printing a bit image, paper will be fed 24 dots.
Paper Feed Amount

Necessary Paper Feed Amount (Dots)
Font A 24 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Standard Characters Font B 24 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Chinese Character Fonts 24 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Font A 12 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Rotated Character Font B 9 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Chinese Character Fonts 24 x Vertical Direction Magnification
Bit Image (ESC *) 24
(2)When the printer enters a data wait state for data from the host, printing and a paper feed is temporarily
stopped, but when starting printing with data input, the paper feed can occur between 1 to 3 dots when
starting printing. This particularly affects printing of bit images.
(3)The auto-cutter is recommended to after printing more than ten lines or after a paper feed. (If the cut paper is
too small, it may not be easy to discharge, or can cause a paper jam.)

6-2 Appendix 2 Status Specifications
6-2-1 Identifying Transmission Status

The status of commands is identifiable because those transmitted by this printer use a dedicated but value. However, if using ASB, the three bytes after confirming
the first ASB byte, excluding XOFF, are processed as ASB data. Without this, it is not possible to identify statuses such as GS r (Send status) and statuses after the
second byte of an ASB.
Identification of Transmission Status

Command/Functions Status
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
GS I 0 * * 0 * * * *
GS r 0 * * 0 * * * *
X ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
X OFF 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
DLE EOT 0 * * 1 * * 1 0
ASB (1th Byte) 0 * * 1 * * 0 0
ASB (2th to 4th Byte) 0 * * 0 * * * *
6-2
6-2-2 Error Details Per Model
Error TSP600 TSP700 TSP800 TSP900 TUP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TSP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
Recoverable
Cover Open Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error
Paper out error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Near-end error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Auto-
Heat high
recovery ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
temperature error
Error
Auto-cutter error ○ x x x x x x x x x x x x
Non-
Power voltage
recoverable ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
error
Error
Thermistor error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SRAM error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FLASH error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
EEPROM error x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ x
Auto-cutter error x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Paper jam at
x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
presenter
ESC/POS Command Specification 6-2

6-2-3 DLE EOT Status
1. Printer Status (n = 1)
Contents Status Compatibility Per Model
“0” “1” TSP600 TSP700 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TSP500 TSO800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6 Undefined (“0”) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
5 Undefined (“0”) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ON LINE/OFFLINE
3 ONLINE OFFLINE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Status
Drawer kick
2 “L” “H” ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
connector pin #3
Presenter Cover Closed Open x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bit-2: Drawer kick connector #3 pin status is allocated for models not equipped with a presenter; presenter cover status is allocated to those models equipped with a
presenter. TUP900 is provided with a presenter, but this bit is invalid because it does not have a presenter cover.
6-3
2. Online Cause Status (n=2)

Bit Contents Status Compatibility Per Model
“0” “1” TSP600 TSP700 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
No
6 Error
error
Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Printing stops because Print

5 of paper out
None
stopped
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
No SW SW
3 Paper SW input
Input Input
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
2 Cover Status Closed Open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bit-6: Indicates this error is non-recoverable.

Bit-5: Bit-5 = “1” (Print stopped) when printing stops because there is no paper.
TSP600/TSP700/TSP800
When the printer is Busy in the Paper-end state and there is data in the receive buffer, this bit is set. While processing this command, this command is included
in the receive buffer.

3. Error Cause Status (n=3)

7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
No
6 Auto-recovery Error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
error
Non-recoverable No
5 Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error error
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
No
3 Auto-cutter error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
error
No
2 Black mark error Error ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
error
No
Mechanical Error Error x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x ×
error
1 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bit-2: Black mark error status is allocated for models not equipped with a presenter; mechanical error status is allocated to those models equipped with a presenter.
Black mark error status is set only when the black mark is enabled.
A mechanical error on models provided with a presenter represents a paper jam in the presenter and black mark errors.
4. Continuous Paper Detector Status (n = 4)

6-4

7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Paper out Has Paper
6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
sensor paper Out
Paper out Has Paper
5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
sensor paper Out
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Near-end Has Paper
3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensor paper Out
Near-end Has Paper
2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensor paper Out
Black mark White Black
○ ○ ○ x x ○ - x ○ x x x -
sensor status detection detection
1 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bit-2: This bit functions as the status indicating the near end sensor when the black mark is disabled. When using the black mark, it functions as the status to
indicate the black mark sensor status.
However, on TUP900/TSP1000/TUP500/FVP10, it functions as the status to indicate the near end sensor even when using black marks.

5. Presenter Paper Detector Status (n =5)

7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Undefined
6
(“0”)
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
Undefined
5
(“0”)
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Presenter Has Paper Out
3
paper status paper (Recovered) x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
Undefined
2
(“0”)
- - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6-5

6-2-4 ASB Status Specifications

This ASB status applies to the following I/F. The STAR mode ASB status is sent with a USB I/F. (Refer to the “STAR Line Mode Command Specifications Manual” for
details regarding the STAR mode ASB status.)
• USB
With the USB I/F on the models below, Star Mode ASB status is sent.
(See the Star Line Mode Command Specifications for details on the Star Mode ASB status.)
TSP600/TSP700/TSP800/TUP900/TSP1000/TSP700II Ver. 1.0 to 1.4/TSP650 Ver. 1.0 to 1.4/
TUP500 Ver. 1.0
• RS-232C
• Parallel
• Ethernet (See section 6-2-5 Printer Status Transmission Specification When Using Ethernet and Wireless I/F for details.)
• Wireless LAN (See section 6-2-5 Printer Status Transmission Specification When Using Ethernet and Wireless I/F for details.)
• Bluetooth
1. First Byte (Printer Information)

Bit Contents Status Targeted Status n Compatibility Per Model
“0” “1” Bit7 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TSP600 TSP700 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
6-6
Paper SW No SW SW
6 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
input Input Input
5 Cover Status Closed Open ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
4 Fixed at “1” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ONLINE/
3 OFFLINE ONLINE OFFLINE ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Status
Drawer kick
2 connector “L” “H” ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
pin #3
Presenter
Closed Open ○ x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Cover
1 Undefined (“0”) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
0 Undefined (“0”) - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Bit-2: Drawer kick connector #3 pin status is allocated for models not equipped with a presenter; presenter cover status is allocated to those models equipped with a
presenter. TUP900 and TUP500 are provided with a present er, but this bit is invalid because it does not have a presenter cover.

2. Second Byte (Error Information)

7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-
6 recovery No error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error
Non-
5 recoverable No error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error
4 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Auto-cutter
3 No error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Error
Black mark
2 No error Error ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
error
Mechanical
No error Error ○ x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
Error
Paper SW No SW SW
1 ○ x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
input Input Input
No
Online
waiting Wait for
0 recovery ○ x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
for recovery
wait
recovery
Bit-2: Black mark error status is allocated for models not equipped with a presenter; mechanical error status is allocated to those models equipped with a presenter.
Black mark error status is set only when the black mark is enabled.
6-7
A TUP900/TUP500 mechanical error represents a paper jam in the presenter and black mark errors.
3. Third Byte (Paper Detector Information)

“0” “1” Bit7 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 TSP600 TSP700 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TPS800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
Fixed at
7 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
“0”
Undefined
6 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(“0”)
Undefined
5 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(“0”)
Fixed at
4 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
“0”
Paper out Has Paper
3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
sensor paper Out
Paper out Has Paper
2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
sensor paper Out
Near-end Has Paper
1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensor paper Out
Near-end Has Paper
0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensor paper Out

4. Fourth Byte (Paper Detector Information)

7 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Black mark White Black

6 ○ ○ ○ ○ x x x x x x x x x x
sensor status detection detection
Undefined
5 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(“0”)
4 Fixed at “0” - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Undefined
3 - - - - - - - - - - Fixed at “1” -
(“0”)
Undefined
2 - - - - - - - - - - Fixed at “1” -
(“0”)
Presenter Paper Out

1 Has paper ○ x x x ○ x x x ○ x x Fixed at “1” x
paper status (Recovered)
Stack sensor
Has paper Paper Out ○ x x x x ○ x x x x x Fixed at “1” x
paper status
Undefined
0 - - - - - - - - - - Fixed at “1” -
(“0”)
Bit-6: This bit is set only when black marks are effective.
6-8

6-2-5 Printer Status Transmission Specification When Using Ethernet and Wireless I/F
With a wireless LAN I/F, the printer status sending specifications are Star Original Expanded Status Specifications
(*2).
See the table below for printer status sending specifications for Ethernet I/F.
(1) Printer Status Sending Specifications Automatic Status Sending Destination Specifications
Spec. Star Original Expanded ASB Specifications (*2) Distributes to All Hosts Connected to the Communication Port
Ethernet I/F Used Printer Status Sending Automatic Status Sending Destination
Specifications Specifications
IFBD-HE05/06 Star Original Expanded Status Distributes to All Hosts Connected to
(2) F/W Version (Main) Ver. Specifications
Spec. 1.0.1 (*2) the Communication Port
IFBD-HE05/06 ESC/POS Standard Status Sends Only to Host for Print Session
F/W Version (Main) Ver. Compatibility Specifications
1.1.0 (*1)
(*1) ESC/POS Standard Status Compatibility Specifications

In the same way as serial, parallel and USB, ASB is standard 4 bytes for ESC/POS, and the status using ESC/POS
inquiry commands (DLE EOT, GS r, GS I, ESC v, ESC u etc.) is 1 byte for ESC/POS.
NSB function is fixed at invalid (does not send automatic status to the connected host), and ASB function can be
set to valid/invalid.
(*2) Star Original Expanded Status Specifications

The following describes the Star Original Expanded Status Specifications.
With these specifications, ESC/POS standard status (ASB or other statuses) are sent embedded in expanded
status data attached to Star ASB.
See the STAR Line Mode Command Specifications for details on STAR ASB specifications.
NSB function is fixed at valid (sends automatic status to the connected host), and ASB function is fixed at valid.
The following will describe printer status transmission specifications for using an Ethernet interface and a wireless
LAN interface.
See the Star Line Mode Command Specifications foe details on Star’s ASB specifications.
1) Transmission Format
• For transmitting only STAR ASB

STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit 7 = 1) +
Length (Length = 0x0000)

• For transmitting printer status other than STAR ASB

STAR ASB (Second Byte Bit 7 = 1) +
Length + Status Data
<Length Details>
• 2 byte value indicating status data byte count (0x0000 ≤ Length ≤ 0x0200)
• When the status data is 10 bytes: Length = 0x000a
• Apply Length = 0x0000 to only transmit STAR ASB.
• When STAR ASB Second Byte B-7 is applied with Length, set to Bit-7 = 1
Status analysis detects the total byte count of ASB using the first byte of STAR ASB, and detects whether Length
is appended using the second byte bit-7 of STAR ASB. It is also possible to analyze the status by getting the byte
count of subsequent byte counts.

Status Data Transmission Format
2)
Status type + Separator character 1 + Data type + Status length + Printer status + Separator character 2
1. Status Type (2byte or 4Byte)

• First and Second Bytes
Indicate the cause to generate a printer status.
• ”00” Reserved
• “01” to ”09” Reserved
• ”10” to ”49” Status Original Status Request Command
• “50” ESC/POS ASB
• “51” to ”59” ESC/POS Real-time Status Request Command
• “60” to ”A0” ESC/POS Status Request Command
• “A1” ESC/POS [Header to NUL ] Block Status Request Command
• “A2” to ”FF” Reserved
• Third and Fourth Bytes
When a cause occurs, these indicate the command n parameter.
If there is no n parameter, the third and fourth bytes can be omitted.
<Ex.> When n = 0x31 using the ESC SYN 3 n command, the third and fourth bytes are “31.”
2 Separator character 1 (1 byte)

Sends “:”
3 Data Type (1byte)

Indicates printer status data; sends “B” (binary type).
4 Status Length (2 bytes)

2 byte value indicating printer status byte count.
5 Printer Status (Variable length)

Status sent by printer.
Status differs according to the cause.
See the command causes and automatic status for details on the content of statuses.
6 Separator character 2 (1 byte)

Sends “;”

3) Status Transmission Specifications List
STAR
Status Cause Length Status Data
ASB
Status Type Separated Data Status Printer Separated
First/
Third/Fourth
Second Character Character
Bytes Type Length Status
Bytes 1 2
n Parameter
Cause
ESC/POS ASB STAR
0x000B “50” Omitted “:” “B” 0x0004 Status “;”
Automatic Status*1 ASB
DLE EOT n STAR
0x000A “51” “01”≤n≤”05” “:” “B” 0x0001 Status “;”
Printer Status Request ASB
GS I n STAR “01”≤n≤”03”
0x000A “61” “:” “B” 0x0001 Status “;”
Printer ID Request ASB “31”≤n≤”33”
GS r n STAR “01”≤n≤”02”
0x0008 “62” “:” “B” 0x0001 Status “;”
Printer Status Request ASB “31”≤n≤”32”
ESC SYN 3 n STAR “00“≤n≤”01”
0x0011 “13” “:” “B” 0x0008 Status “;”
Presenter Counter Request ASB “30”≤n≤”31”
ESC GS x I
ASB 0x000C “16” Omitted “:” “B” 0x0005 Status “;”
Request PDF417 Information
ESC GS y I
ASB 0x000D “19” Omitted “:” “B” 0x0006 Status “;”
Request QR Code Information
ESC GS ETX n1 n2
ASB 0x000D “20” Omitted “:” “B” 0x0008 Status “;”
Print end counter request
ESC u n
ASB 0x000D “A0” "01" “:” “B” 0x0001 Status “;”
Status request
ESC v
ASB 0x000D “A0” Omitted “:” “B” 0x0001 Status “;”
Status request
GS ( L / GS 8 L fn48, 51, 64 Variable Variable Black

ASB “A1” Omitted “:” “B” “;”
ESC GS ) L fn50 length length Data
Command response request
* The MSW region differs by model.

(*1) ESC/POS automatic status is sent to all hosts connected to the TCP#9100 port.

6-3 Appendix-3 Blank Page Configuration
Blank code pages are code tables that are empty from character code 80H to FFH. They can be specified using
the command below.
• ESC t n (n = 255)
• ESC GS t n (n=255)
Also, it is possible to write data to the blank code page area using the command below.
• ESC GS = . . . . .
1. Example configuration of Font-A data. (12 x 24 font)
MSB LSB MSB LSB

d1 d2 0 0 0 0
d3 • • • • d4 0 0 0 0
d5 • • • • • • d6 • • 0 0 0 0
d7 • • d8 • • 0 0 0 0
d9 • • d10 • • 0 0 0 0
d11 • • d12 • • 0 0 0 0
d13 • • d14 • • 0 0 0 0
d15 d16 • • 0 0 0 0
d17 d18 • • 0 0 0 0
d19 d20 • • 0 0 0 0
d21 • d22 • 0 0 0 0
d23 • • d24 0 0 0 0
d25 • • d26 0 0 0 0
d27 • • d28 0 0 0 0
d29 • • • d30 0 0 0 0
d31 • • • d32 0 0 0 0
d33 • • d34 0 0 0 0
d35 • • d36 0 0 0 0
d37 • • • d38 0 0 0 0
d39 • • • • • • • d40 • • • 0 0 0 0
d41 • • • • • • • d42 • • • 0 0 0 0
d43 d44 0 0 0 0
d45 d46 0 0 0 0
d47 d48 0 0 0 0

2. Example configuration of Font-B data. (9 x 24 font)
MSB LSB MSB LSB

d1 d2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d3 • • • d4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d5 • • • • • d6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d7 • • • • • d8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d9 • • • • d10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d11 • • • • d12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d13 • • • • d14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d15 • • d16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d17 • • d18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d19 • • d20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d21 • • • d22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d23 • • • • d24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d25 • • • d26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d27 • • • d28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d29 • • • d30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d31 • • d32 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d33 • • d34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d35 • • • d36 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d37 • • • d38 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d39 • • • • • • • d40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d41 • • • • • • • d42 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d43 d44 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d45 d46 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
d47 d48 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6-4 Appendix 4 Standard Mode
EPSON has models that have 180 DPI and 203 DPI print heads. STAR’s print head is 203 DPI. Therefore, when
targeting models with the EPSON 180 DPI print head, it is necessary to correct the line spacing that will be caused
by the difference in the head’s print density. Correction is done using the memory switches (Print dot count: ESC/
POS Compatible Mode/Max). Setting the memory switches to ESC/POS compatible mode artificially makes the
number of dot counts the same as an EPSON printer. However, if the target model has a 203 DPI print head, cor-
rection is unnecessary so memory switches for print dot settings are not equipped.
6-4-1 Printing Region
1. TSP600/TSP700
Print Region Initial Values

Print Region Setting Printing Dot Count Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch
(Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Print region
Setting)
ESC/POS Compatible Mode 56 2 71mm
80mm
Max. 128 2 80mm
72mm
Max. 64 2 72mm
52.5mm
Max. 164 1 52.5mm
50.8mm
Max. 150 1 50.8mm
Basic calculated pitch initial value: X=1/180 (inch), Y=1/360 (inch)
2 TSP800

Print Region Setting Initial Value
104mm 64 3 104mm
3 TUP900
104mm 64 3 104mm
80mm 128 2 80mm
72mm 64 2 72mm
56mm 192 1 56mm

4 TSP1000
(Memory Switch
nL nH Print region
Setting)
80mm 128 2 80mm
72mm 64 2 72mm
55mm 184 1 55mm
52mm 160 1 52mm
47mm 120 1 47mm
42mm 80 1 42mm
5 TSP700II
Initial Value of Print Region
Print Region Setting Print Position Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch
Setting)
80mm
Max. 128 2 80mm
72mm
Max. 64 2 72mm
52.5mm
Max. 164 1 52.5mm
50.8mm
Max. 150 1 50.8mm
52mm
Max. 160 1 52mm
Basic calculation pitch initial value: X=1/180(inch), Y=1/360(inch)
6 TSP650/BSC10/TSP043/TSP650II
Initial Value of Print Region
Print Region Setting Print Position Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch
Setting)
72mm
Max. 64 2 72mm
50.8mm
Max. 150 1 50.8mm
Basic calculation pitch initial value: X=1/180(inch), Y=1/360(inch)

7 TUP500
Initial value of the print region
(Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Print Region
80 mm 128 2 80 mm
72 mm 64 2 72 mm
52 mm 160 1 52 mm
Basic calculated pitch initial value: X = 1/203 (inches), Y = 1/203 (inches)

* TUP500 can set the print region in 1 mm units.

• TSP800II
Print region initial value
Printing Region Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Printing Region
104mm 64 3 104mm
72mm 64 2 72mm
Basic Calculated Pitch Initial Value: X = 1/203 (inch), Y = 1/203 (inch)
• FVP10
Print region initial value
Printing Region Setting Printing Position Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch Setting) (Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Printing Region
72mm ESC/POS Compatibility 0 2 64mm
Mode
Max. 64 2 72mm
52.5mm ESC/POS Compatibility 120 1 47mm
Mode
Max. 164 1 52.5mm
50.8mm ESC/POS Compatibility 104 1 45mm
Mode
Max. 150 1 50.8mm
52mm ESC/POS Compatibility 112 1 46mm
Mode
Max. 160 1 52mm

6-4-2 Left Margin
• TSP600/TSP700
Left Margin Initial Value

(Memory Switch
(Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Left Margin
Setting)
80mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
ESC/POS COMPATIBLE MODE 32 0 4mm
72mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
52.5mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
50.8mm
Max. 0 0 0mm

• TSP800

(Memory Switch
nL nH Left Margin
Setting)
104mm 0 0 0mm
• TUP900

104mm 0 0 0mm
80mm 0 0 0mm
72mm 0 0 0mm
56mm 0 0 0mm
• TSP1000
Left Margin Initial Values

(Memory Switch
nL nH Left Margin
Setting)
80mm 0 0 0mm
72mm 0 0 0mm
55mm 0 0 0mm
52mm 0 0 0mm
47mm 0 0 0mm
42mm 0 0 0mm

• TSP700II

(Memory Switch
Setting)
80mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
72mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
52.5mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
50.8mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
52mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
• TSP650/BSC10/TSP043/TSP650II

(Memory Switch
Setting)
72mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
50.8mm
Max. 0 0 0mm

• TUP500

(Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Print Region
80 mm 0 0 0 mm
72 mm 0 0 0 mm
52 mm 0 0 0 mm
Basic calculated pitch initial value: X = 1/203 (inches), Y = 1/203 (inches)


• TSP800II
Left margin initial value

Printing Region Setting Initial Value
104mm 0 0 0mm
72mm 0 0 0mm
• FVP10
Left margin initial value

Printing Region Setting Printing Position Setting Initial Value
(Memory Switch Setting) (Memory Switch Setting) nL nH Left Margin
72mm ESC/POS Compatibility Mode 32 0 4mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
52.5mm ESC/POS Compatibility Mode 24 0 3mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
50.8mm ESC/POS Compatibility Mode 24 0 3mm
Max. 0 0 0mm
52mm ESC/POS Compatibility Mode 24 0 3mm
Max. 0 0 0mm

6-5 Appendix 5 Page Mode
6-5-1 Page Mode Print Region
EPSON has models that have 180 DPI and 203 DPI print heads. STAR’s print head is 203 DPI. Therefore, when
targeting models with the EPSON 180 DPI print head, it is necessary to correct the line spacing that will be caused
by the difference in the head’s print density. Correction is done using the memory switches (Print dot count: ESC/
POS Compatible Mode/Max). Setting the memory switches to ESC/POS compatible mode artificially makes the
number of dot counts the same as an EPSON printer. The page mode printing region initial value (= maximum
value) changes according to the basic calculated pitch correction when the memory switch print dot count in page
mode is set to ESC/POS Compatible mode. However, if the target model has a 203 DPI print head, correction is
unnecessary so memory switches for print dot settings are not equipped.
The following illustrates the basic calculated pitch correction of the print region in page mode on TSP700.
<Basic calculated pitch correction conceptual view; TSP700; Print dots = ESC/POS compatible mode; Print region
setting is 72 mm>
(0,0)
117.3mm
938 dot
STAR Printer
Print Head 203DPI
(0,0)
203 DPI
Correction
117.3mm
EPSON Printer 72mm

831 dot
576 dot
( 576,1876 )
Print Head 180DPI
(0,0)
180 DPI
Correction
STAR Printer
103.9mm
72mm
831 dot
512 dot Print Head 203DPI

( 511,1661 )
64mm
512 dot
( 511,1661 )

• TSP600/TSP700
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print Dot count: ESC/POS compatible mode>
Basic Initial Value (= Maximum Value)
Print region
Calculated Printable Region Width
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
Correction dxL dxH dyL dyH
Switch X Dir. Y Dir.
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
203DPI 128 2 84 7 80mm 117.3mm
80mm
180DPI 56 2 126 6 71mm 103.9mm
203DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm
72mm
180DPI 0 2 126 6 64mm 103.9mm
203DPI 164 1 84 7 52.5mm 117.3mm
52.5mm
180DPI 120 1 126 6 47mm 103.9mm
203DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm
50.8mm
180DPI 104 1 126 6 45mm 103.9mm
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print Dot count: Maximum>
Print region
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
203/180
80mm 128 2 84 7 80mm 117.3mm
DPI
203/180
72mm 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm
DPI
203/180
52.5mm 164 1 8 7 52.5mm 117.3mm
DPI
203/180
50.8mm 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm
DPI
• TSP800
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH)
Print region
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
203/180
104mm 64 3 128 6 104mm 104mm
DPI

• TUP900
Print region
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
203/180
104mm 64 3 96 9 104mm 300mm
DPI
203/180
80mm 128 2 96 9 80mm 300mm
DPI
203/180
72mm 64 2 96 9 72mm 300mm
DPI
203/180
56mm 192 1 96 9 56mm 300mm
DPI
• TSP1000
Print region
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
80mm -- 128 2 96 9 80mm 300mm
72mm -- 64 2 96 9 72mm 300mm
55mm -- 184 1 96 9 55mm 300mm
52mm -- 160 1 96 9 52mm 300mm
47mm -- 120 1 96 9 47mm 300mm
42mm -- 80 1 96 9 42mm 300mm

• TSP700II
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print positions: ESC/POS compatible mode>
Basic Initial Value (= Maximum Value) Maximum Value
Print region
Calculated Printable Region
Setting Printable Region Width
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
(DIPSW X Dir. Y Dir. X Dir. Y Dir.
Setting)
Setting)
203DPI 128 2 84 7 80mm 117.3mm 80mm 300mm
80mm
180DPI 56 2 126 6 71mm 103.9mm 80mm 300mm
203DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
72mm
180DPI 0 2 126 6 64mm 103.9mm 72mm 300mm
203DPI 164 1 84 7 52.5mm 117.3mm 52.5mm 300mm
52.5mm
180DPI 120 1 126 6 47mm 103.9mm 52.5mm 300mm
203DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm
50.8mm
180DPI 104 1 126 6 45mm 103.9mm 50.8mm 300mm
203DPI 160 1 84 7 52mm 117.3mm 52mm 300mm
52mm
180DPI 112 1 126 6 46mm 103.9mm 52mm 300mm
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print positions: Maximum>
Print region
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
Setting)
Setting)
80mm 203/180DPI 128 2 84 7 80mm 117.3mm 80mm 300mm
72mm 203/180DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
52.5mm 203/180DPI 164 1 8 7 52.5mm 117.3mm 52.5mm 300mm
50.8mm 203/180DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm
52mm 203/180DPI 160 1 84 7 52mm 117.3mm 52mm 300mm

• TSP650/TSP650II
Print region
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
Setting)
Setting)
203DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 250mm
72mm
180DPI 0 2 126 6 64mm 103.9mm 64mm 250mm
203DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 250mm
50.8mm
180DPI 104 1 126 6 45mm 103.9mm 50.8mm 250mm
Print region
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
Setting)
Setting)
72mm 203/180DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 250mm
50.8mm 203/180DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 250mm
• TUP500
Print region
Setting
Pitch
(Memory
(DIPSW
Setting)
Setting)
80 mm -- 128 2 96 9 80 mm 300 mm
72 mm -- 64 2 96 9 72 mm 300 mm
52 mm -- 160 1 96 9 52 mm 300 mm
• TSP800II
Printing Basic Initial Value (= Max. Value)
Region Calculated dxL dxH dyL dyH Printable Region Width
Setting Pitch Offset
X Dir. Y Dir.
(Memory (Set by DIP
Switch switches)
Setting)
104mm -- 64 3 208 7 104mm 250mm
72mm -- 64 3 208 7 72mm 250mm

• FVP10
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print Dot Count: ESC/POS Compatibility Mode>
Printing Basic Initial Value Maximum Value
Region Calculated dxL dxH dyL dyH Printable Region Printable Region
Setting Pitch Offset Width Width
(Memory (Set by DIP X Y X Y
Switch switches) Direction Direction Direction Direction
Setting)
72mm 203 DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
180 DPI 0 2 126 6 64mm 103.9mm 72mm 300mm
52.5mm 203 DPI 164 1 84 7 52.5mm 117.3mm 52.5mm 300mm
180 DPI 120 1 126 6 47mm 103.9mm 52.5mm 300mm
50.8mm 203 DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm
180 DPI 104 1 126 6 45mm 103.9mm 50.8mm 300mm
52mm 203DPI 160 1 84 7 52mm 117.3mm 52mm 300mm
180DPI 112 1 126 6 46mm 103.9mm 52mm 300mm
Page mode print region initial value (dxL, dxH, dyL, dyH) <Print Dot Count: Max>
Printing Basic Initial Value Maximum Value
Region Calculated dxL dxH dyL dyH Printable Region Printable Region
Setting Pitch Offset Width Width
(Memory (Set by DIP X Y X Y
Switch switches) Direction Direction Direction Direction
Setting)
72mm 203/180 DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
52.5mm 203/180 DPI 164 1 8 7 52.5mm 117.3mm 52.5mm 300mm
50.8mm 203/180 DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm
52mm 203/180 DPI 160 1 84 7 52mm 117.3mm 52mm 300mm
• BSC10/TSP043
Print region
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
Setting)
Setting)
203DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
72mm
180DPI 0 2 126 6 64mm 103.9mm 64mm 300mm
203DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm
50.8mm
180DPI 104 1 126 6 45mm 103.9mm 50.8mm 300mm
Print region
Pitch Width
(Memory
Switch
Setting)
Setting)
72mm 203/180DPI 64 2 84 7 72mm 117.3mm 72mm 300mm
50.8mm 203/180DPI 150 1 84 7 50.8mm 117.3mm 50.8mm 300mm

6-5-2 Usage Example of Page Mode
This section provides a detailed description of how to use the page mode.
The following outlines the representative command transmission procedures when using the page mode.
1. Page mode is used by the printer receiving the ESC L (Select page mode) command.
2. The print region is specified by the ESC W (Select print region in page mode) command.
3. The print direction is specified by the ESC T (Select character print direction in page mode) command.
4. Send print data.
5. The printer prints the print data send, using the FF (Print and recover page mode) command.
6. After printing, the printer recovers to standard mode.
<Example 1: Sample Program using Basic>

(It is already possible to send to the printer using file #1 with an OPEN statement.)
100 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H1B); “L”;
110 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H1B); “W”; CHR$(0); CHR$(0); CHR$(0); CHR$(0);
120 PRINT #1, CHR$(200); CHR$(0); CHR$(144); CHR$(1);
130 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H1B); “T”; CHR$(0);
140 PRINT #1, “Page mode lesson TEST 1”
150 PRINT #1, CHR$(&HC);
With the program in example 1, the print region of the size of 200 x 400 pitch is ensured from the origin point (0,0).
Printing is performed on that first line.
Print Paper
(0,0)
Print 200
Page Mode lesson
TEST 1
400 Print Region
The reason for the line break between lesson and Test 1 in the figure above is because it was automatically in-
serted due to the fact that a space could not be inserted after lesson in the horizontal direction in the print range
of 200 x 400 pitch. This line feed amount is a value specified by ESC 3 (Set line feed amount). Also, several print
regions can be set until FF is executed. However, when print regions are overlapped, an OR operation is used for
data that is newly written and data that was already written.
To delete only a portion of the buffered data, use the CAN (Cancel print data in page mode) command. CAN de-
letes all data in the print region currently specified. Therefore, specify the print region that encloses the portion to
delete using ESC W, then use the CAN command to delete that data.
However, be careful because the portion in the specified print region, even if a portion of the characters, will be
deleted.
<Example 2: Sample Program using Basic>
100 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H1B); “L”;
130 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H1B); “T”; CHR$(0);
140 PRINT #1, “Page mode lesson 2 CAN command”
150 PRINT #1, CHR$(&HA);
160 PRINT #1, “ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST1234567890”
Initially, send ESC L to switch to page mode (line number 100). Next, use ESC W to send eight arguments from xL
to dyH to ensure the print region. In this example, to ensure a printer region of the size of 200 in the x direction and
400 in the y direction from the origin (0,0), send arguments in the order of 0,0,0,0,200,0,144,1. (Line numbers 110
to 120) Also, specify using ESC T. Specify the print direction with 0. (Line number 130) These settings send the
print data “Page mode lesson 2 CAN command” and “ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST1234567890” (line numbers
140 to 160). By sending FF, (line number 170), the following will be printed.
(0,0)
200 Print Paper
Page mode lesson

2 CAN command
ABCDEF JKLMNO
400 PQRST1234567890
Print Region
It is possible to delete a portion of the data by adding the next program before sending FF.
190 PRINT #1, CHR$(&H18);
The character string GHI, in the figure below, is deleted as a result of adding the program above. Also, if deleting
using the CAN command, a space is used without filling the deleted portion.
(0,0) Print Paper

200
Page mode lesson

2 CAN command
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO
400 PQRST1234567890 Print Region

6-6 Appendix 6 CODE 128 Bar Codes, GS-1 Bar Codes
6-6-1 General Description of CODE 128 Bar Codes
With CODE 128 bar codes, it is possible to express one character of full ASCII128 character groups or two digits
numbers with one bar code character by combining 103 bar code types and three types of code sets.
• Code Set A Expresses ASCII characters of 00H to 5FH
• Code Set B Expresses ASCII characters of 20H to 7FH
• Code Set C Expresses two-digit numbers with one character
(100 types of 00 to 99)
Also in CODE 128, the following special characters are available.

• Shift characters (SHIFT)
In code set A, 1 character immediately after a shift is handled as a character from code set B.
In code set B, 1 character immediately after is handled as a character from code set A.
Note that this is not used with code set C.
• Code set selection characters (Code A, Code B, Code C)
Switches the following code set to A, B or C.
• Function characters (FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, FNC4)
The use of function keys depends on the application. Note that only FNC1 is used with code set C.

Code Tables
1. Characters printable with code set A

Transmission Data Transmission Data Transmission Data
Character Character Character
Hex. Decimal Hex. Decimal Hex. Decimal
NUL 00 0 ( 28 40 P 50 80
SOH 01 1 ) 29 41 Q 51 81
STX 02 2 * 2A 42 R 52 82
ETX 03 3 + 2B 43 S 53 83
EOT 04 4 , 2C 44 T 54 84
ENQ 05 5 - 2D 45 U 55 85
ACK 06 6 . 2E 46 V 56 86
BEL 07 7 / 2F 47 W 57 87
BS 08 8 0 30 48 X 58 88
HT 09 9 1 31 49 Y 59 89
LF 0A 10 2 32 50 Z 5A 90
VT 0B 11 3 33 51 [ 5B 91
FF 0C 12 4 34 52 \ 5C 92
CR 0D 13 5 35 53 ] 5D 93
SO 0E 14 6 36 54 ^ 5E 94
SI 0F 15 7 37 55 _ 5F 95
DLE 10 16 8 38 56 FNC1 7B,31 123,49
DC1 11 17 9 39 57 FNC2 7B,32 123,50
DC2 12 18 : 3A 58 FNC3 7B,33 123,51
DC3 13 19 ; 3B 59 FNC4 7B,34 123,52
DC4 14 20 < 3C 60 SHIFT 7B,53 123,83
NAK 15 21 = 3D 61 CODE B 7B,42 123,66
SYN 16 22 > 3E 62 CODE C 7B,43 123,67
ETB 17 23 ? 3F 63
CAN 18 24 @ 40 64
EM 19 25 A 41 65
SUB 1A 26 B 42 66
ESC 1B 27 C 43 67
FS 1C 28 D 44 68
GS 1D 29 E 45 69
RS 1E 30 F 46 70
US 1F 31 G 47 71
SP 20 32 H 48 72
! 21 33 I 49 73
“ 22 34 J 4A 74
# 23 35 K 4B 75
$ 24 36 L 4C 76
% 25 37 M 4D 77
& 26 38 N 4E 78
‘ 27 39 O 4F 79

2. Characters printable with code set B
SP 20 32 H 48 72 p 70 112
! 21 33 I 49 73 q 71 113
“ 22 34 J 4A 74 r 72 114
# 23 35 K 4B 75 s 73 115
$ 24 36 L 4C 76 t 74 116
% 25 37 M 4D 77 u 75 117
& 26 38 N 4E 78 v 76 118
‘ 27 39 O 4F 79 w 77 119
( 28 40 P 50 80 x 78 120
) 29 41 Q 51 81 y 79 121
* 2A 42 R 52 82 z 7A 122
+ 2B 43 S 53 83 { 7B,7B 123
, 2C 44 T 54 84 | 7C 124
- 2D 45 U 55 85 } 7D 125
. 2E 46 V 56 86 to 7E 126
/ 2F 47 W 57 87 DEL 7F 127
0 30 48 X 58 88 FNC1 7B,31 123,49
1 31 49 Y 59 89 FNC2 7B,32 123,50
2 32 50 Z 5A 90 FNC3 7B,33 123,51
3 33 51 [ 5B 91 FNC4 7B,34 123,52
4 34 52 \ 5C 92 SHIFT 7B,35 123,53
5 35 53 ] 5D 93 CODE A 7B,41 123,65
6 36 54 ^ 5E 94 CODE B 7B,43 123,67
7 37 55 _ 5F 95
8 38 56 ` 60 96
9 39 57 a 61 97
: 3A 58 b 62 98
; 3B 59 c 63 99
< 3C 60 d 64 100
= 3D 61 e 65 101
> 3E 62 f 66 102
? 3F 63 g 67 103
@ 40 64 h 68 104
A 41 65 i 69 105
B 42 66 j 6A 106
C 43 67 k 6B 107
D 44 68 l 6C 108
E 45 69 m 6D 109
F 46 70 n 6E 110
G 47 71 o 6F 111

3. Characters printable with code set C
00 00 0 40 28 40 80 50 80
01 01 1 41 29 41 81 51 81
02 02 2 42 2A 42 82 52 82
03 03 3 43 2B 43 83 53 83
04 04 4 44 2C 44 84 54 84
05 05 5 45 2D 45 85 55 85
06 06 6 46 2E 46 86 56 86
07 07 7 47 2F 47 87 57 87
08 08 8 48 30 48 88 58 88
09 09 9 49 31 49 89 59 89
10 0A 10 50 32 50 90 5A 90
11 0B 11 51 33 51 91 5B 91
12 0C 12 52 34 52 92 5C 92
13 0D 13 53 35 53 93 5D 93
14 0E 14 54 36 54 94 5E 94
15 0F 15 55 37 55 95 5F 95
16 10 16 56 38 56 96 60 96
17 11 17 57 39 57 97 61 97
18 12 18 58 3A 58 98 62 98
19 13 19 59 3B 59 99 63 99
20 14 20 60 3C 60 FNC1 7B,31 123,49
21 15 21 61 3D 61 CODE A 7B,41 123,65
22 16 22 62 3E 62 CODE B 7B,42 123,66
23 17 23 63 3F 63
24 18 24 64 40 64
25 19 25 65 41 65
26 1A 26 66 42 66
27 1B 27 67 43 67
28 1C 28 68 44 68
29 1D 29 69 45 69
30 1E 30 70 46 70
31 1F 31 71 47 71
32 20 32 72 48 72
33 21 33 73 49 73
34 22 34 74 4A 74
35 23 35 75 4B 75
36 24 36 76 4C 76
37 25 37 77 4D 77
38 26 38 78 4E 78
39 27 39 79 4F 79

6-6-2 General Description of GS-1 Bar Codes
Basic structure of data

Start character FNC1 AI Data check check Stop
digit A digit B character
Added automatically (d1...dn) Added automatically
Connection structure of data

Start character FNC1 AI Data check FNC1 AI Data check check Stop
digit A digit A digit B character
Added automatically (d1...dn) Added automatically
The following four special characters(SP, “(“, “)”, “*”) operate as shown below.
Special Characters
The first SP after d1 is the data division identifier for identifying (AI).
SP 20 32
The SP is reflected by the HRI but is not included in the encoding data.
( 28 40
) 29 41
The check digit calculated by modulus 10 is inserted automatically at the
* 2A 42 position specified in “*”.
The check digit is reflected in the HRI instead of the “*”.
Data added automatically is not entered in the HRI characters.
Special HRI characters are processed as shown below.

• Start characters (CODE A, CODE B, CODE C) are not printed in HRI characters.
• SP is used for HRI characters for function characters (FNC1 and FNC3) and control characters (00H to
1FH and 7FH).
• HRI characters for SP and “(“,”)” are printed as they are.
• The check digit is printed in the “*” position.
The available data ranges for each code set (CODE A, CODE B, CODE C) are shown in the following table.
Bar code data for special characters (FNC1, FNC3) or “(“,”)”, “*”, “{“ sends double-byte characters as shown in
the following table.

d character d character
Hex. Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C Hex. Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C
00 0 NUL 00 25 37 % % 37
01 1 SOH 01 26 38 & & 38
02 2 STX 02 27 39 ‘ ‘ 39
03 3 ETX 03 7B, 28 123, 40 ( ( 40
04 4 EOT 04 7B, 29 123, 41 ) ) 41
05 5 ENQ 05 7B, 2A 123, 42 * * 42
06 6 ACK 06 2B 43 + + 43
07 7 BEL 07 2C 44 , , 44
08 8 BS 08 2D 45 - - 45
09 9 HT 09 2E 46 . . 46
0A 10 LF 10 2F 47 / / 47
0B 11 VT 11 30 48 0 0 48
0C 12 FF 12 31 49 1 1 49
0D 13 CR 13 32 50 2 2 50
0E 14 SO 14 33 51 3 3 51
0F 15 SI 15 34 52 4 4 52
10 16 DLE 16 35 53 5 5 53
11 17 DC1 17 36 54 6 6 54
12 18 DC2 18 37 55 7 7 55
13 19 DC3 19 38 56 8 8 56
14 20 DC4 20 39 57 9 9 57
15 21 NAK 21 3A 58 : : 58
16 22 SYN 22 3B 59 ; ; 59
17 23 ETB 23 3C 60 < < 60
18 24 CAN 24 3D 61 = = 61
19 25 EM 25 3E 62 > > 62
1A 26 SUB 26 3F 63 ? ? 63
1B 27 ESC 27 40 64 @ @ 64
1C 28 FS 28 41 65 A A 65
1D 29 GS 29 42 66 B B 66
1E 30 RS 30 43 67 C C 67
1F 31 US 31 44 68 D D 68
20 32 45 69 E E 69
21 33 ! ! 33 46 70 F F 70
22 34 “ “ 34 47 71 G G 71
23 35 # # 35 48 72 H H 72
24 36 $ $ 36 49 73 I I 73

d character d character
Hex. Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C Hex. Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C
4A 74 J J 74 6F 111 o
4B 75 K K 75 70 112 p
4C 76 L L 76 71 113 q
4D 77 M M 77 72 114 r
4E 78 N N 78 73 115 s
4F 79 O O 79 74 116 t
50 80 P P 80 75 117 u
51 81 Q Q 81 76 118 v
52 82 R R 82 77 119 w
53 83 S S 83 78 120 x
54 84 T T 84 79 121 y
55 85 U U 85 7A 122 z
56 86 V V 86 7B, 7B 123, 123 {
57 87 W W 87 7C 124 |
58 88 X X 88 7D 125 }
59 89 Y Y 89 7E 126 ~
5A 90 Z Z 90 7F 127 DEL
5B 91 [ [ 91
5C 92 \ \ 92
5D 93 ] ] 93 d character
5E 94 ^ ^ 94 Hex. Decimal CODE A CODE B CODE C
5F 95 _ _ 95 7B, 31 123, 49 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
60 96 ` 96 7B, 33 123, 51 FNC3 FNC3
61 97 a 97 20 32 SP SP SP
62 98 b 98 28 40 ( ( (
63 99 c 99 29 41 ) ) )
64 100 d 2A 42 * * *
65 101 e
66 102 f
67 103 g
68 104 h
69 105 i
6A 106 j
6B 107 k
6C 108 l
6D 109 m
6E 110 n

6-6-3 GS1 Databar Omnidirectional
Sends 13 digits of data except for AI (application identifiers) and check digits.
AI (“01”) is added automatically.
One check digit is added automatically.
When HRI printing is enabled, 18 digits of [“(01)”, (d1...d13), check digit] are printed by the HRI.
When the setting for the bar code height is smaller than [module width x33], the bar code height is printed at the
[module width x33]. (Except for HRI heights)
6-6-4 GS1 Databar Truncated
AI (“01”) is added automatically.
One check digit is added automatically.
6-6-5 GS1 Databar Limited
6-6-6 GS1 Databar Expanded
When sending special characters (FNC1) or “(“,”)”, the following double-byte data is sent.
Send data
Data ASCII Hex. Decimal
FNC1 {+1 7B + 31 123 + 49
( {+( 7B + 28 123 + 40
) {+) 7B + 29 123 + 41
The special character (“(“,”)”) is processed as shown in the following table.

Special characters
character Hex. Decimal
( 28 40 “(“ is entered in the HRI character. AI can be highlighted by using in com-
bination with “)”. “) “ is not encoded.
) 29 41 The first “)” after d1 is handled as an AI and the data divider.
“)” is entered in the HRI character. “) “ is not encoded.
When HRI character printing is enabled, special characters are handled in the HRI as shown below.
Control characters (FNC1) are not printed.
Special characters (“(“,”)”) are printed.
Bar code data [“{“ + (“(“, “)”)] is printed as (“(“, “)”).

6-7 Appendix 9 Maximum Number of Input Characters for Each Version of QR Code
1) Model 1 Version and Maximum Number of Input Characters

Mistake
Cell Count on Number of English
Version Correction Binary Kanji
One Side Characters Characters
Level
1 21 L 40 24 17 10
M 33 20 14 8
Q 25 15 11 6
H 16 10 7 4
2 25 L 81 49 34 20
M 66 40 28 17
Q 52 31 22 13
H 33 20 14 8
3 29 L 131 79 55 33
M 100 60 42 25
Q 81 49 34 20
H 52 31 22 13
4 33 L 186 113 78 48
M 138 84 58 35
Q 114 69 48 29
H 76 46 32 19
5 37 L 253 154 106 65
M 191 116 80 49
Q 157 95 66 40
H 105 63 44 27
6 41 L 321 194 134 82
M 249 151 104 64
Q 201 122 84 51
H 133 81 56 34
7 45 L 402 244 168 103
M 311 188 130 80
Q 253 154 106 65
H 167 101 70 43
8 49 L 493 299 206 126
M 378 229 158 97
Q 301 183 126 77
H 203 123 85 52
9 53 L 585 354 244 150
M 441 267 184 113
Q 369 223 154 94
H 239 145 100 61
10 57 L 690 418 287 177
M 526 319 219 135
Q 433 262 180 111
H 291 176 121 74
11 61 L 800 485 333 205
M 608 368 253 156
Q 493 299 205 126
H 342 207 142 87
12 65 L 915 555 381 234
M 694 421 289 178
Q 579 351 241 148
H 390 236 162 100
13 69 L 1030 624 429 264
M 790 479 329 202
Q 656 398 273 168
H 454 275 189 116
14 73 L 1167 707 486 299
M 877 531 365 225
Q 738 447 307 189
H 498 302 207 127

2) Model 2 Version and Maximum Number of Input Characters
Cell Count on One Mistake Number of English
Version Binary Kanji
Side Correction Level Characters Characters
1 21 L 41 25 17 10
M 34 20 14 8
Q 27 16 11 7
H 17 10 7 4
2 25 L 77 47 32 20
M 63 38 26 16
Q 48 29 20 12
H 34 20 14 8
3 29 L 127 77 53 32
M 101 61 42 26
Q 77 47 32 20
H 58 35 24 15
4 33 L 187 114 78 48
M 149 90 62 38
Q 111 67 46 28
H 82 50 34 21
5 37 L 255 154 106 65
M 202 122 84 52
Q 144 87 60 37
H 106 64 44 27
6 41 L 322 195 134 82
M 255 154 106 65
Q 178 108 74 45
H 139 84 58 36
7 45 L 370 224 154 95
M 293 178 122 75
Q 207 125 86 53
H 154 93 64 39
8 49 L 461 279 192 118
M 365 221 152 93
Q 259 157 108 66
H 202 122 84 52
9 53 L 552 335 230 141
M 432 262 180 111
Q 312 189 130 80
H 235 143 98 60
10 57 L 652 395 271 167
M 513 311 213 131
Q 364 221 151 93
H 288 174 119 74
11 61 L 772 468 321 198
M 604 366 251 155
Q 427 259 177 109
H 331 200 137 85
12 65 L 883 535 367 226
M 691 419 287 177
Q 489 296 203 125
H 374 227 155 96
13 69 L 1022 619 425 262
M 796 483 331 204
Q 580 352 241 149
H 427 259 177 109
14 73 L 1101 667 458 282
M 871 528 362 223
Q 621 376 258 159
H 468 283 194 120
15 77 L 1250 758 520 320
M 991 600 412 254
Q 703 426 292 180
H 530 321 220 136

Cell Count on Mistake Number of English
Version Binary Kanji
One Side Correction Level Characters Characters
16 81 L 1408 854 586 361
M 1082 656 450 277
Q 775 470 322 198
H 602 365 250 154
17 85 L 1548 938 644 397
M 1212 734 504 310
Q 876 531 364 224
H 674 408 280 173
18 89 L 1725 1046 718 442
M 1346 816 560 345
Q 948 574 394 243
H 746 452 310 191
19 93 L 1903 1153 792 488
M 1500 909 624 384
Q 1063 644 442 272
H 813 493 338 208
20 97 L 2061 1249 858 528
M 1600 970 666 410
Q 1159 702 482 297
H 919 557 382 235
21 101 L 2232 1352 929 572
M 1708 1035 711 438
Q 1224 742 509 314
H 969 587 403 248
22 105 L 2409 1460 1003 618
M 1872 1134 779 480
Q 1358 823 565 348
H 1056 640 439 270
23 109 L 2620 1588 1091 672
M 2059 1248 857 528
Q 1468 890 611 376
H 1108 672 461 284
24 113 L 2812 1704 1171 721
M 2188 1326 911 561
Q 1588 963 661 407
H 1228 744 511 315
25 117 L 3057 1853 1273 784
M 2395 1451 997 614
Q 1718 1041 715 440
H 1286 779 535 330
26 121 L 3283 1990 1367 842
M 2544 1542 1059 652
Q 1804 1094 751 462
H 1425 864 593 365
27 125 L 3514 2132 1465 902
M 2701 1637 1125 692
Q 1933 1172 805 496
H 1501 910 625 385
28 129 L 3669 2223 1528 940
M 2857 1732 1190 732
Q 2085 1263 868 534
H 1581 958 658 405
29 133 L 3909 2369 1628 1002
M 3035 1839 1264 778
Q 2181 1322 908 559
H 1677 1016 698 430
30 137 L 4158 2520 1732 1066
M 3289 1994 1370 843
Q 2358 1429 982 604
H 1782 1080 742 457

Mistake
Cell Count on Number of English
Version Correction Binary Kanji
One Side Characters Characters
Level
31 141 L 4417 2677 1840 1132
M 3486 2113 1452 894
Q 2473 1499 1030 634
H 1897 1150 790 486
32 145 L 4686 2840 1952 1201
M 3693 2238 1538 947
Q 2670 1618 1112 684
H 2022 1226 842 518
33 149 L 4965 3009 2068 1273
M 3909 2369 1628 1002
Q 2805 1700 1168 719
H 2157 1307 898 553
34 153 L 5253 3183 2188 1347
M 4134 2506 1722 1060
Q 2949 1787 1228 756
H 2301 1394 958 590
35 157 L 5529 3351 2303 1417
M 4343 2632 1809 1113
Q 3081 1867 1283 790
H 2361 1431 983 605
36 161 L 5836 3537 2431 1496
M 4588 2780 1911 1176
Q 3244 1966 1351 832
H 2524 1530 1051 647
37 165 L 6153 3729 2563 1577
M 4775 2894 1989 1224
Q 3417 2071 1423 876
H 2625 1591 1093 673
38 169 L 6479 3927 2699 1661
M 5039 3054 2099 1292
Q 3599 2181 1499 923
H 2735 1658 1139 701
39 173 L 6743 4087 2809 1729
M 5313 3220 2213 1362
Q 3791 2298 1579 972
H 2927 1774 1219 750
40 177 L 7089 4296 2953 1817
M 5596 3391 2331 1435
Q 3993 2420 1663 1024
H 3057 1852 1273 784

6-8 Appendix 10
Explanation of Print Startup Control Starting Printing When Set to Page Units
When print startup control is set to page units, printing starts when the image buffer length is full or the following
commands are run.
If the following commands are not received, start printing after a 1-second timeout.
For details on image buffer length and how to set print startup control, see the product specifications manual.
Print starting trigger

• Cutter command: <GS> V n, <GS> V m n
• BM detection command: <GS> <FF>, <FF> (When BM is valid)
• Print startup command: <ESC><GS> g 0 m n

6-9 Appendix 11
Explanation of Printing NV bit image data defined by
“GS ( L <fn=67>” or “GS ( 8 <fn=67>”, by “FS p” commmand
The portion of NV bit image data defined by “GS ( L <fn=67>” or “GS ( 8 <fn=67>” is possible to print by FS p n
command. The following table shows the contrast table of the parameter at that time. <SP> in the table below is
space (20H).

6-10 Appendix 12 Special Specifications when the Bluetooth Interface (IFBD-HB03) is used
6-10-1 Self-printing
1) When the Bluetooth information is printed at the end of self-printing, the communication with the host device is
terminated.
Therefore, if you continue to transmit data using commands after self-printing, you need to open the virtual COM
port again.

7. APPENDIX COMMAND LIST BY MODEL
7-1 RS-232C Interface
• Standard Commands
Commands Model Name
TSP700 TSP600 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
HT ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CR x x x x x x x x x x x x x
CAN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. B-1 Spec. B-1 Spec. B-1
Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.0
or older or older or older
DLE EOT Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2
Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2
Ver. 2.0 or Ver. 2.0 or Ver. 2.0 or
later later later
DLE ENQ x ○ x x x x x x x x x x x
DLE DC4 ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC SP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC $ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC % ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC & ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC * ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC = ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ? ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC @ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC G ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC J ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
to Ver. 1.2 to Ver. 1.2
ESC R Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B
Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 1.3 or Ver. 1.3 or
later later
ESC S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC T ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC \ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC a ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC c 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC c 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC c 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC d ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC p ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC t Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
ESC { ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Model Name
Commands TSP700 TSP600 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
FS g 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
FS p ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS q ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS $ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS * ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS (K　(fn=49) x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C
GS (K　(fn=50) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
GS (L　(fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0
GS (L　(fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS 8 L　(fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0
GS 8L　(fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( N x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○
×
Ver.2.0
or later
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
×
Ver.2.0
or later

Model Name
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) x x x x x x x x x x x x or later
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
GS / ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS : ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS C 0 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 1 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C : x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS E x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS H ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 4.4 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.1
or older or older or older or older
GS I Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 4.5 or Ver. 3.1 or Ver. 3.1 or Ver. 3.2 or
later later later later
GS L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS P ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS T x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS \ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ^ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
GS b x x x x x x x x x x or later or later ○
GS c x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS f ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS h ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A:
Ver. 1.2
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A or older
GS k Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. A,B,C
:Ver.2.0
or later
GS r ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS v 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS w ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

• Kanji Control Commands (DBCS Settings, Kanji Specifications Only)
Commands Model Name
TSP700 TSP600 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TUP500 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650I
FS ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS & Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. A
FS - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS . ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
• ESC/POS Black Mark Related Commands (When black marks are effective)
Commands Model Name
FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
DLE ENQ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS FF x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS ( F x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=1 x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x x
GS < ○ ○ ○ x x ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x

• STAR Original Commands
Commands Model Name
ESC GS = ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS t Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
ESC GS + x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver1.0 Ver1.0 Ver1.0 Ver1.0
to 4.4 to 2.0 to 2.0 to 2.0
ESCGS#m Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C
Spec.C Spec.C Spec.C Spec.C
or later or later or later or later
ESCRSF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESCRSC x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.0
ESCRSL x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Spec. B Spec. B
later later
Ver. 2.0 Ver. 2.0 Ver. 2.0
ESCGSETX x x x x x or later or later or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
• STAR Original Presenter Control Commands

Commands Model Name
ESC SYN 0 x x x ○ x x x ○ x x x x x
ESC GS SUB DC1 x x x x x x x ○ x x x x x

• Star Original Mark Commands
Commands Model Name
Ver4.0 Ver3.0
ESC GS * 0
or later x x or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver4.0 Ver3.0
ESC GS * 1
Ver4.0 Ver3.0
ESC GS * 2
Ver4.0 Ver3.0
ESC GS * W
Ver4.0 Ver3.0
ESC GS * C
• STAR Original Auto Logo Commands

Commands Model Name
ESCGS/W Ver4.0 x x X X ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
○
or later or later or later
ESC GS / C Ver4.0 x x X X ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
○
ESC GS / 1 Ver4.0 x x X X ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
○
○
○
○
○
○
• Star Original User ID Commands

Commands Model Name
ESC GS % W x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS % 0 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS % 1 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS % P x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
• Star Original Buzzer Commands

Commands Model Name
Ver 5.0
ESC GS BEL
or later x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver 1.3
ESC GS EM DC1 x x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver 1.3

• Star Original PDF417 Commands
Commands Model Name
Ver 3.1
ESC GS x S 0 x x x or later ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver 3.1
Ver 3.1
Ver 3.1
Ver 3.1
ESC GS x D x x x or later ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver 3.1
ESC GS x P x x x or later ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver 3.1
ESC GS x I x x x or later ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
• Star Original Print Starting Trigger Control Commands

Commands Model Name
Ver1.1
ESC GS g 0 x x x x or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver1.1
• Star Original QR Commands

Commands Model Name
Ver1.2
ESC GS y S 0 x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
ESC GS y D 1 x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
ESC GS y P x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver1.2
ESC GS y I x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
• Star Original Page Function Commands
Commands Model Name
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ or later or later ○
• Star Original Reduced Printing Function Command

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS c x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○

• Star Original Text Search Commands
Model Name
Commands
ESC GS ) B (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 66) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later
• Star Original Printer Information Transmission Command

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS ) I (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later
• Star Original Individual Logo Command

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
ESC GS ) L (fn = 49) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later
ESC GS ) L (fn = 50) x x x x x x x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec. B
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
or later or later
• Star Original Audio Commands

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS s O x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS s P x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS s R x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS s I x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS s U x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS s T x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

7-2 Parallel Interface
Commands Model Name
HT ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CR ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CAN ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.0
DLE EOT Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2
Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2
later later later
DLE ENQ x ○ x x x x x x x x x x x
DLE DC4 ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC SP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC $ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC % ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC & ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC * Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B
ESC - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC = ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ? ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC @ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC D ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC G ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC J ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC M ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
ESC R Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B
Spec. B Spec. B
later later
ESC S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC T ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC \ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC a ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. B-α Spec. B-α Spec. B-α
ESC c 3 Ver 4.0 or Ver 4.0 or Ver 5.0 or Spec.B-β Spec.B-β Spec.B-α Spec.B-α Spec.B-β Spec.B-α Spec.B-α Spec.B-α Spec.B-α Spec.B-α
later later later
ESC c 4 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC c 5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC d ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC p ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC t Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B

Commands Model Name
ESC { ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS p ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS q ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS $ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS * ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( A ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C
GS ( K (fn=50) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
GS ( L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0
GS ( L (fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS 8 L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0
GS 8 L (fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( N x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
×
Ver.2.0
or later

Commands Model Name
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
×
Ver.2.0
or later
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
Ver.2.0
GS / ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS : ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS B ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS C 0 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 1 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C : x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS E x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS H ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 4.4 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.1
GS I Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 4.5 Ver. 3.1 Ver. 3.1 Ver. 3.2
GS L ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS P ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS T x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS \ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ^ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
GS b x x x x x x x x x x or later or later ○
GS c x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS f ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS h ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A:
Ver. 1.2
or older
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
GS k Spec.
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
A,B,C:
Ver.2.0
or later
GS r ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS v 0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS w ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Commands Model Name
FS ! ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS & Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec.B Spec.A
FS - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS . ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS C ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS S ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS W ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Commands Model Name
FF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
DLE ENQ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS FF x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS < ○ ○ ○ x x ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS V ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS = ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS t Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
ESC GS + x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
to 4.4 to 2.0 to 2.0 to 2.0
ESCGS#m Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Spec.C
Spec. B
Spec.C Spec.C Spec.C
Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C
Ver.5.0 Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0
Commands Model Name

ESCRSF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.0
~1.4 ~1.4
ESCRSL x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 2.0 Ver. 2.0
or later or later
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 2.0~ Ver. 2.0~ Ver. 2.0~
ESCGSETX x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B ○ ○ ○ ○ Spec. B
Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0

Commands Model Name

Commands Model Name
ESC GS * 0 Ver4.0 x x Ver3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
ESC GS * 1 Ver4.0 x x Ver3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
ESC GS * 2 Ver4.0 x x Ver3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
ESCGS*W Ver4.0 x x Ver3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
ESC GS * C Ver4.0 x x Ver3.0 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later

Commands Model Name
ESCGS / W Ver4.0 x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
○
or later or older or older
ESC GS / C Ver4.0 x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3

○
Ver4.0 Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
ESC GS / 1
or later x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ or older or older ○
ESC GS / 2 Ver4.0 x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
○

○

○

○

○

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0
ESC GS BEL or later x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver1.3
Ver1.3

Commands Model Name
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
ESC GS x D x x x or later ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
Ver3.1
Ver3.1

Commands Model Name
Ver1.1
Ver1.1

Commands Model Name
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2

Commands Model Name
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ or later or later ○

Commands Model Name

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn = 66) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) I (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn = 49) x x x x x x x x x x Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3 ○
or later or later
ESC GS ) L (fn = 50) x x x x x x x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec. B
Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.3
or later or later

Commands Model Name

7-3 USB I/F (Ver 1.0) • Ethernet I/F (Silex 1.0)
Commands Model Name
TSP700 TSP600 TSP800 TUP900 TSP1000 TSP700II TSP650 TSP650 TSP800II FVP10 BSC10 TSP043 TSP650II
HT x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
LF x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FF x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
CR x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
CAN x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
DLE EOT x x x x x x x x x x x x x
DLE ENQ x x x x x x x x x x x x x
DLE DC4 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC FF x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC SP x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC ! x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC $ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC % x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC & x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC * x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
ESC - x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC 2 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC 3 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC = x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC ? x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC @ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC D x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC E x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC G x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC J x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC L x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC M x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC R x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
ESC S x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC T x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC V x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC W x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC \ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC a x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC c 4 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC c 5 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC d x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC p x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC t x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
ESC { x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS p x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS q x x x ○ (*) x x x x x x x x x
GS ! x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS $ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
GS * x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( A x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
GS ( K (fn=50) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS ( L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS 8 L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS ( N x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS / x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS : x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS B x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS C 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS C 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS C 2 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
GS C ; x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS E x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS H x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
Spec. A
Ver. 4.4
or older
GS I x x x Spec. B x x x x x x x x x
Ver. 4.5 or
later
GS L x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS P x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS T x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS V x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS W x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS \ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ^ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS b x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS c x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS f x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS h x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS k x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
Spec. B
GS r x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS v 0 × × × ○ × × × × × × × × ×
GS w × × × ○ × × × × × × × × ×

Commands Model Name
FS ! x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS & x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
FS - x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS . x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS 2 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS C x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS S x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
FS W x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
FF x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
DLE ENQ x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS FF x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( F x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=1 x x x ○ (*) x x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=2 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=3 x x x ○ (*) x x x x x x x x x
GS < x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS V x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS = x x x ○ (*) x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS t x x x Spec. A x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS + x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Spec. B
ESCGS#m x x x x x x x x x x x x
(*)
ESCRSF x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESCRSC x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESCRSL x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESCGSETX x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC SYN 0 x x x ○ x x x x x x x x x
ESC SYN 3 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS
SUB DC1
x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS
SUB DC2
ESC GS
SUB DC3

Commands Model Name
Ver3.0
ESC GS * 0 x x x or later x x x x x x x x x
Ver3.0
Ver3.0
Ver3.0
ESCGS*W x x x or later x x x x x x x x x
Ver3.0
ESC GS * C x x x or later x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESCGS/W x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS / C x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS / 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS BEL x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS EM DC1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS EM DC 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
Ver3.1
ESC GS x S 0 x x x or later x x x x x x x x x
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
Ver3.1
ESC GS x D x x x or later x x x x x x x x x
Ver3.1
ESC GS x P x x x or later x x x x x x x x x
Ver3.1
ESC GS x I x x x or later x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS g 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS g 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS y S 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS y D 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS y D 2 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS y P x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS y I x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS c x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS ) I (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS s O x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s P x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s R x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s I x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s U x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s T x x x x x x x x x x x x x

7-4 USB I/F (Ver 2.0)
Commands Model Name
HT x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LF x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FF x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
CAN x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.0
or older or older
DLE EOT x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2
Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 Ver. 2.0 or
Ver. 2.0 or Ver. 2.0 or later
later later
DLE DC4 x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC FF x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC SP x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ! x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC $ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC % x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC & x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC * x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B
ESC - x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC 3 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC = x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC ? x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC @ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC D x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC E x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC G x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC J x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC L x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC M x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
ESC R x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.B
Spec. B Spec. B
later late
ESC S x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC T x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC V x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC W x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC \ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC a x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC c 4 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC c 5 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC d x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC p x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC t x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.B Spec.B Spec.B
ESC { x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS p x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Commands Model Name
FS q x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ! x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS $ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS * x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( A x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.B Spec.B Spec.C Spec.C Spec.C
GS ( K (fn=50) x x x x x x x x x x ○ ○ ○
Ver2.0 Ver2.0
GS ( L (fn=112) x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver2.0 Ver2.0
GS 8 L (fn=112) x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later or later
GS ( N x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=68) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=70) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○
×
Ver.2.0
or later
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○ ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × ○ ○
×
Ver.2.0
or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later

Commands
Model Name
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=72) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS / x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS : x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS B x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS C 0 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 1 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C ; x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS E x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS H x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver. 4.4 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.2
GS I x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 4.5 or Ver. 3.1 or Ver. 3.1 or Ver. 3.3 or
later later later later
GS L x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS P x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS T x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS V x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS W x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS \ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS ^ x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver1.3 Ver1.3
GS b x x x x x x x x x x ○
or later or later
GS c x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS f x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS h x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec.A,B:
Ver. 1.2
or older
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
GS k x x x
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec.A,B,C
Ver.2.0
or later
GS r x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS v 0 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
GS w x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Commands
Model Name
FS ! x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS & x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. A
FS - x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS . x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS C x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS S x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
FS W x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Commands Model Name
FF x x x ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
DLE ENQ x x x ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS FF x x x ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS ( M
x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x x
n=1
GS ( M
n=2
GS ( M
n=3
GS < x x x x x ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x
GS V x x x ○ ○ ○ x x ○ ○ ○ ○ x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS = x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS t x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
ESC GS + x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver.1.0~ Ver.1.0~ Ver.1.0~ Ver.1.0~
4.4 2.0 2.0 2.0
ESCGS # m x x x Spec. C
Spec. B Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C
Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. B
Ver.5.0 Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0
ESCRSF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver.1.3~ Ver.1.0~
1.4 1.4
ESCRSL x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver.2.0 Ver.2.0
or later or later
Ver.2.0~ Ver.2.0~ Ver.2.0~
ESCGSETX x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B ○ ○ ○ ○ Spec. B
Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0 Ver.3.0

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS
SUB DC1
x x x x x x x ○ x x x x x
ESC GS
SUB DC2
ESC GS
SUB DC3

Commands
Model Name
Ver3.0
ESC GS * 0 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later
Ver3.0
ESC GS * 1 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later
Ver3.0
ESC GS * 2 x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later
Ver3.0
ESCGS * W x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later
Ver3.0
ESC GS * C x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
or later
Commands Model Name
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESCGS / W x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / C x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 1 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 2 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 3 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 4 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 5 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Ver.1.3 Ver.1.3
ESC GS / 6 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○
or later or later
Commands Model Name
ESC GS BEL x x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
ESC GS EM Ver1.3
x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DC1 or later
ESC GS EM Ver1.3
x x x x x ○ x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
DC2 or later
Commands Model Name
Ver3.1
ESC GS x S 0 x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
or later
Ver3.1
ESC GS x S 1 x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
or later
Ver3.1
ESC GS x S 2 x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
or later
Ver3.1
ESC GS x S 3 x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
or later
Ver3.1
ESC GS x D x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
or later
Ver3.1
Ver3.1

Commands Model Name
Ver1.1
Ver1.1

Commands Model Name
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2

Commands Model Name
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Ver1.3 Ver1.3
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ or later or later ○

Commands Model Name

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn = 66) x x x x x x x x x x Ver1.3 Ver1.3 ○
or later or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) I (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x Ver1.3 Ver1.3 ○

or later or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn = 49) x x x x x x x x x x Ver1.3 Ver1.3 ○
or later or later
ESC GS ) L (fn = 50) x x x x x x x x x x Spec.A Spec.A
Ver1.3 Ver1.3 Spec. B
or later or later

Commands Model Name
On USB printer class, the following models ignore the status request command.
• TSP700, TSP600, TSP800, TUP900, TSP1000, TSP700II, Ver. 1.0 to Ver.1.4, TSP650 Ver. 1.0 to Ver. 1.4

7-5 Powered USB I/F
Commands Model Name
HT x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
LF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
CAN x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
DLE EOT x x x x x x x x x Spec. B-2 x x x
DLE DC4 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC FF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC SP x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC ! x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC $ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC % x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC & x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC * x x x x x x x x x Spec.A x x x
ESC - x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC 2 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC 3 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC = x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC ? x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC @ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC D x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC E x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC G x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC J x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC L x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC M x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC R x x x x x x x x x Spec.A x x x
ESC S x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC T x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC V x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC W x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC \ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC a x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC c 4 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC c 5 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC d x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC p x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC t x x x x x x x x x Spec.A x x x
ESC { x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS p x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS q x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ! x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS $ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS * x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ( A x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x x x x x x x Spec.B x x x
GS ( L (fn=112) x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS 8 L (fn=112) x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ( N x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=68) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=70) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=72) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS / x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS : x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS B x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS C 0 x x x x ○ ○ x x x ○ x x x
GS C ; x x x x ○ ○ x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
GS E x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS H x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS I x x x x x x x x x Spec. B x x x
GS L x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS P x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS T x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS V x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS W x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS \ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ^ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS b x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS c x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS f x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS h x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
Spec. A
GS k x x x x x x x x x x x x
Spec. B
GS r x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS v 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS w x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
FS ! x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS & x x x x x x x x x Spec. A x x x
FS - x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS . x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS 2 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS C x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS S x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
FS W x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands
Model Name
FF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
DLE ENQ x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS FF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS ( F x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS < x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
GS V x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS = x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS t x x x x x x x x x Spec. B x x x
ESC GS + x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESCGS # m x x x x x x x x x Spec. C x x x
ESCRSF x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESCRSC x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESCRSL x x x x x x x x x Spec. B x x x
ESCGSETX x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands
Model Name

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS * 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESCGS * W x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS * C x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESCGS / W x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS / C x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS / 1 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS BEL x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS EM DC1 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS EM DC2 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS x S 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS x D x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS x P x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS x I x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS g 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS g 1 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS y S 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS y D 1 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS y D 2 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS y P x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS y I x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS c x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x

Commands
Model Name

Commands
Model Name


Commands
Model Name

7-6 Ethernet I/F
Commands Model Name
HT x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
LF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
CAN x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.0
DLE EOT x x x x Spec. B Spec. B-2 Spec. B-2 x x Spec. B-2
later later later
DLE DC4 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC FF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC SP x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC ! x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC $ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC % x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC & x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC * x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A x x Spec.B
ESC - x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC 2 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC 3 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC = x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC ? x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC @ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC D x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC E x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC G x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC J x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC L x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC M x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC R x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A x x Spec.B
ESC S x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC T x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC V x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC W x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC \ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC a x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC c 4 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC c 5 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC d x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC p x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC t x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A x x Spec.B
ESC { x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS p x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS q x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS ! x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS $ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS * x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Commands Model Name
GS ( A x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x x Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.A Spec.B Spec.B x x Spec.C
GS ( K (fn=50) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
GS ( L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
Ver　2.0 Ver　2.0
GS ( L (fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS 8 L (fn=48) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
Ver2.0 Ver2.0
GS 8 L (fn=112) x x x x x or later or later ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS ( N x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=68) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=70) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × ×
×
Ver.2.0
or later
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × ×
×
Ver.2.0
or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later

Commands Model Name
GS ( k Ver.2.0
(cn=52,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS ( k Ver.2.0
(cn=52,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS ( k Ver.2.0
(cn=52,fn=72) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS ( k Ver.2.0
(cn=52,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS ( k Ver.2.0
(cn=52,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
GS / x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS : x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS B x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 0 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 1 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C 2 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS C ; x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS E x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS H x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.2
GS I x x x x Spec. A Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. A Spec. B x x Spec. B
later later later
GS L x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS P x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
GS T x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS V x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS W x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS \ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS ^ x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS b x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
GS c x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS f x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS h x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Spec. A:
Ver. 1.2
or older
Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
GS k x x x x x x Spec.
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
A,B,C:
Ver.2.0
or later
GS r x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS v 0 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
GS w x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Commands
Model Name
FS ! x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS & x x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A x x Spec. A
FS - x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS . x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS 2 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS C x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS S x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
FS W x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Commands
Model Name
FF x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
DLE ENQ x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
GS FF x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
GS ( F x x x x ○ x x x x x x x x
GS ( M n=1 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x x
GS < x x x x x ○ x x ○ ○ x x x
GS V x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS = x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS t x x x x Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A x x Spec. B
ESC GS + x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
Ver. 1.0~ Ver. 1.0~ Ver. 1.0~
2.0 2.0 2.0
ESCGS # m x x x x Spec. B Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C Spec. C x x Spec. C
Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0
ESCRSF x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Spec. A Spec. A
Ver. 1.3~ Ver. 1.0~
1.4 1.4
ESCRSL x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B x x Spec. B
Ver. 2.0 Ver. 2.0
or later or later
Ver. 2.0~ Ver. 2.0~ Ver. 2.0~
ESCGSETX x x x x x Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B ○ ○ x x Spec. B
Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0 Ver. 3.0

Commands Model Name
ESC SYN 0 x x x x x x x ○ x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS * 0 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS * 1 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS * 2 x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESCGS * W x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS * C x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Commands
Model Name
ESCGS / W x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / C x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 1 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 2 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 3 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 4 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 5 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS / 6 x x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○

Commands
Model Name
ESC GS BEL x x x x ○ ○ ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
Ver1.3
ESC GS EM DC1 x x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ x x ○
Ver1.3
ESC GS EM DC2 x x x x x or later ○ x ○ ○ x x ○

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS x S 0 x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
ESC GS x D x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
ESC GS x P x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x
ESC GS x I x x x x ○ ○ x ○ ○ ○ x x x

Model Name
Commands
Ver1.1
ESC GS g 0 x x x x or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
Ver1.1
ESC GS g 1 x x x x or later ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Model Name
Commands
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2
Ver1.2

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ x x ○

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS C x x x x x x x x x ○ x x x
Star Original Text Search Commands

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x ○ x x ○
ESC GS ) B (fn = 66) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) I (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn = 48) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
ESC GS ) L (fn = 49) x x x x x x x x x x x x ○
ESC GS ) L (fn = 50) x x x x x x x x x x x x Spec. B

Commands Model Name
• Ethernet I/F Status Specifications
Model Name
Status x x x x Spec. A To Ver. 1.4 To Ver. 1.4 Ver. 1.0 Spec. B Spec. B x x Spec. B
Specifications Spec. A Spec. A Spec. A
for Ethernet From Ver. From Ver. From Ver.
I/F 2.0 2.0 2.0
Spec. B Spec. B Spec. B
(*1) The following is the status of support for Ethernet I/F.

Affected by the combination with the following Ethernet I/F (F/W versions).
• IFBD-HE05/06 F/W Version (Main) Ver. 1.0.1: Command Invalid
• IFBD-HE05/06 F/W Version (Main) Ver. 1.1.0: Command Enabled

7-7 Wireless LAN I/F
Commands Model Name
HT ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
LF ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FF ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
CR ○ x ○ x x x x x x x x x x
CAN ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
Spec. B-1
Ver. 1.4
or older
DLE EOT Spec. A x Spec. A x Spec. B Spec. B-2 x x x x x x x
Ver. 2.0 or
later
DLE DC4 ○ x ○ x x ○ x x x x x x x
ESC FF ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC SP ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC ! ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC $ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC % ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC & ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC * Spec.A x Spec.A x Spec.A Spec.A x x x x x x x
ESC - ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC 2 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC 3 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC = ○ x ○ x x ○ x x x x x x x
ESC ? ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC @ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC D ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC E ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC G ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC J ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC L ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC M ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC R Spec.A x Spec.A x Spec.A Spec.A x x x x x x x
ESC S ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC T ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC V ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC W ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC \ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC a ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
Spec.B-α Spec.B-α
ESC c 3 Ver4.0 x Ver5.0 x x x x x x x x x x
or later or later
ESC c 4 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC c 5 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC d ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC p ○ x ○ x x ○ x x x x x x x
ESC t Spec.A x Spec.A x Spec.A Spec.A x x x x x x x
ESC { ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
FS p ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS q ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ! ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS $ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS * ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ( A ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ( K x x x x Spec.A Spec.A x x x x x x x
GS ( K (fn=49) x x x x Spec.A Spec.A x x x x x x x
Ver2.0
GS ( L (fn=112) x x x x x x x x x x x x
or later
Ver2.0
GS 8 L (fn=112) x x x x x x x x x x x x
or later
GS ( N x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=68) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=70) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=72) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ×

Commands Model Name
GS ( k (cn=48) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS ( k (cn=49) x x x x x x x x x x x x x
GS / ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS : ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS B ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS C 0 x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS C ; x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS E x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS H ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
Spec. A
Ver. 3.0 or
older
GS I Spec. A x Spec. A x Spec. A Spec. B x x x x x x x
Ver. 3.1 or
later
GS L ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS P ○ x ○ x x ○ x x x x x x x
GS T x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS V ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS W ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS \ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ^ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS b ○ x ○ x x x x x x x x x x
GS c ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS f x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS h x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS k Spec.A,B x Spec.A,B x Spec.A,B Spec.A,B x x x x x x x
GS r ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS v 0 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS w ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
FS ! ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS & Spec. A x Spec. A x Spec. A Spec. A x x x x x x x
FS - ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS . ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS 2 ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS C ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS S ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
FS W ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
FF ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
DLE ENQ ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS FF x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
GS ( F x x x x ○ x x x x x x x x
GS < ○ x ○ x x ○ x x x x x x x
GS V ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS = ○ x ○ x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC GS t Spec. A x Spec. A x Spec. A Spec. A x x x x x x x
ESC GS + x x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
ESCGS#m Spec. B x Spec. B x Spec. B Spec. B x x x x x x x
ESCRSF x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESCRSC x x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
Spec. A
Ver. 1.3~
1.4
ESCRSL x x x x x Spec. B x x x x x x x
Ver. 2.0
or later
Spec. A
Ver. 2.0
ESCGSETX x x x x x Spec. B x x x x x x x
Ver. 3.0
or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS SUB DC1 x x x x x x x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
Ver4.0
ESC GS * 0 or later x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
Ver4.0
Ver4.0
Ver4.0
ESCGS * W or later x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
Ver4.0
ESC GS * C
or later x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
Ver4.0
ESCGS / W or later x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
Ver4.0
ESC GS / C or later x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
Ver4.0
ESC GS / 1 or later x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
Ver4.0
Ver4.0
Ver4.0
Ver4.0
Ver4.0

Commands Model Name
ESC GS BEL Ver5.0 x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
or later
ESC GS EM Ver1.3
x x x x x x x x x x x x
DC1 or later
ESC GS EM Ver1.3
x x x x x x x x x x x x
DC2 or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS x S 0 x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC GS x D x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC GS x P x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x
ESC GS x I x x x x ○ ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
Ver1.1
ESC GS g 0 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later
Ver1.1
ESC GS g 1 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later

Commands Model Name
Ver1.2
ESC GS y S 0 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later
Ver1.2
or later
Ver1.2
or later
Ver1.2
ESC GS y D 1 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later
Ver1.2
ESC GS y D 2 x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later
Ver1.2
ESC GS y P x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later
Ver1.2
ESC GS y I x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
or later

Commands Model Name
ESC GS h 0 x x x x x ○ x x x x x x x
ESC GS h 1 x x x x x ○ x x x x x x x

Commands Model Name
ESC GS c x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Commands Model Name

Commands Model Name
Commands Model Name
Commands Model Name
ESC GS s O x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s P x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s R x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s I x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s U x x x x x x x x x x x x x
ESC GS s T x x x x x x x x x x x x x

7-8 Bluetooth I/F
Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
HT × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
LF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
CR × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
CAN × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec. Spec.
B-2 B-2 Spec.
DLE EOT × × × × × × × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0 B-2
or later or later
DLE ENQ × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
DLE DC4 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC FF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC SP × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC ! × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC $ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC % × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC & × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.A Spec.A
ESC * × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC - × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC 2 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC 3 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC = × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC ? × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC @ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC D × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC E × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC G × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC J × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC L × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC M × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.A Spec.A
ESC R × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC S × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC T × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC V × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC W × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC \ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC a × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.B-α Spec.B-α
ESC c 3 × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B-α
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC c 4 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC c 5 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC d × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC p × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.A Spec.A
ESC t × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC { × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
FS g 1 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
FS g 2 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS p × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS q × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS ! × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS $ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS * × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS ( A × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.B
GS ( K (fn=49) × × × × × Spec.A × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.C
or later
GS ( K (fn=50) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=48) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=51) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=64) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( L (fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
Ver2.0
GS ( L (fn=112) × × × × × × × or later × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=48) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=51) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=64) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS 8 L (fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
Ver2.0
GS 8 L (fn=112) × × × × × × × or later × × × ○

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS ( N × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=68) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=70) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=48,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × ×
×
Ver.2.0
or later
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=69) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
○
Ver. 1.2
or older
GS ( k (cn=49,fn=82) × × × × × × × × × × × ×
×
Ver.2.0
or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=51,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=67) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=71) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=72) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver.2.0
GS ( k (cn=52,fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS / × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS : × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS B × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS C 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS C ; × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS E × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS H × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Commands Model Name
Spec.B Spec.A
GS I × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS L × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS P × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS T × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS V × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS W × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS \ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS ^ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
GS b × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS c × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS f × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS h × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec. A,B:
Ver. 1.2
Spec.A,B: Spec.A,B: or older
GS k × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.
or later or later A,B,C:
Ver.2.0
or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS r × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS v 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS w × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS ! × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.A: Spec.A:
FS & × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.A
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS - × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS . × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS 2 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS C × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS S × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FS W × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
FF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
DLE ENQ × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS FF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
GS ( F × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( M n=1 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( M n=2 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
GS ( M n=3 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS < × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
GS V × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS = × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.A: Spec.A:
ESC GS t × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS + × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.C: Spec.C:
ESCGS#m × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESCRSF × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESCRSC × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Spec.B: Spec.B:
ESCRSL × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec.B
or later or later
Spec. B:
Ver. 1.2
Spec.C: Spec.C: or older
ESCGSETX × × × × × Ver5.0 × × Ver2.0 × × × Spec. C:
or later or later
Ver.2.0
or later

Commands Model Name
ESC SYN 0 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC SYN 1 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC SYN 3 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC SYN 4 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS SUB DC1 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS SUB DC2 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS SUB DC3 × × × × × × × × × × × × ×

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS * 0 x x x x x or later x x or later x x x ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESCGS * W x x x x x or later x x or later x x x ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS * C x x x x x or later x x or later x x x ○

Commands
Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESCGS/W × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS / C × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS / 1 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0

Commands
Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS BEL × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS EM DC1 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS EM DC2 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Model Name
Commands
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS x S 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS x D × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS x P × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS x I × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS g 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS g 1 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS y S 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS y D 1 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS y D 2 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS y P × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS y I × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ×

Commands Model Name
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS h 0 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○
Ver5.0 Ver2.0
ESC GS h 1 × × × × × or later × × or later × × × ○

Model Name
Commands
ESC GS c × × × × × × × × × × × × ○

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) B (fn=48) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=49) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=50) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=64) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=65) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=66) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=80) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=81) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=96) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) B (fn=＝97) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) I (fn＝48) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○

Commands Model Name
ESC GS ) L (fn＝48) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) L (fn＝49) × × × × × × × × × × × × ○
ESC GS ) L (fn＝50) × × × × × × × × × × × × Spec.B

Commands Model Name
ESC GS s O × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS s P × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS s R × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS s I × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS s U × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
ESC GS s T × × × × × × × × × × × × ×

URL: http://www.starmicronics.com/support/

Sbi Clerical Rect Advertisement 2019 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sbi Clerical Rect Advertisement 2019 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sbi Clerical Rect Advertisement 2019 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Line Thermal Printer

Star Micronics Co., Ltd.

ESC/POS Command Specifications

ESC/POS Command Specifications

ESC/POS Command Specifications

ESC/POS Command Specifications

• Line Thermal Printers

< Applicable Models>

ESC/POS is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

ESC/POS Command Specifications

Data transmission method Serial

1-1-2 Switching Between Online and Offline

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-1

<Signal Array and Functions>

Pin Signal Signal

Busy condition (*1)

• When the cover is open - BUSY

(2) XON/XOFF control is selected:

(*1) DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-2

(*1) DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

1-1-5 Serial Interface Connection Example

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-3

DIPSW Settings: Conditions for BUSY

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-4

Minimum reset pulse width: TRS 1 ms (minimum)

When using pin 6 (DSR)

When using pin 25 (INIT)

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-5

3. Switching Between Online and Offline

1-2-2 Reverse Mode (Printer to Host Communications)

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-6

NC: Not Connected ND: Not Defined

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-7

Data Data n Data n+1

tSetup tSTB tHold-2

tReply tACK tnBUSY

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-8

Example: The following shows an ASB status in a normal (idled) state.

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-9

Specifications Conforms to USB 2.0 Full Speed

1-4 Ethernet Interface

Specifications Conforms to IEEE 802.3

1-5 Wireless LAN Interface

Specifications Conforms to IEEE 802.11b

1-6 Powered USB

Specifications See the Product Specifications Manual IFBD-BPU03

1-7 Bluetooth Interface

ESC/POS Command Specifications 1-10

This printer has two print modes:

<Transition of Stand Mode Page Mode>

2-2 Settings Using Commands in Standard Mode and Page Mode

ESC/POS Command Specifications 2-1

ESC/POS Command Specifications 2-2

Fig. 2.3.2 Character Data Expansion Position

B Point B Point B Point B Point HRI Characters

ESC/POS Command Specifications 2-3

4 dot Download Bit Image

Point B Point B Point B Point B